《One Man's Journey (2nd Draft)》


 Chapter 1 Everyday Life

    Everyday Life


    The morning sunlight had just started to creep into the room, forcing Adam to hide deeper into his blankets with a small rustle. His mother¡¯s voice called out, for the second time: ¡°Come on you two, it¡¯s time to get up!¡±


    Adam heard a grumble from the bed opposite his own, as his younger sister groggily got up. Shortly after, the slow pitter patter of her small feet could be heard going across the wood floor. After she left, Adam drifted off to sleep again. A few minutes later, Adam heard the frightening call of the most terrible monster one could possibly imagine: ¡°Amadeus Baum Finch, don¡¯t make me come in there to wake you up!¡±


    Adam immediately bolted up from his covers, crying out: ¡°I¡¯m up!¡± Inwardly he was grumbling: ¡®Why can¡¯t you let me sleep in for just a little bit!?¡¯


    It wasn¡¯t that his mother was truly a monster, just¡­ she would always yell at him and take the fun out many things in life, like teasing his sister or sleeping in.


    Yawning, Adam threw his covers off and finally walked lazily out of his room. The Finches¡¯ house was made from rough hewn wood and was quite small with only two bedrooms and a larger common area that was a kitchen, dining room, and living room all in one. Just to the side of their house, they did have a small lavatory that also held a wooden wash tub. However, with no plumbing in the city, Adam was sometimes forced to clean the gunk out of the collection bucket.


    While the squat little house was almost intolerably small, it wasn¡¯t because the Finch family was poor. They spent most of their time at the tavern Vivienne ran that was called The Dancery. It was a fairly popular place that served food and ale while providing entertainment in the form of music and dancing. In a way, they found it refreshing to go from the huge bustling Dancery to their quaint little home. Except for the lavatory, but there was no fixing that!


    Adam perked up as smells began tantalizing his nose: ¡°How did I not smell the eggs and bacon!?¡± he exclaimed.


    Newly awake, Adam ran to his spot at the table and began devouring the food that was placed there. Emilia, his sister, sat next to him and was eating her own meal slowly while fighting to stay awake. Vivienne turned around from the counter by the wood stove, where she was pouring some fresh milk into glasses. Placing one in front of Adam, she said: ¡°Nice of you to join us this morning.¡±


    After taking a quick gulp of milk to wash his food down, Adam flashed a big smile to her: ¡°Mornin¡¯ Mom!¡±


    Vivienne slightly smiled as she gently knocked Adam¡¯s head before placing a glass of milk in front of Emilia, and looking at the tottering child, she asked: ¡°Emilia, why are you still so sleepy?¡±


    In a sleepy slur, she mumbled: ¡°Adam wash lookin¡¯ at the night shky again.¡±


    Vivienne gave Adam a stern stare. Adam tried to quickly cover his tracks: ¡°N-no I didn¡¯t!¡±


    Vivienne¡¯s stare only deepened: ¡°Okay, maybe a little, but it really wasn¡¯t that much!¡±


    Vivienne finally said: ¡°When your father wakes up, we¡¯ll have a little talk. You know you¡¯re not supposed to keep Emilia up like that.¡±


    Adam slumped down a bit. ¡®Father is probably going to intensify my training!¡¯


    Happy to see Adam reflecting a bit, Vivienne sat down in her own place and started to eat. Adam looked at the empty spot next to her and noticed that there were remains of breakfast on a plate. Looking by the door to the house, Adam also noticed a sword plainly ornamented with eagles hanging to the side. Adam asked: ¡°So dad¡¯s already home?¡±


    Vivienne nodded: ¡°He finished his night patrol a while ago. If you had gotten up when I first called, you might have seen him before he tumbled into bed.¡±


    Besides a quiet ¡®urk¡¯ Adam didn¡¯t have anything to say to that. Vivienne moved on from the subject saying: ¡°After you two finish eating, you should get properly dressed. School will start soon.¡±


    ----------------------------------------


    Adam looked the very image of being bored. He was slouching on a pew behind the rest of the class with an obviously bored look plastered across his face. Not that he was the only one. There were plenty of others in the same position as him, watching their younger siblings attend class, but none were so animated in their boredom as Adam.


    A boy sitting next to Adam whispered to him: ¡°Adam, you¡¯re giving that look again!¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t help it! We graduated last year and now mom expects me to sit through my sister¡¯s class!? I can only stand so much school!¡± Adam whispered back.


    School in the city was very limited. The Church of Spirits was the only place where one could go to school for free. However, it was only enough to barely get kids taught how to read, write, and know some general history over three years of tutelage. While there were other schools that taught more over a longer period of time, they were expensive and Vivienne called them ¡®shady.¡¯ ¡®Whatever that means,¡¯ Adam thought to himself. ¡®Not that I want to attend more school anyway!¡¯


    Adam continually let his mind wander while Disciple Jannic taught the class about the months of the year: ¡°Now, one thing everyone everywhere in the world can agree on is how to tell time and the names of the days and months of the year. The names of the months and days of the year are to be spoken in their ancient archaic form with a formal phrase. This shows our respect for those who developed this system in the First Era!-


    Adam rolled his eyes at this: ¡®Who in their right mind came up with this system. If you actually listen to it, it¡¯s ridiculous!¡¯


    ¡°-Now, as I go through the months, repeat what I say; Einar, First Month of Spring.¡±


    Without any kind of synchronization, the young kids stumbled over the words: ¡°Einar, First Month of Spring.¡±


    In a practiced manner, Jannic nodded his head and said: ¡°Good! The next one is a little harder; Zvielen, Second Month of Spring.¡±


    And on and on the droll class went. Adam cried in mental anguish! To distract himself, he started humming. One of his favorite things was to play the flute. ¡®It¡¯s the one thing mom will never yell at me about!¡¯


    Unfortunately, Adam couldn¡¯t play his flute in the middle of class, so he had to settle with humming. Then suddenly, Jannic called out: ¡°Adam, you look so enthused about class! Do you mind telling everyone what today¡¯s date is?¡±


    Suddenly brought out of his reverie, Adam barely caught what Jannic was asking him. Adam inwardly groaned: ¡®Why do you always pick on me! I¡¯m not even here to attend class! At least it''s not a hard question this time.¡¯


    Sitting himself back upright, Adam answered: ¡°Today is the 10th of Einar, First Month of Spring, 9E977.¡±


    Jannic once again gave his practiced nod: ¡°Correct! Adam even added on the current year. We are currently in the Ninth Era, year Nine-Hundred-And-Seventy-Seven or, as Adam abbreviated; Ninth Era, Nine-Seventy-Seven. Now,-The narrative has been taken without permission. Report any sightings.


    Jannic continued on with his droll class as Adam settled back down into his slouched position. The boy next to Adam whispered: ¡°Told ya.¡±


    Adam merely gave a ¡®hmph¡¯ in response.


    ----------------------------------------


    Breaking out of the front doors of the church, Adam shouted: ¡°I¡¯m free!¡±


    Emilia quickly followed her brother, looking a little embarrassed. ¡°Can¡¯t you be more like the other older kids? Everyone in class is making fun of me!¡±


    Adam gave a dramatic sigh: ¡°I can¡¯t help it, I need fun in my life! Jannic didn¡¯t even talk about spiritualists during today¡¯s history lesson! They are the only fun part about history! Who doesn¡¯t dream of flinging fire balls and slaying an evil dragon to become a hero?¡±


    Emilia could only give a defeated sigh in return. Adam was just too unruly. ¡®If only mom was here. Then he wouldn¡¯t act out!¡¯


    With a wicked smile, Adam started ruffling her hair with his hand, saying: ¡°Don¡¯t tell me you actually find Jannic¡¯s lessons interesting!?¡±


    Emilia quickly knocked his hands away yelling: ¡°Don¡¯t!¡± She then started trying to pat her hair back down. Adam tried to sneak up on her to do it again, but Emilia quickly turned around and gave him a death glare: ¡°Do it again and I¡¯ll tell mom!¡±


    Adam gave his own defeated sigh as he dropped his hand down to his side. ¡°You¡¯re no fun.¡±


    Emilia stuck out her tongue at Adam as the two waited for either their mom or dad to come pick them up and walk them back. While they were waiting, more kids came out from the church and either started walking home, or met up with others who would walk them home. Adam was nearly eleven, yet his parents didn¡¯t consider him old enough for him to walk himself and his sister back home on their own. They seemed a little paranoid about what might happen.


    With nothing else to do while they waited, Adam decided to pull his flute out and finally get to playing. Just as he took a breath and was about to blow, Emilia yanked on his arm and said: ¡°Adam, look!¡±


    Adam gave Emilia a disgruntled look before turning his gaze toward where she was pointing. There Adam saw a few larger boys corralling a smaller boy into an dingy alley. Adam¡¯s look turned to disbelief : ¡®Are they really so stupid to bully someone near the church!?¡¯


    Adam was going to suggest that they should get an adult when Emilia took off toward the alley: ¡°Let¡¯s help him Adam!¡±


    Adam¡¯s heart leapt as he bolted after her. Adam wryly thought: ¡®And her sense of justice strikes again!¡¯


    Emilia had a head start and managed to get to the alley first. She had already started shooting off her mouth, just like she had learned from their mother: ¡°What are you doing!? You should be ashamed of yourself!¡±


    The older boys gave her a sneer as they started saying: ¡°What are you going to do about it little girlie?¡±


    Before anything more could be said, Adam took in a deep breath. If nothing else, his father¡¯s training had been good for increasing his lung capacity. With a large bellow, Adam shouted like an adult: ¡°Oy, brats!¡±


    The bullies jumped with startled eyes, only to calm down slightly after seeing it was Adam and not an adult. Before they could further get their bearings, Adam followed up: ¡°You lot better get out of here while you have the chance. Everyone else saw you dragging that poor kid down here and Jannic will be here soon!¡±


    The bullies started to panic again. While trying to look confident, Adam was inwardly screaming: ¡®Please work! Please work! Please work!¡¯


    Finally, one ran off saying: ¡°This isn¡¯t worth it!¡±


    The others quickly followed after the first. After they had left, Adam let out a breath: ¡°Thank goodness they fell for that.¡± He then turned to Emilia: ¡°But you, you shouldn¡¯t have run off like that! What if they decided to stick around and beat us up too!?¡±


    Emilia pouted: ¡°But they didn¡¯t! Besides, you said Disciple Jannic was coming, didn¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°I was lying! You took off before I could tell anyone what was going on!¡±


    Emilia defiantly puffed her cheeks at Adam, not paying any heed to his warning. Adam turned a little dour: ¡°Do you want me to tell mom and dad about this?¡±


    Emilia¡¯s cheeks quickly deflated as she stammered out: ¡°N-no! Don¡¯t do that!¡±


    Then from behind Emilia, a quiet voice quivered: ¡°E-excuse me, thanks for rescuing me.¡±


    Emilia did another quick flip of emotions as a proud smile plastered across her face. She turned to the young boy: ¡°It was no problem! All evil should face the justice of the world! As children of a Watchman, it was our duty to assist you!¡±


    Adam face palmed: ¡®There she goes into full blown justice mode.¡¯


    Adam grabbed Emilia¡¯s arm and started dragging her backward: ¡°Come on , we don¡¯t want mom or dad to show up and look for us.¡±


    Emilia quickly waved goodbye to the boy before turning around and following Adam.


    ----------------------------------------


    To Adam¡¯s misfortune, their father had come to pick them up. While Emilia got to go to The Dancery and have fun learning how to dance, Adam was forced to train with his father! Adam was certain this had something to do with him looking at the night sky late last night, but his father didn¡¯t even mention it! You¡¯d think that was good¡­ but to Adam it was worse! Adam¡¯s thoughts plagued him: ¡®Is dad expecting me to bring it up first? Or did mom forget to tell him and he doesn¡¯t know yet? Is this a test to see if I¡¯ll fess up? What do I do!?¡¯


    After the zillionth time of having his wooden sword knocked away from his hand, Adam¡¯s father asked him: ¡°When are you going to get serious about training? You won¡¯t be able to protect your sister like this.¡±


    Snapping out of his inner turmoil, Adam responded: ¡°If she wouldn¡¯t run off in her ¡®justice mode,¡¯ I wouldn¡¯t have to!¡±


    Alaric sighed: ¡°And what about in the future, when you have a family you want to protect? Learning now is your best opportunity!¡±


    Adam quietly grumbled as he picked up his wooden sword to continue training. Alaric said: ¡°If you get earnest, I might cut the training short. Then again, you seem to have enough energy to look at the sky late into the night. Maybe I should keep you longer¡­¡±


    Adam groaned ¡®So this is about last night!¡¯


    With no other option, Adam threw himself into the meatgrinder that was his father¡¯s training.


    Exhausted and slightly bruised, Adam was finally let off two hours later! Adam scampered off to The Dancery, like a thirsty man towards an oasis. Or a mouse running from a cat. Alaric followed after quickly with a smile on his face. While they were both fairly wild, with Adam and Emilia there was never a dull moment for the family.


    Entering The Dancery, Adam was bombarded by the sounds of yammering customers and music. Between the bustling crowd where customers milled and waiters pushed their way through to serve tables, Adam could see dancers on stage doing moves choreographed to the music. Adam¡¯s eyes shined as the beautifully dressed dancers danced across the stage. Adam didn¡¯t know how such a sight could get any better. ¡®Though a lot of older men say it would be better if the girls wore more revealing clothes. I wonder why? And mom gives them a crack on the head whenever she hears such a comment¡­¡¯


    Making his way through the crowd, Adam finally got to the alcove where the musicians played. They were in the middle of a song, so they only greeted Adam with an acknowledgement of their eyes. Adam smiled at them and got his flute out so he could join in on the next song.


    There was a better view of the stage from the alcove and Adam could now see that his sister was flailing about on stage in front of the dancers. Rather than people getting upset, everyone was actually cheering her on! Adam couldn¡¯t help but snigger at how ridiculous she looked, though. Vivienne was also there smiling at her daughter. Adam frowned: ¡®Always all smiles for her.¡¯


    Then Vivienne looked over at Adam and gave him a wave with the same bright smile. Adam couldn¡¯t help but smile brightly and wave back, despite his earlier dour thought. Then Alaric appeared, extending his hand to offer her a dance. Vivienne seemed to blush slightly as she accepted his invitation to the hoots of the crowd. As they danced to the music, Vivienne¡¯s practiced steps outshone Alaric¡¯s surprisingly clumsy ones. The man could almost dance while fighting, but dancing itself seemed an almost fruitless battle for him. Nonetheless, everyone seemed to enjoy the atmosphere.


    Having had his mother¡¯s smile stolen away from him, Adam gave a small sigh and before looking around at the customers close by. He could hear a few of them talking: ¡°Have you heard, Heider has cut off talks with Luxom!¡±


    ¡°Again? Is it anything serious this time?¡±


    ¡°I think so. Word just came to town that the King wants all trade with Luxom stopped! War seems to be on the horizon!¡±


    The two continued talking, with most of it going above Adam¡¯s head. Alaric and Vivienne never really talked much about this kind of stuff, but Adam had gleaned enough over time: ¡®Luxom is the kingdom just to the north of us. It is apparently full of bad people that always want to pick a fight with Heider! With our city is on the Heider side of the border and it makes most of its money by trading goods from Heider to Luxom. King Heider doesn¡¯t like how we do so much trade with Luxom, so we hardly get any support for schools and things¡­ why did mom and dad decide to live here?¡¯


    Bringing him out of his thoughts, the musician next to him said: ¡°Hey, Adam, we are starting the next song. Are you going to join in?¡±


    Throwing away those complicated thoughts, Adam enthusiastically nodded: ¡°Yeah!¡±


    Picking up his flute, Adam joined with the revelry.

 Chapter 2 Nightmare

    Nightmare


    Night had descended, and Adam was tossing and turning: ¡®Why do I have to go to sleep at the same time as Emilia!? Mom and dad both know I want to look at the night sky. I have to get out of bed and look out the window by Emilia, and it never fails that I wake her up! If that happens, I¡¯ll get yelled at again! Why can¡¯t they let me stay up and sneak into our room after I¡¯ve had my fill? Everybody would be happy then!¡¯


    Adam couldn¡¯t resist the temptation, and he crept out of bed. Ever so carefully, Adam tiptoed over to the window. Looking out, Adam saw what he considered the most beautiful thing in the world: ¡®Look at those colors!¡¯


    The night sky was filled with dancing dim tendrils of colors! Primarily an emerald green, there were also hues of blue and red. Adam stared out, entranced. It was said that those tendrils came from the various spirit planes, that it was spirit essence coming down to the world.


    The tendrils were very dim, though distinct, and hardly illuminated anything. Stars shined through the colorful night sky while the white moon, Lunas, held its constant vigil above the sleeping world. A smile grew wide on Adam¡¯s face as he watched the tendrils dance in the sky. Adam wasn¡¯t sure if he enjoyed watching dancing because it reminded him of the night sky, or he liked the night sky because it reminded him of dancing. What he liked, even more, was that he could almost feel the music those tendrils were dancing to. Before long, Adam couldn¡¯t help humming out a tune of his own. Not long after he had started, Emilia started to stir. With a sleepy mumble: ¡°Adam?¡±


    Adam broke free from his trance: ¡°Sorry Emilia. I¡¯ll go to bed soon.¡±


    Emilia mumbled something incoherent as she turned over in her bed. With a slightly guilty heart, Adam turned back to the window while doing his best to resist the urge to keep humming. After a long moment, Adam finally turned away from the window. If he stayed any longer, he would find himself humming again: ¡®I can¡¯t keep Emilia up late again¡­ I¡¯ll get yelled at!¡¯


    Just before Adam got back to his bed, he heard something odd. At least, he thought he did. He cocked his head to the side and listened to the silence of the night. The hairs on the back of his neck suddenly stood on end, as he thought: ¡®What is that?¡¯


    It was just off the edge of his perception. A sound that felt... ¡®Murky?...Black?¡¯ Those were the only things Adam could use to try and describe the sound, as confusing as it was. Before he could figure out whatever this spooky thing was, the air suddenly filled with a sharp whistling as though the air was being sucked somewhere at a fast speed! The sound then stopped as silence filled the gap for just a moment, before a larger Boom! Shook the sky and the earth!


    Adam jumped from the sudden noise and stood stunned for a moment as the house rattled and shook. Then, as the sound of the boom receded, Adam heard the frightened screaming coming from Emilia as she flailed about under her covers. Adam quickly walked over and pulled them off to hold onto his sister when the door to their room was hurriedly opened. Vivienne rushed in with concern written all over her face: ¡°Are you two alright!?¡±


    Adam nodded as Emilia clung to him. ¡°We¡¯re only frightened from that weird thunder.¡±


    Vivienne shook her head: ¡°That wasn¡¯t thunder... You two should get dressed quickly.¡±


    Adam was confused. ¡°Why?¡±


    With a slight quiver, Vivienne responded: ¡°Just do it Adam.¡±


    Adam was startled. That quiver in her voice... ¡®Is mom scared? Mom is never scared!¡¯


    With newfound fear, Adam and Emilia quickly dressed themselves. Emilia had calmed down from the shock of being woken by whatever that boom was. She asked: ¡°Any idea why mom is having us get dressed?¡±


    Adam shook his head and made to respond, but faintly heard something. It was a distant scream! Adam¡¯s heart squirmed in fright, but Vivienne entered the room before he could put more thought into it. She was dressed haphazardly and carried a shortsword Adam had never seen before in her hand.


    Adam¡¯s fear was showing on his face. Vivienne¡¯s heart softened when she saw this. She leaned the sword against the wall and then pulled Adam and Emilia into a hug: ¡°Don¡¯t be scared. That boom was probably nothing, but¡­¡± Vivienne brought Adam and Emilia¡¯s hands together, ¡°Adam, no matter what happens, just don¡¯t let go of your sister. Do you understand?¡±


    Adam vigorously nodded his head. A moment later, vicious knocking assaulted the door to the house! Vivienne straightened with a serious expression. She told the two: ¡°Wait here for a moment.¡± before grabbing the short sword and heading toward the front door.


    While Vivienne quickly made her way to the door, Adam tried to position himself so he would be able to hear what was going on better. Rather than comforting her, Emilia was becoming more unsettled. She asked: ¡°What¡¯s going on? Why¡¯s mom acting so scary?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°I¡¯m not sure, either. No matter what, don¡¯t leave my side okay?¡±


    Adam¡¯s words hardly reassured her, but Emilia still nodded her head as she tightened her grip on her brother¡¯s hand. Adam missed what was going on at the front door while talking to Emilia. Vivienne came back to them with worry clearly evident on her face: ¡°Come on, let¡¯s go.¡±


    Adam led Emilia forward by the hand while asking: ¡°Where are we going?¡±


    Vivienne looked at her children, torn between the fear that she had and worry for the two before her. ¡®What do I tell them?¡¯ She wanted to say something to comfort them, but couldn¡¯t seem to come up with anything good. She placed her free hand that wasn¡¯t holding the sword behind Emilia¡¯s back, to help support her since they were going to be walking fast. The only words that bubbled up were: ¡°Somewhere where it should be safe.¡±


    They walked out of the house and were greeted by a sight not fit for the time of day. The street was filling with panicked looking people pushing and hurrying mostly in the same direction; toward the center of town. A few carried torches, while most relied on the dim blue light from Starstone lamps along the road, to illuminate their way. Rather than the normal hubbub of a moving crowd, there was panicked shouting with an occasional scared scream within the crowd.


    Adam looked around, perturbed by the strange scene. Looking around, something caught Adam¡¯s eye. Something black was shimmering above the city line. Adam stared at it for a moment before shock hit him: ¡°Is that black fire!?¡±


    Somewhere off in the distance, possibly just out of the city limits, tongues of abyssal black flames licked the sky! The flames were so dark, contrasting against the colorful night sky, it was as though all light in the world was being sucked in!


    ¡°Don¡¯t stare, we have to move!¡± Vivienne hissed at him!


    Adam snapped out of his shock and followed his mother¡¯s lead. Together, they flung themselves into the crowd. Vivienne led them through the areas where there were fewer people to lower the chance of getting separated from each other.


    As they pressed forward, Adam and Emilia were fraught with questions. Every time one of them summoned the courage to ask one of their questions, a scream would erupt somewhere in the distance behind them. Frightened, they could only continue forward at their mother¡¯s behest, even as the screams became more frequent and turned unearthly and savage.


    Running through his head for the hundredth time, Adam thought: ¡®What is going on!?¡¯


    Like that, they pushed onward until the way forward was blocked solidly by a throng of people, all trying to go through a road that started to narrow. Hardly anyone could move and those that could, could only move slowly. If the crowd had kept their cool, the situation could have been sorted out relatively quickly. However, they had all started losing their heads from hearing all the screaming that was starting to come closer!


    Vivienne looked at the mess with worry.: ¡®I had hoped we wouldn¡¯t encounter this.¡¯


    Looking around, Vivienne saw a dark alley they could cut through. Closer than ever before, a scream erupted some way behind them.... then another, and another, and suddenly screams filled the night! The hairs on the back of everyone¡¯s necks stood on end as they heard the screams. The crowd blocking up the road all started to push forward more fervently. A few managed to move, trampling others in their wake. But the road was too narrow to allow the huge crowd to move any sizable chunk at once, especially with everyone fighting to push ahead of one another.You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    Vivienne tightened her hold of Emilia and started dragging her toward the alley, while Adam was tugged along by Emilia¡¯s other hand. Vivienne hissed to them: ¡°We have to move!¡±


    Tears started to come to Emilia¡¯s eyes as the situation was overwhelming her. She wanted to cry, but was too afraid of the screams¡­ too afraid of the way her mother was acting to do so.


    Vivienne was not oblivious to this, but there was nothing she could do at the moment. Adam also noticed and squeezed his hand in a hopefully reassuring way. ¡°Don¡¯t worry Emilia. Mom will take us away from all the scary stuff. Tomorrow, this will all just be a nightmare you can forget!¡±


    It was hardly reassuring, but just hearing Adam voice helped to ease Emilia.In response, she merely nodded her head and squeezed her hand in return.


    Vivienne quickly led them down the alley. Out the other side, the scene here was the same as the road before; people clustered together blocking the road and making it hard for anyone to move forward. The screams that were echoing over from the previous road was already whipping the crowd into a frenzy before screams started to occupy their own road. Adam looked in the direction of the screams, but there were too many people on the road to accurately see what was happening. Vivienne pushed her way forward to cut through another alley. A few started to see what she was doing and made to copy her.


    They started cutting through alley after alley, avoiding the crowds on the streets, even as more screams filled the air around them. Before long, sounds of battle also filled the night. Adam and Emilia were becoming too scared to even think about what was causing all of this. They could only shudder as Vivienne led them forward, cutting a path to safety.


    Going down one alley, Vivienne suddenly stopped for the first time since they left the crowd. She placed herself in front of Adam and Emilia, blocking their vision while raising her sword with a shaky hand.


    In a way the screams had not done, Adam¡¯s heart sunk into a bottomless pit. With his throat squeezed in fear, he barely squeaked out: ¡°Mom?¡±


    After Adam spoke, low guttural growls drifted over. It was soon followed by a beastly screech as a dark form charged at the three! Vivienne screamed in a voice filled with both terror and anger. Thrusting her sword forward, the dark creature was skewered by it! Even as its steps faltered, the momentum of the creature caused Vivienne to stumble back into Adam and Emilia. Just barely, she brought the sword to the side, forcing the creature to land next to them.


    Adam stared at the twitching creature with wide eyes as the dim light from the night sky palely illuminated it. It was once human, but the veins in its body were turned black! Around the black veins, the skin turned necrotic and oozed a sickly puss. The rest of its pallor skin clung to its emaciated form and, well, it looked plain evil!


    The thing was twitching as black blood bubbled out of its mouth. The sword had impaled it just above the clavicle, neatly severing its spine and disrupting its blood flow. It was a sure kill. Adam wasn¡¯t sure what to think of this, but his body did. Adam retched his stomach out onto the ground.


    Emilia asked with fright and concern: ¡°Adam?¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t respond, but Vivienne quickly said: ¡°Don¡¯t look!¡±


    She hadn¡¯t been able to stop Adam, but she had been able to prevent Emilia from seeing the twitching creature. Vivienne made sure Emilia was turned away from the creature while guiding both her and Adam a few steps away from it. ¡°Watch over your brother for a moment, okay?¡±


    Emilia nodded while trying to look over her shoulder at the same time. Vivienne forcefully turned her head back. Looking directly into Emilia¡¯s eyes, she sternly said: ¡°Do not look over there! Do you understand!?¡±


    Emilia nodded with quivering eyes just about ready to cry ¡®I don¡¯t like this! The way mom is acting. The scary screams. When is this going to end!?¡¯


    Emilia tightened her hold on Adam¡¯s weak and shaky hand. That sensation brought Adam out of his shock a little. With what little strength he could currently muster, Adam squeezed her hand back, the act comforting both of them.


    Vivienne quickly went over to the creature. An odd squelching sound echoed out as Vivienne sawed out the sword that was stuck in the dark creature. Adam¡¯s face paled as he heard the sounds and Emilia reflexively made to turn to look at what was going on. Adam pulled on her, forcing her to look back at him. In a weak voice, he said: ¡°Don¡¯t look at it.¡±


    Adam¡¯s words frightened Emilia. ¡®What is so scary that they don¡¯t want me to see? And it¡¯s right next to us!¡¯


    However, Adam¡¯s words had more concern to them whereas Vivienne¡¯s were more commanding. Emilia couldn¡¯t help herself stepping closer to hug Adam. Everything was too scary, and holding hands was no longer comforting enough.


    With Emilia hugging him, Adam could see over her shoulder. He saw Vivienne tear a strip of cloth from her shirt and deftly clean the blade of black blood. She didn¡¯t bother spending much time on it, though. She turned to her children and said: ¡°We have to continue.¡±


    Emilia weakly said: ¡°Can¡¯t we just go home and leave all the scary things here?¡±


    Vivienne warmly placed her hand on Emilia¡¯s head and gently said: ¡°I wish we could do that, but we can¡¯t.¡±


    The trio continued on, leaving the dark creature behind. Adam couldn¡¯t help but ask: ¡°What was that, mom?¡±


    Vivienne gave a heavy sigh. ¡°That, Adam, was a ghoul.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s that?¡± Emilia asked with trepidation and a small amount of curiosity.


    Vivienne simply responded with: ¡°A creature of nightmares.¡±


    Adam shuddered a little. Jannic had spoken of them before, during history lessons. Adam recalled what he knew of them: ¡®Dark creatures that are corrupted by spirit essence. They will attack anyone not corrupted on sight! Their blood can infect others and turn them into ghouls as well!¡¯


    Adam worriedly looked at his mother. She seemed fine, and she had cleaned most of the blood of her sword.He vaguely recalled that the ghoul¡¯s blood has to enter your body for it to affect you, so she should be fine. Still, he couldn¡¯t help but imagine her turning into a something like that dark creature they left behind. Shuddering he thought: ¡®Mom should be fine, she has to be!¡¯


    Then Adam¡¯s thoughts continued to turn: ¡®Wait, human ghouls always roam in hordes. Where there is one¡­!¡¯


    A horrible thought entered in his head. All the screaming they heard that was still echoing around them: ¡®We¡¯re being attacked by ghouls!?¡¯


    Adam was now well and truly frightened. It was then that the trio heard a faint clanking sound of metal. They turned around, hopeful at there being someone dressed in armor to help. But it was no shining knight or paladin. Instead, a pale-faced oily man, that was dressed in pitch black armor, approached them with an evil grin on his face: ¡°And here I thought patrolling the alleys was going to be boring!¡±


    The three of them were momentarily stunned as horror started to sink in deeper for Adam and Vivienne: ¡®Behind a ghoul horde is a commander, a ghoul that keeps its intelligence and leads the horde¡­ a Ghul Kommendant!¡¯


    ¡°Run!¡± Vivienne yelled.


    Quickly turning back around, Adam and Vivienne took off running while dragging Emilia with them! A maniacal cackle echoed behind them followed by the ominous sound of clanking metal that was quickly closing on them! The end of the alley was close by. Vivienne could only pray: ¡®Please, let there be someone there to help us, I can¡¯t fight that thing on my own!¡¯


    Just as they were about to reach the street, the Ghul caught up with them in a shoulder charge! Adam, Emilia, and Vivienne were all knocked out of the alley and flat onto the road. Emilia finally started screaming and sobbing as her mind started to catch up with what was happening. She was calling out to the one person she knew could vanquish any evil that threatened her: ¡°Daaad! Daaadddyy!¡±


    The Ghul couldn¡¯t help but shudder with maniacal cackling. ¡°Ke ke ke. I think I¡¯ll leave you for last, kiddo. Let¡¯s see if your daddy comes before the end!¡±


    The force of the shoulder charge had separated the three of them apart. While Emilia was sobbing on the ground, both Adam and Vivienne were stunned and had only just started trying to figure a way out of the situation.


    Adam blindly grabbed around while his mind was slowly turning and coming back to him. He was seeking to find Emilia¡¯s hand again, but instead found something hard. Looking at it, it was the short sword Vivienne had been holding! She had apparently lost hold of it when they were thrown to the ground.


    Firmly grasping the sword, Adam looked up to see Vivienne stumbling backwards along the ground as the Ghul Kommendant advanced. To their horror, its steps were faster than Vivienne¡¯s attempts to back away, allowing it to firmly stamp down on her shin. A sick crack echoed out as Vivienne screamed in pain. A seditious smile broke across the Ghul¡¯s face as it said: ¡°I wonder what face you would show me if I killed the other brat first?¡±


    Fear coursed through Adam¡¯s body. Nonetheless, he quickly got to his feet and held the short sword that was just the right size for him in the best stance he could muster. His father¡¯s words, about when he was going to finally be serious about training, echoed in his mind. Deep hatred and anger boiled away Adam¡¯s fear, as he mustered himself. He then ran forward shouting: ¡°Get away from my mother!¡±


    The Ghul turned its twisted smile to Adam: ¡°Looks like you¡¯ve got some spunk, little man!¡±


    Adam gave a battle shout as he swung at the Ghul, who drew his sword in a smooth motion that easily deflected the attack, before bringing his sword back across Adam¡¯s face with a flick of his wrist! Adam merely saw a black line rush across his vision before everything turned black and intense pain assailed him! Dropping his sword, Adam fell back while screeching in agony! His hands filled with warm liquid as he grabbed his injured face.


    Adam¡¯s mind began to fade from the intense pain. He could barely hear the Ghul speak in a derisive tone: ¡°Guess you¡¯re still just a kid.¡±


    Faintly, Adam could hear someone screaming as he stretched his hand out. He weakly thought: ¡®I must protect mom and Emilia!¡¯ Then everything turned to darkness.

 Chapter 3 Void

    Void


    ¡°Ke ke ke!¡± The Ghul¡¯s laugh echoed out across the black void! The Ghul was torturing Vivienne and Emilia before Adam! No matter how much effort he put into moving, Adam was stuck in slow motion as he tried to attack the Ghul. The Ghul would simply give Adam a derisive look and then quickly cut him down! Everything started to fade as Vivienne and Emilia¡¯s screams grew worse! Then¡­ it all started over! Again and again, the nightmare plagued Adam as he was unable to do anything to save his mother and sister from the Ghul!


    Suddenly, something changed! Everything in the void disappeared, and Adam could now feel the cool air of morning, while his body filled with a dull ache. Adam groaned as he put his hand out to feel around, while trying to open his eyes. Only¡­ nothing happened! All that greeted Adam was the black void! Adam started to panic with heavy breathing. Reaching out, he could tell he was surrounded by a wooden structure but he couldn¡¯t see anything! It wasn¡¯t the black from little to no light; he simply couldn¡¯t see! In a cracked voice, Adam called out: ¡°Mom!? Emilia!?¡±


    Instinctually, Adam raised his hands to his eyes. If he couldn¡¯t see, something was wrong with them! However, a large hand clamped on his wrist to stop him! A gruff voice spoke: ¡°Don¡¯t touch your bandages, Adam.¡±


    Adam pulled back in fear from the suddenness of it, but the hand remained firm on his wrist. He wildly asked: ¡°Who are you!?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s me, Hansen. I work¡­ worked with your father. Do you remember me?¡±


    Adam vaguely recalled the other Watchmen in his father¡¯s patrol squad. They would occasionally come over to the Dancery. ¡®Hansen¡­ the big gruff guy?¡¯ Hansen looked worn by the world and had a mean air about him. He seemed nice enough once you got to know him, though.


    Another voice spoke up: ¡°Heya Adam, Sarah just went off to go get your mother. She is taking care of some¡­ private business. She should be over in a jiffy!¡±


    Adam recoiled slightly from the new voice. He couldn¡¯t tell what was around him at all. Every sound and touch seemed to jump out and scare Adam. He tried not to pay attention to the void surrounding him, but the more he ignored it, the more it invaded his mind! The invasive void reminded him of his nightmares and of what had happened. Quickly, he asked: ¡°Is everyone okay!? We were attacked by ghouls, weren¡¯t we?¡±


    Silence answered Adam¡¯s question. This was the worst answer they could give Adam, as the silence tortured him in his personal void. Fright prevented him from asking aloud, so he could only scream in his mind: ¡®Why isn¡¯t anyone answering me!?¡¯


    Finally, Hansen¡¯s gruff voice responded with a hint of sadness: ¡°I¡¯m sorry boy, Alaric¡­¡±-Somebody tried to interrupt with a hiss: ¡°Wait, Hansen!¡±But he continued- ¡°your father is dead, and so is your sister.¡±


    The words rang in Adam¡¯s head, but he couldn¡¯t comprehend them. ¡®Dad and Emilia¡­ are dead?¡¯ Adam had only seen one thing die in his life, that ghoul Vivienne killed in the alley. His memory of the creature surfaced, but Alaric and Emilia¡¯s visage replaced it. ¡®Dead¡­ dead¡­ dead¡­¡± The words echoed repeatedly in his head breaking his mind down.


    Someone called out: ¡°Adam?¡±


    At that point, Adam completely broke down: ¡°Nooo!¡±


    Adam screamed and sobbed at the same time. In between sobs, he was muttering: ¡°No! No! No!¡±


    In his lack of sight, the void became terrifyingly real to Adam. The images of his father and Emilia dead before him wasn¡¯t just a thought; it was a reality!


    Vivienne was finally back and quickly limped toward where Adam was lying in a crude wagon cart, with her heart nearly breaking from hearing his sobs. Everyone around that cart was at a loss in how to comfort him. Disregarding her broken leg that was held in a splint, she jumped into the cart without waiting for assistance. She pulled her dear son to her chest, holding onto him tightly. ¡°Adam, it¡¯s me. I¡¯m right here for you.¡±


    Adam held tightly onto her. His sobs turned from screams and muttering to repeating one word: ¡°Mom!¡±


    Filled with concern, Vivienne asked: ¡°What¡¯s wrong sweetie?¡±


    Adam wailed: ¡°Mom, d-dad, and Emilia are dead!¡±


    Vivienne gave a piercing look that could almost kill everyone around the cart. They quickly turned their own gazes to Hansen, silently answering her unspoken question. Vivienne gave him a brief hateful look before turning back to Adam. He needed her more than she needed to take her anger out on Hansen.


    Unfortunately, there wasn¡¯t much she could do for Adam. She could only hold him and whisper sweet words as he cried his heart out. Tears came to her own eyes she tried to defiantly hold them back: ¡®I have to stay strong for Adam. I can¡¯t break down too!¡¯


    Finally, Adam passed out from the stress and exertion of crying for so long.


    ----------------------------------------


    The nightmares in the void continued. Scenes would first pass by Adam, showing him the happy smiling faces of his father and sister. Then, he would see them dead! Sometimes lying on that dark alley floor, sometimes being attacked by the Ghul. Over and over, the nightmares continued to tear at Adam¡¯s mind.


    Adam finally awoke with a start. Once again, Adam was greeted by only the void. Trying to escape it, Adam reached up to the bandages on his face to pull them off. Adam was startled when his hands were once again grabbed by another. Vivienne¡¯s voice reached out to him: ¡°Don¡¯t take your bandages off Adam. You need them to heal.¡±


    Adam pleaded: ¡°I can¡¯t stand it! It¡¯s not even black; it¡¯s a nightmare! It haunts me even when I¡¯m awake! Please, let me see something, anything! I don¡¯t want to only see dad and Emilia dead in front of me! Please!¡±


    Vivienne¡¯s heart ached at Adam¡¯s words. He was having a worse time than she could have imagined: ¡°Adam¡­ the healer said you might not be able to see for quite some time; your eyes were badly damaged!¡±The author''s narrative has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon.


    A look of horror passed over Adam¡¯s face. Vivienne quickly added: ¡°We have more bandages with medicine to replace the ones you are currently wearing. We can change them early, and maybe you will see something, just¡­ you might not see anything.¡±


    Adam clung to hope: ¡°Can we try? Please?¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    Vivienne carefully and gently unraveled the bandages covering Adam¡¯s eyes. Adam sat tense, waiting for a sliver of light to appear until the final fold of the bandage fell off. Adam was forcing his eyes open. Vivienne could see it all. There were scab marks and bruising on the sides of his eyes and across the bridge of his nose that showed where the blade cut through. As for his eyes themselves, they were stained with bloody splotches in them and remained unfocused.


    ¡°Adam¡­¡±


    His voice choked out: ¡°Why?¡±


    Vivienne took Adam into a comforting embrace. He clung to her as he cried again, though not as hard as before. Before too long, he got tired of it. ¡°Adam, let me put the new bandages on. Your eyes won¡¯t heal if we don¡¯t.¡±


    Adam nodded without saying anything. Vivienne carefully put some medicine into a fresh bandage and wrapped it around Adam¡¯s head to cover his eyes. After that, silence reigned. Vivienne gently reached out her hand to hold Adam¡¯s. He flinched slightly from the touch, but relaxed afterward.


    In the silence, Adam¡¯s thoughts were broken by the unfamiliar creaks of the cart¡¯s wheels and the stomp of feet on the ground. He hadn¡¯t paid much attention to his hearing until now, and it was a little overwhelming. Every sound seemed to jump at him out of nowhere!


    To escape the torment of his personal void, Adam moved closer to Vivienne and leaned on her. He asked: ¡°Where are we mom? Are we going somewhere?¡±


    Vivienne looked around them. They were part of a throng of people marching down a road in the middle of some grassy plains. Sighing, she said: ¡°We¡¯re fleeing from the city! Shortly after morning broke over, the ghouls fled. After they were gone, Luxom¡¯s army appeared and declared their intent to take over the city! Everyone had been fleeing to Fort Erich in the center of the city, but the Luxom army was going to siege the fort. We fled the city so we wouldn¡¯t get caught up in the fighting and the looting that would likely happen¡­ Luckily, we had seen a healer before we had to leave. Now we are heading to a city called Hessler. It¡¯s where I grew up and met your father. There¡¯s a place there that should take us in.¡±


    ¡°...Why did you and dad move out here, then?¡±


    Those words cut deeper into Vivienne than Adam could ever know. Adam wasn¡¯t trying to blame her; he was only curious about where she grew up and where they were going. However, she was the reason why they had been in a city on the outskirts of the kingdom. The reason why they had been here when the nightmare struck! She choked back the tears that were welling up in her eyes. ¡®Regardless of anything else, I can¡¯t let Adam see weakness in me! He can only rely on me now¡­¡¯


    After a quick moment to calm down and collect her thoughts, she started to speak: ¡°Well¡­ I suppose it started with me. I grew up in a place called The Madame¡¯s. In many ways, Madame¡¯s is similar to the Dancery. They serve customers while providing entertainment in forms of dance and music. Different from us, though, is that they take in orphans from the city for their workers. I was one of those orphans.¡±


    If Adam could see, he would be looking at Vivienne with wide eyes. As it was, shock still appeared evident on his face. He asked: ¡°You were an orphan?¡±


    Vivienne nodded: ¡°I don¡¯t remember my parents at all. The ones who raised me were those who I grew up with at Madame¡¯s. I lived there until I was seventeen.¡± A warm smile broke over Vivienne¡¯s face as she recalled: ¡°Around that time, Alaric had started coming to Madame¡¯s with the mercenary band he had joined. He was instantly smitten with me, though he was so shy that he always slunk around in the back! It was cute how he tried to catch my eye and talk to me.¡±


    Vivienne was silent for a moment. Adam didn¡¯t press her to continue as he tried to imagine his father as being shy. No matter how he tried to think about it: ¡®I don¡¯t see how father could ever be shy!¡±


    Then Vivienne spoke with a melancholic voice: ¡°Then I caught the eye of a nasty noble. When I went out to meet up with Alaric for our first date, the noble tried to abduct me with his guards! Alaric came just in time. He turned from his shy self into the mercenary that he was. He instantly drew his sword and cut off the noble¡¯s hand that was holding onto me!¡±


    Adam was once again filled with wonder: ¡®Why didn¡¯t mom and dad ever talk about this!? It¡¯s just like a fairy tale!¡¯


    Vivienne continued: ¡°Your father and I were at a loss at that point. Nobles are always trusted over common folk, especially an orphan or a mercenary. If he decided to make it look like we assaulted him, he could have had us arrested!¡±


    Adam was shocked: ¡°What!? Can a noble really do that?¡±


    Vivienne sagely nodded: ¡°If they are from important families, yes. Now shush and let me finish my story.¡±


    Adam immediately closed his mouth and snuggled up closer to listen to the story: ¡°We were so worried, we left without telling anyone; That night Janette, a friend of mine, actually caught up with us! We weren''t very good at hiding our departure, so we were easily found. We became frightened at the thought that if she could find us, so could the noble. Thankfully, Janette brought good news! What the noble had done was discovered, and he was actually harshly punished for what he did!¡±


    ¡°Really!?¡± Adam exclaimed. ¡°Wait, didn¡¯t you say the noble could get away with whatever he wanted?¡±


    Vivienne nodded: ¡°In many circumstances yes. However, Madame¡¯s has been around for a very long time. It has served nobles from almost every station in the kingdom! Through its connections with those nobles, Madame¡¯s protects the orphans that it takes in. I didn¡¯t think this would extend so far as protecting me from that nasty noble, but it did!¡±


    ¡°Wow, so what happened next?¡±


    ¡°Well, Alaric had already proven how far he would go for me. Even if it was in the heat of the moment, not many would stand up against a noble if he wanted to abduct someone. I¡­ also liked the manly side of him that I saw when he saved me and took me on the run.¡± Vivienne said with a sheepish grin.


    Adam imagined his father¡¯s stance when they trained. With a grin, he said: ¡°Yup, father was pretty manly!¡±


    Vivienne was happy to see Adam not so gloomy. She decided to quickly continue the story so he wouldn¡¯t get stuck on the ¡®was¡¯ part about his father: ¡°After that, I left Madame¡¯s to follow Alaric in his mercenary band. I couldn¡¯t fight, but they needed plenty of people to help supply them. Over time, I learned how to help heal simple wounds and care for armor and blades. It was hard work that was very different from my life at Madame¡¯s, but I liked seeing Alaric in his element¡­ Eventually, I found out that I was pregnant with you!¡±


    ¡°Me!?¡¯


    ¡°Yup. The closest city at that time was the one around Fort Erich. Alaric and I decided that we didn¡¯t want to travel too much while I was pregnant so we settled down there for a little while. The intent was to move to Hessler some time after you were born, but we found this perfect little place where I could live out my dream! With the stipend I received from the noble trying to abduct me, I opened my own version of Madame¡¯s. Different in many ways, but still full of welcoming people that became part of our family!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s so cool!¡± Adam said. ¡°It¡¯s like you were part of a fairy tale!¡±


    Vivienne smiled and gave Adam a hug: ¡°Just about.¡± At the same time, she thought: ¡®Except for the part where we were supposed to live happily ever after¡­¡¯


    At least the story seemed to be enough for Adam. It got him to stop thinking about Alaric and Emilia¡¯s death for a while. Instead, he was thinking about various fairy tales and imagining himself to be the hero in those stories.


    After a time, Adam once again fell asleep. This time, the void was filled with boyish dreams of being a hero and saving his loved ones.

 Chapter 4 Road to Hessler

    The Road to Hessler


    The trip to Hessler would take a few weeks. The most major issue in the journey was actually the fellow refugees that were fleeing the city. Adam picked up a voice that he believed belonged to Dallen, one of this father¡¯s patrol mates: ¡°The problem is that every one of us is in need of supplies. Soon we will come upon Edelberg. That small town has no way of supporting all the refugees. Many people will want to rest there as their first stop. I think we should not stay and just keep going. The further ahead we get off the main group, the more supplies we can get for ourselves before they¡¯re all gone.¡±


    Others in their group voiced out their agreement. A small group was formed around the wagon cart they rested in. The group was made up of Alaric¡¯s fellow patrol mates and the families a few of them had. The cart itself was not drawn by animals, but instead by Hansen! They hadn¡¯t had enough time to look for horses when they¡¯d taken the cart from the streets. Hansen had apparently made a promise to Alaric to watch over Adam and Vivienne and took it upon himself to draw the cart. This created a source of trouble for Vivienne. She was thankful for him working so hard for them, but he was a difficult man to like. Especially after the way he revealed Alaric and Emilia¡¯s death to Adam. Whenever she looked at him, she could only think:¡®How am I to deal with this man.¡¯


    As everyone talked further about their plans, Adam hummed to himself. Ever since he had woken up, small little sounds would seem much louder to him. A light tap on the wood of the cart would sometimes sound like it was being punched hard! These sudden sounds that jumped out always scared him. Humming, though, did a good job of covering up these small sounds.


    ----------------------------------------


    It was later in the day when they finally arrived at the first town they had been to, since leaving the city! The others had seen the place from afar, but Adam only noticed an increase in noise as they came upon the town surrounded by tents and soldiers!


    Adam quickly looked to his mother and asked: ¡°What¡¯s going on?¡±


    ¡°Word of the attack must have somehow traveled fast. There are soldiers outside of Edelberg with a sea of tents. It looks like the soldiers are offering the tents as a place of rest!¡±


    ¡°So we¡¯re safe?¡±


    Vivienne sadly shook her head: ¡°I doubt they had the time to get enough supplies for everyone to Edelberg and there are hardly enough soldiers to fight against the Luxom army we saw. We will be moving on as soon as we can.¡±


    While Adam and Vivienne were talking, everyone else had come to an agreement. Dallen spoke: ¡°Okay, so the plan is you guys rest for about an hour down by the river, away from the tents. I¡¯ll head into town to try and get some supplies and meet back up with you. If it takes me more than an hour, you¡¯ll start down the road, and we¡¯ll meet up somewhere there?¡±


    When everyone agreed, Dallen left them and trotted into town while Hansen pulled the cart down to the small river that ran by Edelberg. The noise of the soldiers and refugees in the tents started to be replaced by the babble of the river.


    While at first a little jarring to his ears but Adam quickly found the babble soothing. It was a constant that covered over all the little sounds that would have otherwise jumped out at Adam. Then Adam flinched as the cry of a baby echoed out! Sarah¡¯s voice found its way over to him as she tried to comfort her child: ¡°There, there, what¡¯s the matter, Claudia?¡±


    Adam sighed:¡®I¡¯m never going to get used to this.¡¯


    Vivienne looked over at her son. His life had changed so dramatically so quickly. He had also started to wall himself up in an effort to hide from his blindness. No matter how much he liked music, there was no way a boy Adam¡¯s age could just hum all day long and not feel bored. She could tell Adam was getting restless from being in the cart all day long. Hansen had just stopped pulling the cart, as they found a good place to rest when an idea popped into her head. She spoke up to Adam: ¡°I need a little walk to stretch my legs, do you want to join me, Adam?¡±


    Without thinking, Adam automatically agreed: ¡°Sure.¡±


    Then he realized how nearly impossible it would be for him to walk anywhere. Vivienne saw this realization cross over his face in a look of depression. She told him: ¡°Don¡¯t worry, you can hold my hand. We won¡¯t be going far.¡±


    Before Adam could say no, Vivienne dropped off the back end of the cart. Pain arched through her broken leg, but she held firm. She could only hope that the splint that held her leg together would stay just as firm as her will. After taking a small breath from the pain, she reached out and grabbed Adam¡¯s hand to pull him gently. ¡°Come on.¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t find words to refuse his mother as got swept along. She pulled him over to the edge of the cart before hoisting him down with another twinge of pain in her leg. On Adam¡¯s part, he felt his stomach sink as he was brought down by Vivienne. It was as though he was moving like normal only suddenly to sink down into a deep dark pit! He couldn¡¯t tell that she was in pain as he tightly clung to her, afraid of the sudden drop that was only a couple of feet.


    Vivienne looked at him with concern: ¡°Are you okay?¡±


    Adam nodded, looking a little pale: ¡°It was just a little sudden.¡±


    They took a moment for Adam to recollect himself before starting their walk. At this time, Hansen came over giving Vivienne¡¯s leg a look: ¡°You shouldn¡¯t be doing that with your leg.¡±


    Adam cocked his head to the side, not sure to who that statement was directed. Vivienne gave Hansen a dark look and shooed him away with a curt hand gesture. She turned back to her son and said: ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡±


    Adam took some ginger steps forward as his mother led him. His foot ran into a rock, causing him to jump in fright! ¡°What did I hit?¡±


    Vivienne looked over: ¡°It was just a small rock, Adam.¡±


    As they continued walking, Adam mumbled: ¡°That felt more like a chair leg than a rock!¡±


    Next came a small dip on the ground. Adam expected his foot to land on the ground at the same level it had left, only to have it keep going deeper and deeper into the ground! Adam faltered and started to fall sideways. His throat clenched in fright, he could only scream in his mind:¡®I¡¯m falling into a hole!¡¯


    Then, Vivienne caught him and everything stopped! Adam was panting heavily from the rush, his face once again pale. ¡°Adam, are you okay!? Is it too much for you to walk?¡±


    ¡°It felt like I was falling! Does the ground give way there?¡±


    Vivienne looked to only find a small dip in the ground. Guilt assailed her:¡®I¡¯ve never known what it is like to be blind. Should I not have done this?¡¯


    ¡°Let¡¯s go back to the cart.¡±


    Adam nodded his head in agreement. Carefully, Vivienne led Adam back to the cart. As she made to hoist him back up, Hansen appeared at her side and hoisted Adam up himself. Adam gave a small yelp as he was suddenly lifted into the cart. Vivienne gave a silent glare at Hansen as he offered her a helping hand to get back up into the cart. She ignored it and hoisted herself up, despite the pain in her leg.


    In the cart, Adam was more depressed than ever. Even simple walking was out of his grasp! Vivienne could only look on with a guilty heart, not knowing what she could do to truly help her son. Before long, Dallen came back, and they took off down the road.


    ----------------------------------------


    -Boom!-Thunder echoed throughout the night, spooking Adam! He clung to his mother on the bed they managed to grab in an inn at the town Irving. Thunder never used to spook Adam like this, but now it did. Each thunderclap, a reminder of that night as the dark void around him pressed down!


    Moving through the forest after Edelberg had been hard enough as it was. The grassy plains only had a few insects and groundhogs to make noise. The forest was full of many creatures who each called out in their own language. Each one beating against Adam¡¯s ears, demanding his attention!


    Things were a little better in Irving. He was more used to the sounds of the town, and they had eaten at a tavern for dinner. There, a music group played some jaunty tunes, a few of which Adam knew! It was comforting to hear things he was used to, -Boom!-but the thunder was something else. After a while, the thunder finally ebbed away, and Adam was eventually able to let his tired mind fall asleep.


    Adam quietly ate some breakfast with a tired look, as everyone else talked about some plans for the trip. Dallen started out: ¡°We¡¯re about a third of the way to Hessler. I saw what looked like a trade caravan in town. If we could hire ourselves out to them, we can get the protection of being part of a larger group as well as getting some pay to guard it.¡±


    ¡°But what if they aren¡¯t heading to Hessler?¡±


    ¡°As long as they are heading south, we should join them. It might take us on a bit of a detour, but as long as we reach Hessler safe and sound it doesn¡¯t matter how long it takes for us to get there.¡±


    ¡°But what of Vivienne and Adam? I doubt Hansen could pull the cart fast enough to keep up with the caravan and they might not let the two of them ride in one of the wagons.¡±


    Dallen sighed: ¡°Well, let¡¯s just ask them! No way of knowing unless we ask!¡±


    With nothing else to be said, Dallen went with another patrol mate, Barnaby, to see if the caravan would take them. An hour later, they returned with good news! ¡°They said they would take us on, but we gotta be ready to leave in twenty or so minutes! There is some space for Adam and Vivienne on one of the wagons, and it was requested that the women help with cooking the meals. I went ahead and agreed. I hope I wasn¡¯t overstepping myself there.¡±


    Everyone started to turn lively. This was no longer them stumbling across the kingdom to safety. They now had jobs that would be paying them a small stipend they could use! They didn¡¯t have to worry about rations, or how safe they were! Well, mostly. Caravans were still a target, but bandits would more likely assail a small group of refugees for whatever they had than a caravan full of guards.


    They didn¡¯t have too much with them, so it was easy to get what they had together and then run over to the caravan. The walk was a little bumpy for Adam, though. The cobbles on the street were more even than the ground of the forest or by the river, but there were still a few uneven spots. Thankfully, it didn¡¯t take too long for them to reach the caravan.


    A portly old man greeted them by a row of five wagons. ¡°Come on, Let¡¯s go! Can¡¯t wait around for more refugees to tag along, I don¡¯t have the room nor the money for it!¡±This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    Vivienne and Adam were led to the last wagon where there was a cramp amount of space for them. Most of the room in the wagons was devoted to holding goods. Dallen and the rest were told which parts of the caravan they were responsible of protecting. Then, the caravan quickly took to the road and left Irving behind.


    The trip in the wagon wasn¡¯t any more pleasant than when they were in the cart. It wasn¡¯t worse either, just different. Adam could hear the clop of horse hooves on the ground with an occasional snort. There was also the groan of wagon wheels and the stamp of marching feet. It wasn¡¯t long before everyone started to converse with one another. There was no way one could stay stoic on a long trip and it was far too easy to ask new people questions about themselves.


    Dallen¡¯s voice could be heard from afar: ¡°So you guys know why we were in Irving, what about you? Pretty far north for a caravan when the borders are closing down.¡±


    Adam recalled that on the day before everything turned into a nightmare, there was a pair in The Dancery talking about how King Heider had decreed that trade with Luxom was to be stopped. There was a grunt in reply as someone responded: ¡°Word had only just come down when we were in Irving. We stayed there for a few days considering our options. No matter what we would do, this lot won¡¯t sell for as much as it would in Luxom, and we will incur a loss. We were trying to figure out how to reduce that loss as much as possible by finding the best places in Heider to trade this lot too. During that time, a few guards left as we could no longer fill the contract they had signed on for.¡±


    Dallen showed some interest and the conversation developed into things Adam couldn¡¯t understand about economics. Becoming bored, he started to hum. Vivienne looked over at him then over all the merchandise in the wagon. She spoke to the driver of the wagon: ¡°I don¡¯t suppose you would have a flute in all of this that we could trade for?¡±


    The man driving perked up at the sudden question. He took a moment to think it over: ¡°I think we might have something. It would be simple and nothing fancy. Though, you would have to ask about it to Trask. He¡¯s the one who owns the caravan and everything in it. You¡¯ll have to wait until we break for lunch to speak with him since he¡¯s all the way to the front of the caravan.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    The man waived the thanks off: ¡°No problem.¡±


    Adam was perked up with a look of excitement on his face. Vivienne grinned before chiding him: ¡°Don¡¯t get so excited. We still have quite a bit of time before we stop for lunch.¡±


    Adam¡¯s hums turned from something that was just taking care of his boredom to having a happy inflection contained within it. Vivienne hadn¡¯t heard such lively tunes from Adam since they had to flee the city.


    It seemed to take an eternity before they stopped for lunch. The caravan stopped to give everyone a break, but they didn¡¯t break out anything to cook. Only dry rations were provided for lunch as it would take too much time to set up cooking supplies and then clean them before putting them away again.


    Adam started bugging Vivienne. For the fifth time, he asked: ¡°Can we go ask Mr. Trask about the flute?¡±


    Normally, she would get annoyed at these antics, but Vivienne couldn¡¯t help but grin seeing Adam like this. ¡°Okay. It¡¯s a bit of a walk over to him, though. Are you sure you want to come with me?¡±


    Adam nodded his head: ¡°Yeah!¡±


    There were more than a few bumps and dips along the way, but Adam withstood them. He had come to expect those sudden things that were running into his foot or the ground not being where it was supposed to be. It made them just a little less frightening when they happened.


    As it turned out, Trask was the portly old man who they had met earlier in front of the caravan. Trask easily saw Adam and Vivienne coming over. One was limping with a bad leg while the other was tripping over every little thing on the ground.


    ¡°You two must be Adam and Vivienne. To what do I owe the pleasure?¡±


    ¡°One of your drivers said to talk to you about whether or not you might have a flute we could trade for.¡±


    ¡°A flute? One of you a musician?¡±


    Vivienne nodded ¡°Adam is. He used to play all the time. With his eyes injured, he can¡¯t do a whole lot, but I think he should still be able to play fine.¡±


    ¡°Is that right, boy?¡±


    Adam enthusiastically nodded: ¡°Playing the flute is just about my most favorite thing to do!¡±


    Trask scratched his chin while thinking. Suddenly, he barked toward one of the wagons: ¡°Dennis, check crate three! See if there is a flute in there!¡±


    ¡°Yes, sir!¡±


    It didn¡¯t take long for Dennis to make his way over with a wooden flute in hand. Trask took the flute and simply tossed it to Vivienne. ¡°There ya go.¡±


    Vivienne quickly grabbed the flute from the air, a little shocked. ¡°How much will it cost?¡±


    Trask waved his hand. ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. I won¡¯t really be able to turn a profit off it where we are going, so it makes no difference! I only ask that Adam play us some good songs before the end of our journey!¡±


    Adam was extremely happy and exclaimed: ¡°I will do my best!¡±


    Vivienne handed Adam the flute. It took him a moment to find the hole positions by feel. As soon as he did, though, familiarity washed over him. As long as he knew where they were, it was easy for Adam to change hole positions and play any note he desired. He quickly churned out one of his favorite tunes. The music wasn¡¯t a masterpiece by any means, but it was pleasant to hear. In the end, he received some kind praise from those around him. Hidden behind his bandages, tears touched his eyes. He didn¡¯t know whether it was sorrow from everything he lost or happiness for gaining something back from his life. What he did know was:¡®... It¡¯s kind of like I¡¯m back home¡­¡¯


    Adam continued to immerse himself in music, even as the caravan continued down the road after lunch. It totally changed the journey for Adam. His music echoed out into and on top of all the sounds around him. The groans of the wagons, the clopping hooves of the horses, the various sounds of wildlife around them. Instead of their sounds invading his little world, he started to invade their world with his music!


    ----------------------------------------


    Adam awoke with a start! Still a little groggy, he thought:¡®What¡¯s going on?¡¯


    He listened to what it was that woke him up, but the camp was silent. The only sounds in the air were crickets chirping away. The evening had been pleasant with a full warm meal followed by lying down on a decent bedroll. Adam hadn¡¯t been plagued by nightmares, so there was no reason for him to wake in such a manner.


    Adam couldn¡¯t hear anything off, nor could he feel something poking his side. He quickly gave up trying to figure out what woke him up. Turning over, Adam released his mind to the sweet sleep that was calling him. It was there that he felt it!


    It was a vague feeling, and he couldn¡¯t quite place it. However, it made the hairs on the back of his neck stand up! While it was very different, Adam remembered the last time he had felt something like this; the night ghouls had descended upon them!


    Adam quickly turned to where Vivienne should be lying. He reached out, trying to shake her: ¡°Mom!¡±


    Vivienne started up: ¡°What is it Adam?¡±


    ¡°Mom, Somethi-¡± ¡°-Bandits!-¡± Someone cried from outside!


    The quiet caravan camp quickly started to bustle with activity. Dallen, Hansen, and the others had all slept lightly between their watches and were quickly readying themselves with weapons they kept closeby. Vivienne reached and grabbed Adam. ¡°Don¡¯t leave my side!¡±


    Adam nodded as he stuck to her. He could hear war cries issued out followed by the clash of blades! Quickly, painful screams echoed out into the night! Adam could only shiver in fright. He couldn¡¯t see anything! If there was a bandit right in front of him, he wouldn¡¯t even know it!¡®I¡¯m more useless than I was that night¡­¡¯


    Just as he had finished thinking that, an oily voice floated across: ¡°What do we have here; a wench and her brat!¡±


    Both Adam and Vivienne tensed. Neither were fit enough to protect the other. Both held the same thought:¡®What do I do!?¡¯


    Adam then winced as a giant warcry echoed right next to them! The oily voice squeaked in equal fright before the whistle of a sword in the wind was heard, followed by a sickening slice and a dull thud! Something wet could be heard splattering to the ground. Anxiety ate at Adam as he had no way of telling what had just happened. Then, Hansen¡¯s voice carried itself over: ¡°You two alright?¡±


    Adam relaxed his tense muscles a little. Vivienne answered: ¡°I think you gave us more of a fright than he did!¡±


    Hansen shrugged as he looked around, looking for any other bandits. In the distance, calls for retreat could be heard. Not retreat for the guards, but a retreat for the bandits! ¡°Looks like the trash are running off¡­¡±


    As Hansen stared into the night, someone came running up to them. Dallen¡¯s voice issued: ¡°Trask is having everyone break up camp so we can leave at a moment¡¯s notice. There¡¯s still more than a few hours left before we will see any sunlight, but we might move out early to make sure we get away from those bandits.¡±


    Hansen grunted an agreement as Vivienne spoke: ¡°We can¡¯t really help much with packing up camp. Is there anyone with wounds that need treatment? I can still help with that.¡±


    Dallen shook his head: ¡°These bandits were poorly trained. Nothing that hit us actually got past our armor. It would probably be best if you just get to your wagon so we can leave as soon as possible.¡±


    Hansen helped the two of them to the wagon before going off to assist in breaking camp. Silence reigned over the sounds of packing, as everyone was still on edge, ready to react if the bandits decided to return.


    Vivienne watched Hansen trot away, before giving a heavy sigh and muttering: ¡°Really, what am I to do with him?¡±


    Adam caught the question that wasn¡¯t meant for him and asked: ¡°What was that mom?¡±


    Vivienne sighed again. She really hadn¡¯t had the time to talk to anyone about the turmoil she felt over Hansen. She decided to confide in Adam, as it kind of affected him: ¡°Well, it¡¯s about Hansen.¡±


    ¡°What about him?¡±


    ¡°He¡¯s really helped us a lot. Back in the city, after you passed out, your father came up to save us from the Ghul Kommendant.¡±


    ¡°Really!?¡± This was the first Adam had heard of this, as he had been a little afraid to ask about what had happened.


    Vivienne nodded, unseen by Adam. ¡°Alaric came with Hansen following close behind. Everyone else was held up by ghouls¡­ your father fought hard with Hansen by his side and took a hit so that Hansen could finish the Ghul off¡­ after that, Hansen apparently made a vow with Alaric to look after us. He has put quite a bit of hard work into it. He helped us get to a healer before we left the city. He even went out and found that cart that he pulled himself for days on end, but¡­ he¡¯s so crass and has done enough to make me hate him! It¡¯s hard to talk to him. He made us leave Alaric and Emilia¡¯s bodies behind. He didn¡¯t try to break the news of their deaths softly to you! He¡¯s just so frustrating! I want to thank him, but I can¡¯t!¡±


    Vivienne breathed heavily, glad to get that off her chest. Instead of asking about Hansen, Adam asked about something else: ¡°What¡­ what happened to Emilia?¡±


    Vivienne had already mentioned how his father had died, but:¡®How did Emilia die?¡¯


    Vivienne sobered, realizing that she had said more than she intended. She thought for a moment before carefully speaking: ¡°Alaric came over to save us. At that time, the Ghul took Emilia and killed her just as he arrived¡­ Alaric flew into a rage and attacked the Ghul with Hansen to save us.¡±


    Things had gone a completely different direction than Vivienne had thought. However, this gave something for Adam to think about:¡®Even dad couldn¡¯t deal with that Ghul on his own. No training I could have done would have let me save mom and Emilia on my own¡­ Dad didn¡¯t die somewhere far off, but right beside me while I was passed out. Even Emilia¡­¡¯


    Only time would tell whether these thoughts were good or bad for Adam. As Adam was enclosed in his little world, Vivienne looked out as the last bits of the camp were packed into the wagons. A few forms in the distance lied on the ground, unmoving. She could only assume those were dead bandits. She muttered to herself: ¡°I hope the rest of the trip isn¡¯t like this.¡±


    ----------------------------------------


    Thankfully, the rest of the trip was smooth. While nothing unexpected happened, being on the road for an extended length of time started to make Adam and Vivienne stir crazy as they were stuck in the wagon! A few weeks passed before Heider could finally be seen on the horizon.


    Vivienne described what she saw too Adam: ¡°It¡¯s still very far away, but you can see it from here! A huge city with big walls surrounding it! Just outside the walls are some farm fields, but inside the walls lies buildings more extravagant and varied than our city had! In amongst all of that, we will find a new place to call home.¡±


    Adam wasn¡¯t sure what to think about the new home part, but:¡®Big walls¡­ I like that.¡¯

 Chapter 5 Madames Tavern and...

    Madame¡¯s Tavern and¡­


    Late in the afternoon, they finally passed through the city gates and into Hessler. Just inside the gates, people were littered everywhere! Each was talking to one another or moving about their day. All the activity generated noise that was loud enough to hurt Adam¡¯s ears. He covered them with his hands as his face scrunched up at the mild pain.


    ¡°It¡¯s loud!¡± He nearly shouted over the din.


    Vivienne tried to comfort him: ¡°We¡¯ll be moving on soon. It gets a little quieter further in.¡±


    A small ways down the main road, it opened up into a large bazaar. The hustle and bustle grew even more as people shopped and haggled over goods. The caravan parked in an empty spot before everyone started jumping off the wagons. Trask spoke to Dallen: ¡°I guess this is where we part.¡±


    Dallen nodded: ¡°This is our end destination, but we still have to figure out just what we are going to do. Vivienne has a solid plan for her and Adam, but the rest of us are still unsure as to what Hessler has to offer us.¡±


    Trask handed Dallen a pouch full of money before saying their final farewells. Dallen walked over to where everyone was gathering around Vivienne and Adam. He tossed the bag between his hands as he said: ¡°Well, we got our payment. It¡¯s something to start us out. You said you had a place for us to stay Vivienne?¡±


    She nodded: ¡°I don¡¯t know that they will let you stay for an extended time, but I¡¯m certain they will be able to make room for you. Follow me.¡±


    Vivienne tucked a wooden pole under her arm as a crutch. For the distance they needed to walk, a splint wasn¡¯t enough. Despite all the noise, the hollow thunking sound of the pole hitting the cobblestones echoed the loudest to Adam. ¡®Why hasn¡¯t mom talked about it¡­¡¯ He knew her leg was broken. He had picked up on it easily enough; however she would never talk about it.


    Slowly, the din of the bazaar and the streets dimmed. Adam could hear the many passers-bys still around them, as well as the occasional carriage going by. The others in their group remarked at the buildings as they passed by. Some had beautiful stonework, others ornate carvings. A rather reputable bank even had gold gilding on the front door! But none of that matter as much to Adam as that continuous hollow thinking that resounded in his ears.


    With Vivienne needing to take a few breaks along the way, it took over an hour to reach their destination. Before them, there laid a rather large complex built around a grand garden courtyard. There was a large two-story building plainly visible and easy to access. A little further away was another building that was rather small and slightly obscured by shrubbery. A third building that was just about as large as the first stood the furthest away, hidden by trees. Behind everything, there was a dividing wall behind which one could just barely make out another building. Everywhere one looked, lavish work could be seen. There were stone artworks and beautiful garden arrangements throughout the courtyard. Adorning the buildings were ornate decorations and deeply colored draperies. The insides of these buildings promised to be just as lavish as the outsides.


    At the entrance to the garden courtyard, there was a large gilded sign that read: Madame¡¯s Tavern and- ¡°Does that say bro-¡± Vivienne quickly elbowed Dallen before he could continue. ¡°We aren¡¯t going to that side of the business, now shut it!¡±


    Adam was confused about what Dallen was trying to say, while everyone else was giving Vivienne a weird look. She simply said: ¡°It¡¯s not like I welcome the fact that that place is attached to the home where I grew up!¡±


    Continuing forward, she said: ¡°You guys should wait here while I meet with the Madame.¡±


    Dallen and the others found a place to sit in the garden, while Vivienne led Adam forward by the hand. She didn¡¯t head toward the two-story building that was the tavern but towards the smaller one. She knocked on the french glass doors as she entered. Just inside, there were a few desks with papers and organizers everywhere. It seemed to be the place where the business part of Madame¡¯s was run from.


    An old man looked up from the desk where he was working. His gaze halted for a moment when he saw Vivienne: ¡°Vivienne, is that you? What happened to your leg!?¡±


    The old man quickly got up and brought a chair over. Vivienne sat down while gratefully saying: ¡°Thank you.¡± She sighed before flashing him a smile: ¡°And it¡¯s good to see you too, old man.¡±


    Vivienne gently pulled a confused Adam over. ¡°This is my son, Adam.¡±


    Ignoring his blindfold, the old man took Adam¡¯s hand in a shake and said: ¡°Hello, Adam. My name is Friedrich, though everyone around here calls me old man.¡±


    ¡°H-hi.¡±


    Turning back to Vivienne; ¡°We¡¯d heard about what happened at Fort Erich and were worried about you¡­ I don¡¯t see that young lad you married yourself off to.¡±


    Vivienne turned downcast: ¡°Alaric and my daughter died¡­¡±


    ¡°Sorry to bring it up.¡±


    Vivienne shook her head: ¡°Is Madame Irene in? I need to speak to her.¡±


    Friedrich shook his head: ¡°Irene passed a few years ago. She passed her mantle onto Janette.¡±


    Vivienne was stunned for a moment. ¡®Irene was getting on in her years, but still¡­¡¯ And then the last bit clicked in her head: ¡°Wait, you don¡¯t actually mean Janette is Madame now, do you!?¡±


    Friedrich laughed: ¡°She certainly is, and doing a better job than any of us thought she would too! Though, only by a little.¡±


    Vivienne shook her head at the thought of it. ¡°Well, is she available then?¡±If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    Friedrich used his thumb to point at a door further in; ¡°She¡¯s just loafing around in her office. Head on in.¡±


    Vivienne led an uncomfortable Adam forward. He¡¯d had nothing to add to the conversation and had no idea what he should be doing. The small talk about his father and sister also turned him pensive.


    Janette was leaning back her luxurious chair while having her feet placed on her desk. She looked nothing like a refined lady one would expect from the clothing she wore and the office she worked in. When her door suddenly opened, she scrambled to make herself look decent, nearly falling backward off her chair! When she finally saw who was coming in, she was stunned: ¡°Vivienne!?¡±


    Vivienne gave a smirk as she asked slyly: ¡°Sorry, were you in the middle of something important?¡±


    ¡°Yea, uh important stuff. Is that your son?¡± Janette quickly diverted.


    Vivienne laughed: ¡°This is Adam, my son.¡±


    ¡°Welcome to Madame¡¯s Tavern and Brothel, Adam.¡±


    Adam cocked his head to the side. He faintly remembered the word, but couldn¡¯t call it up; ¡°Brothel?¡±


    Vivienne quickly waved it away; ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it Adam, it¡¯s nothing important.¡±


    Janette shook her head: ¡°He will learn sometime, Vivienne.¡±


    Vivienne quickly moved on; ¡°Anyway, we¡­ our home was lost to us.¡±


    The mood turned somber. Janette responded: ¡°I¡¯d heard about Fort Erich. We were worried¡­ you and Adam are welcome here, of course¡­ Alric didn¡¯t make it?¡±


    Vivienne simply shook her head. Janette quickly got up and went around her desk to hug Vivienne. ¡°I¡¯m so sorry.¡±


    Janette looked at Vivienne and Adam. ¡°We should get the two of you to see Healer Edward. I imagine it has been some time since you had your injuries last looked at?¡±


    Vivienne nodded, then said: ¡°Also, there are others who came with me. I was hoping there was something Madame¡¯s could do for them.¡±


    Janette put on a thinking face; ¡°Possibly, but I don¡¯t have many positions open to take in adults. Take me to them, and we can see what can be done.¡±


    Vivienne led Janette to where the others were waiting. Even from afar, Janette started appraising them: ¡°Oh, I like the big gruff one there. We have a bouncer position open. You think he would fit the bill?¡±


    ¡°Definitely, his personality is just about as gruff as his exterior.¡±


    ¡°As for the others, we have more than enough heavy lifters and cooks¡­ Ooo, is that a baby!?¡±


    Janette quickly ran over to Sarah, who was holding Claudia and began ogling the baby. Vivienne could only shake her head at the antics. After a while, they finally started talking about business. Janette said: ¡°I can put you guys up for a little while, but it won¡¯t be anything permanent. Probably a month at most.¡±


    A month was still very generous, and everyone took up the offer. It was at least something to help get them started. Putting her hands together in a clap, Janette then said: ¡°Well, it¡¯s getting late. How about dinner?¡±


    She led them to the tavern that was bustling with people. The insides truly looked high class. The first floor was large and meant for the common folk who could enjoy a lavish environment at a fairly reasonable price. Above, there was a second-floor balcony all along the edges. Curtains hung lazily in artistic patterns across the balconies, to dampen the noise from the first floor. There was a main dancing stage in the center of the tavern. And musicians could be found dotted all around the fringes of the first floor, in addition to a few along the balconies. The music maintained a calm grace and nobody was speaking loudly. Despite its larger size, compared to The Dancery, it was a fair bit quieter.


    The evening flew past Adam. There was pleasant music he was unfamiliar with, good food, and nice company. Before he knew it, he was settling down on a bed in a room he was sharing with his mother. She helped to tuck him in, saying: ¡°Get some rest. Tomorrow, we will see Healer Edward. He¡¯s one of the best in the city!¡±


    Anticipations swelled in Adam¡¯s heart. Excited, he said: ¡°Good night mom!¡± Before turning over and trying to fall asleep quickly. Vivienne gave a warm smiled and kissed his head; ¡°Pleasant dreams.¡±


    ----------------------------------------


    Adam was waiting impatiently with Vivienne. The night had passed far too slowly for Adam. His excitement had kept him from sleeping for quite a while. Now, they were waiting in a room where Healer Edward worked. Every moment seemed to stretch on forever as they waited for him to come and examine them. Adam thought for the hundredth time: ¡®I hope he can help my eyes. I¡¯m tired of seeing nothing but this empty void.¡¯


    It wasn¡¯t much longer before there was a knock at the door. The door opened, and an older man appeared: ¡°Hello Adam and Vivienne. I have heard about your injuries, who would like to be examined first?¡±


    As much as he wanted his eyes to be healed fast, Adam was rather concerned about the state of Vivienne¡¯s leg. She had kept him in the dark long enough; ¡°Look at mom¡¯s leg first!¡±


    Edward chuckled: ¡°Well, the lad¡¯s spoken. Why don¡¯t you lay down on the examination bed and I¡¯ll take a look.¡±


    With no reason to refuse, Vivienne laid out as Edward started running the tips of his fingers around the area her leg had broken. ¡°I take it you¡¯ve been walking on it with the splint?¡±


    Vivienne nodded. Edwards shook his head: ¡°I know you were on the run, but you shouldn¡¯t have been doing that with just a loose splint. Hmm¡­¡±


    He frowned as he continued. ¡°The break was pretty bad. Even if it had been properly set, all your walking shifted the bone. It¡¯s started to heal the wrong way. I recommend rebreaking the bone then reset it. We would also put on a proper cast so the bone won¡¯t move during the healing process.¡±


    Vivienne was a little apprehensive. ¡®It was painful enough when that Ghul broke my leg. To break it again¡­¡¯


    Edward saw this and said: ¡°We have sedatives we can use to knock you out while we do the breaking. It will still hurt when you wake up, but you¡¯ll avoid the worst of it. Think about it. You¡¯re on Madame¡¯s bill, so I imagine you must be a dancer. If we don¡¯t re-break the leg and set it right, your dancing will be heavily affected.¡±


    ¡°O-okay, but can it wait?¡±


    ¡°Of course, we would have to get everything ready beforehand. Let¡¯s set a date before you leave. Now, to Adam.¡±


    Edwards gently unwrapped the bandage around Adam¡¯s eyes. They looked better than they had at first, but there was still faint redness to them. Edward stretched his eyelids and peered closely at Adam¡¯s eyes. Edward asked: ¡°When were your eyes injured?¡±


    ¡°A few weeks ago, back in Einar, First Month of Spring.¡±


    Edwards gave a small sigh and shook his head. ¡°There¡¯s some good news and some bad news.¡±-Adam¡¯s heart started to sink- ¡°The good news is your eyes themselves are healing fine. A worry about these injuries is that often the eye gets deflated and has to be removed. You shouldn¡¯t have to worry about that. Unfortunately, there is nothing more I can do to help you recover your eyesight back.¡±


    Adam was stunned as it felt like he was sinking into a deep dark hole. ¡®I¡¯m stuck with this void for the rest of my life!?¡¯

 Chapter 6 A New Home

    A New Home


    Vivienne looked over to where Adam sat on his bed depressed. She then turned her gaze back to the sheafs of paper in her hands. One paper went over how Adam could use a walking cane to help guide himself with little assistance from others. A couple other papers gave two alternatives to helping him see again! Unfortunately, it was nearly unlikely that either of them would work!


    One method was to go to a Spiritualist Healer. They could fix many injuries that common medicine cannot. However, Spiritualist Healers are hard to come by. Heider Kingdom only had one, and he was a dedicated physician to the King. No amount of money would make such a man lower his status to help someone not of noble blood.


    The second method was even more unlikely, so Vivienne didn¡¯t even think about it. Looking back at Adam in his depression, a decision came to mind; ¡°Adam, I¡¯ll be right back. Will you be fine on your own?¡±


    Adam dismally nodded as Vivienne left him. Left alone, the thoughts continued to circle around one question: ¡®What am I to do?¡¯ His depression washed over every thought of his, destroying any drive he had to actively seek a solution to this question.


    A short while later, Vivienne entered the room with a quick knock. ¡°Adam, I¡¯ve brought someone to show you around Madame¡¯s!¡±


    Adam looked up with a confused look. ¡°What?¡±


    A girl¡¯s voice rang out: ¡°Do you give everyone that dopey face?¡±


    Adam barely had the chance to think ¡®Dopey!?¡¯ Before an unfamiliar soft hand suddenly pulled him from the bed he had been moping on! The girl¡¯s energetic voice continued: ¡°I¡¯m Susan. I¡¯ll be showing you around, ¡®kay?¡±


    Adam could barely get out a stupified ¡°Uhh¡± Before Vivienne took Adam¡¯s hand and passed him his walking cane. ¡°Don¡¯t forget this Adam, you should get used to it!¡± After that, Vivienne practically threw Adam out the door with Susan while saying: ¡°Have fun!¡±


    Adam was simply shocked as Susan led him forward; ¡°We¡¯re currently in the dormitory, as I¡¯m sure you know. I think we¡¯ll head outside first and I¡¯ll take you all around the courtyard!¡±


    Adam could only think: ¡®Why is mom making me do this?¡¯


    The garden courtyard was pretty big, but you could easily see the different gardens and statues wherever you stood. Adam, however, could not. Having little to no sense of space, Adam felt that the courtyard was huge as Susan took him around to every corner. In addition, he wasn¡¯t trying to use his walking cane but just relying on Susan to guide him forward. Rather than understanding the courtyard more, he only felt more lost. ¡®At least the ground is level.¡¯ He thought.


    Susan eventually said: ¡°It¡¯s kinda boring just me telling you about the flowers around us. Why don¡¯t you tell me about yourself?¡±


    Becoming a little downcast, he responded: ¡°Well¡­ I¡¯m from the north. My dad and sister were killed by a Ghul Kommendant so mom took us here.¡±


    Susan¡¯s face turned a little shocked. While many orphans shared Adam¡¯s misfortune of losing their family, none had lost them to a Ghul Kommendant. ¡°I¡¯m sorry to hear that.¡± She said. ¡°But, uh, I was actually hoping to know what your interest are. One of the things I like to do is to dance, what about you?¡±


    Adam became even more downcast: ¡°I used to like watching the dancing lights of the night sky¡­¡± His mind raged; ¡®Now I¡¯ll never be able to see it again!¡¯


    Susan frowned. Adam was destroying all her efforts to bring him out of his shell! In a huff, she started dragging him to the tavern. ¡°There are two floors to the tavern. The first floor is for the common people. The second floor, most rarely go up to! It is a VIP area for wealthy patrons.¡±


    Just inside the entrance, there were stairwells to either side hidden from common view and guarded by bouncers. Carpet covered the steps, dampening the sound of their footsteps. As they ascended, the noise of the tavern quieted to a dull dim. When they finally entered the second floor, the only sounds that could be heard was the music coming from the musicians evenly placed along the balcony railing.


    Susan whispered to Adam as she showed him around: ¡°There are booths here that are enclosed by heavy tapestries. Only wealthy patrons can access these booths and request for private dances. Each of the musicians around here has a secret way of silently sending a message to the bouncers if any trouble occurs.¡±


    Susan led Adam around the second floor. It was much smaller than the courtyard, so they finished touring it quickly. Unfortunately, Adam stayed walled up in his depression. He did not show any interest in what she was telling him. Susan internally agonized over this; ¡®Showing reclusive orphans around normally breaks them out of their shells. Why isn¡¯t it working with him!?¡¯ Then, she suddenly thought of something and an evil grin spread across her face, unseen by Adam.


    Adam froze as he felt Susan¡¯s soft arms wrap around his own. ¡°If you wanted, there is one more place I could show you that is even more exclusive than this second floor! It¡¯s the brothel hidden at the back of the courtyard. Do you¡­ want to go there with me?¡±


    Susan started twirling her finger around on Adam¡¯s shoulder as he inwardly started to sweat. It was hard to describe what he was feeling, but there was definitely something itchy and embarrassing to it! All his thoughts of agonizing over his eyes were thrown out the window as these feelings pervaded his mind. Finally, he stuttered out: ¡°N-no, I¡¯ll be fine!¡±


    Susan mentally screamed: ¡®Success! Now there¡¯s one more place I can take him to fully break his shell!¡¯


    She pulled away from his arm but continued to hold his hand. ¡°That¡¯s fine, then. But I have one last place to show you!¡±


    Adam had a bad feeling and wanted to resist, but that soft hand holding his own compelled him to continue following her. After a walking across the courtyard and then going through a few doors, Adam¡¯s ears were greeted by a room that easily echoed any sounds produced within. At the same time, he could hear the faint splash of water. He started to ask: ¡°Where- Kyaaaa!¡± Adam jumped as a girl started screaming! A stammering voice echoed out with a splash of water: ¡°S-Susan, why did you bring a boy in here!?¡±


    Adam froze in shock: ¡®Where did she take me!?¡¯


    Susan only giggled: ¡°Oh, come on, Helen, he can¡¯t see you. He¡¯s blind!¡±


    Susan¡¯s remark was like a splash of cold water on him. ¡®Blind...¡¯


    Then a literal splash of water fell across him and Susan, breaking his thoughts. Helen rose up slightly as she threw water out from where she was bathing and said in an angered voice: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter that he is blind, he¡¯s still a boy! Get him out of here!¡±


    ¡®It doesn¡¯t matter?¡¯


    Susan giggled: ¡°Oh my Helen. You¡¯re so brazen, showing your body like that!¡±


    With a small scream, Helen sunk back down into the bath. Her voice turned flustered: ¡°J-just take him away!¡±


    Adam¡¯s face turned slightly red in embarrassment as he finally started to get where he was at. He tentatively asked: ¡°Susan, are we in a washroom?¡±


    Susan nodded and proudly said: ¡°Yup, this is the women¡¯s bath! I suppose I should lead you to the men¡¯s and get someone to help you change into some new clothes¡­ unless you want me to help you!¡±


    ¡°N-no!¡± Adam quickly said while thinking: ¡®This girl is crazy!¡¯


    Susan had a pleased grin across her face: ¡®This is too much fun!¡¯Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    Thankfully, Susan led Adam out of the women¡¯s bath without more fuss. Only a moment after leaving, Susan shouted out to someone: ¡°Hey, Alfred, come and help me out!¡±


    Adam heard a new voice that sounded like a boy close to his age: ¡°What are you doing now, Susan?¡±


    ¡°Hey, don¡¯t make it sound like I¡¯m getting into trouble! I was just showing Adam around! Can you help him change into new clothes? He got a little wet.¡±


    Alfred noticed Adam¡¯s blindfold and how Susan was guiding him forward. He sighed: ¡®What kind of trouble was she getting this poor guy into?¡¯


    ¡°Yeah, I¡¯ll take him.¡±


    Adam found himself being guided forward by a new hand that didn¡¯t feel as nice as Susan¡¯s soft hand¡­ but, her hand came with a terrible price. Alfred spoke to him: ¡°I¡¯m sure you heard, but I¡¯m Alfred.¡±


    ¡°Hi, I¡¯m Adam.¡±


    ¡°I hope Susan didn¡¯t get you into too much trouble. She can be crazy at times.¡±


    Adam nodded in agreement: ¡°She was nice until just a little while ago. She wanted to take me to the brothel place and then took me into the women¡¯s bath.¡±


    Alfred¡¯s steps faltered. ¡°That crazy¡­ did anything bad happen?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°There was a girl the bath that yelled and splashed some water on us, but nothing really bad.¡±


    Alfred sighed: ¡°Well, let¡¯s get you changed. And just a little advice that I think you¡¯ve already picked up on, avoid Susan! Thankfully, she only has another year before she turns sixteen and becomes an adult. Then she will finally have to leave Madame¡¯s and everyone can breathe a sigh of relief!¡±


    ¡°G-got it.¡± Adam replied while thinking: ¡®Alfred¡¯s intense in his own way too.¡¯


    Madame¡¯s always kept a fresh set of clothes available to the orphans, so it was easy to find a spare set in the men¡¯s bath that Adam could use. Alfred then led Adam back to his room. This time, though, Adam started to use his walking cane: ¡®I don¡¯t want to be led around by someone like Susan again!¡¯


    Entering back into his room, Vivienne greeted him: ¡°Adam, welcome back. Wait, where¡¯s Susan?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°She was too crazy, mom.¡±


    ¡°What happened?¡±


    ¡°She took me into the women¡¯s bath!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s¡­ different from what I was expecting, are you okay?¡±


    Alfred put in: ¡°I helped him escape Susan before it was too late.¡±


    ¡°Thank you for helping Adam. What was your name?¡±


    ¡°Alfred.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Alfred.¡±


    ¡°It was no problem, I know what it is like to be Susan¡¯s target. I need to work soon, so I¡¯ll be leaving.¡±


    ¡°Goodbye Alfred!¡± Adam said.


    Alfred left, leaving Adam and Vivienne to themselves. Vivienne said: ¡°I spoke with Jannette. She¡¯s forming a plan to help you play with the musicians at the tavern.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The biggest thing is that they play a lot of songs you don¡¯t know. Since you can¡¯t read sheet music anymore¡­ you¡¯ll need to spend some time memorizing the songs by listening to them.¡±


    It would be a long and hard process, but at least he wouldn¡¯t lose his chance to play music due to being blind! ¡°When can I start!?¡±


    ¡°Right now, if you want! Your music teacher is ready whenever you are.¡±


    Vivienne led Adam over to the tavern while he continued learning to use his walking cane along the way. The tavern was just as busy as always. Vivienne threaded Adam through the tables and headed toward a flutist.


    They had to wait until the current song was done. When the song was finished, applause rang out while she finally spoke to them: ¡°Hello, Vivienne. And you must be Adam, I¡¯m Julianne.¡±


    ¡°Hi.¡±


    ¡°Did you bring your flute with you?¡±


    ¡°Of course!¡±


    ¡°Good, we prepared a song that you know. Why don¡¯t you join in when we start, and we¡¯ll go from there.¡±


    Julianne picked up a small colored sign and flashed it over to a well-dressed man. He was the conductor of the musicians and communicated to everyone with a few small colored signs to indicate which song was to be played next. The conductor saw Julianne¡¯s sign and flashed his own for the other musicians to see.


    Julianne described the process to Adam during the small wait before they started the next song. Vivienne left Adam with her and sat down nearby. When the song started, many of the patrons were surprised by the song. Madame¡¯s was known for it high class, which included high-class songs. The current song was more rambunctious than high class. It was a song Adam remembered playing at The Dancery.


    With the void from being blind surrounding him, Adam¡¯s memories started filling the space around him. He was back in the Dancery and everything was still fine. His father and sister were there, having fun with everyone else. Before he could truly enjoy the memory, the song ended and everything faded away.


    Tears came to his eyes as it all went away, as customary applause for the song echoed out. Julianne talked to Adam normally, unable to see his tears: ¡°Everyone at Madame¡¯s needs to earn their keep. For you, Adam, you will need to work hard on memorizing new songs as you will be a musician. Can you do that?¡±


    Adam nodded his head. ¡°Yeah.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s start by having you listen¡­¡±


    Adam continued working with Julianne for a few hours before it was time for dinner. Adam was surprised by the quick passage of time. The rest of the night slipped away from Adam in a similar manner and before he knew it, he was falling asleep in bed.


    ----------------------------------------


    The next morning, Vivienne woke Adam up early. ¡°With everything going on, we never had a chance for a proper visit to the baths. Let¡¯s go wash up!¡±


    Vivienne led Adam down toward the baths. There were quite a few people already up and heading to the baths themselves. Vivienne saw a familiar face and called out: ¡°Alfred!¡±


    Alfred turned around and saw Vivienne and Adam. He pulled away from the other boys he was with. ¡°Hey, do need some help getting to the baths, Adam?¡±


    Adam sighed: ¡°Yes, just don¡¯t lead me to the girl¡¯s bath.¡±


    Alfred laughed: ¡°Don¡¯t worry about that!¡±


    Adam grinned as Alfred lead him forward. Adam could bathe himself, he just needed to find some soap and the bath itself. Adam heard a new voice: ¡°Who¡¯s that, Alfred?¡±


    ¡°This is Adam. Adam, these are a couple of my friends; Bruno, Clyde, Derek and Franklin.¡±


    Adam rose his hand by instinct to wave to the others. ¡°Hi.¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t see them, of course, so he was waving in the wrong direction! Derek couldn¡¯t help a quick snicker when he saw this. It didn¡¯t last long as Bruno quickly bopped his head. Derek shouted: ¡°Hey!¡±


    Derek tried to get back at Bruno, who started valiantly flailing his arms around to block his strikes! The two quickly fell into play fighting one another with similarly silly antics. Hearing what was going on, Adam asked: ¡°What just happened?¡±


    Alfred shook his head with a wry smile: ¡°Just some idiot causing a commotion. Happens all the time. Come, let¡¯s get to the baths.¡±


    The warm baths were relaxing, but Adam didn¡¯t stay too long. Alfred had to hurry as he needed to work. Not sure what to do, Adam just stood outside the baths, waiting for Vivienne to come back out. While he was waiting, he heard a familiar gruff voice: ¡°Doing anything Adam?¡±


    ¡°Hansen! Not really. Just waiting for my mom to finish.¡±


    Hansen grunted: ¡°Come with me, then. It¡¯s about time for you to start training again.¡±


    Adam was surprised: ¡°How can I train, I can¡¯t see!¡±


    ¡°Doesn¡¯t prevent you from doing exercises like push-ups or sit-ups! You were stuck in the wagons the whole way here, don¡¯t stay cooped up inside all the time too! A strong body is always useful and it will be too late to regret it later.¡±


    Adam wasn¡¯t sure, but Hansen took his hand and led him forward: ¡°I promised your father I¡¯d train you and I¡¯ll be damned if I don¡¯t follow through!¡±


    Adam was once again surprised: ¡®Dad¡­¡¯


    Any reluctance he had disappeared. Hansen took Adam behind the dormitory and started him on stationary exercises. After hearing Hansen mention his father, Adam had been filled with some vigor. Unfortunately, his body couldn¡¯t keep up! Adam quickly found himself exhausted on the ground. He spoke to Hansen: ¡°I don¡¯t understand -huff huff- I used to do more than this without getting tired!¡±


    Hansen grunted: ¡°You wasted away on that wagon. We gotta rebuild your strength.¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t believe it. All the strength he had gained training with his father had left him. But¡­ the aching pain in his limbs was familiar. It was just like when he trained with his dad. Adam suddenly heard his mother start screaming her head off at Hansen: ¡°What are you doing to Adam!?¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t help but smile. ¡®I don¡¯t know that mom will ever get along with Hansen, but¡­ This is home now.¡¯

 Chapter 7 The Test

    The Test


    ¡®One...Two...Three.¡¯ Adam carefully walked along, counting the door sills that his walking cane hit along the way. A couple weeks had passed since he had first arrived at Madame¡¯s. It was only now that he was starting to get the hang of walking around on his own. In the dormitory, he counted the door sills to move around. It was difficult when everyone was saying ¡®hi¡¯ in the morning, though, as he needed to keep count! If he lost track, he would be very lost. The courtyard was far more difficult due to the many tiles between buildings. It wasn¡¯t quite possible yet for him to fully explore Madame¡¯s on his own.


    Ahead, Adam heard a voice call out to him: ¡°Hey Adam.¡±


    ¡°Hi!¡±


    Adam arrived at his destination to meet up with Alfred and the other boys to do some morning exercises under Hansen¡¯s supervision. A few girls had seen Hansen and Adam training and had commented on Hansen¡¯s muscles. The boys instantly wanted to get buff too, so that they could attract some girls. Something about ¡®girls hanging off their arms.¡¯ Adam couldn¡¯t help shaking his head at them. ¡®Thinking back, there was something pleasant when Susan wrapped her arms around mine, but¡­ It¡¯s definitely not worth all the teasing that comes with it!¡¯


    Susan had come along to pester Adam on more than one occasion. He did his best to avoid her, but was mostly unsuccessful. He never did encounter that other girl from the bath, though.


    Together, the six of them met up with Hansen who would supervise their exercises. As usual, Hansen skipped pleasantries: ¡°You boys know the drill, let¡¯s get to it!¡±


    They started out with a few stretches. During a quad stretch, Franklin ended up getting unbalanced: ¡°Woah!¡± And ended up falling flat on his face!


    Adam couldn¡¯t see what happened, but he could easily guess from what he heard. Franklin was fairly clumsy, so this wasn¡¯t new. But, somehow, the boys always found it funny every time! While laughing with the others, Alfred offered a hand to help Franklin up; ¡°Here.¡±


    Franklin heaved a sigh: ¡°Thanks.¡±


    At the same moment, Adam also lost balance from laughing and fell over! This time, it was Adam¡¯s turn to be laughed at! A little embarrassed, he quickly picked himself up. Hansen broke up their jovial moment: ¡°Enough laughing, continue your exercises!¡± Even as he hid a small grin himself.


    It didn¡¯t take long for them to finish up their morning exercises. Covered in sweat, they immediately headed to the baths before getting ready for the day. Taking a moment of relaxation, Franklin lamented: ¡°Man, you¡¯ve got it easy Adam! You put up with all this exercising and then you get to rest while playing music! We, on the other hand, have to do all sorts of odd jobs that normally involve heavy lifting! We¡¯re already tired!¡±


    Adam chuckled: ¡°I might have it a little easier, but not by much. Sometimes I get a little shaky and that will ruin the music! Julianne will reprimand me if I do that!¡±


    The conversation turned to a different direction as Bruno and Clyde joined in. Adam relaxed as he listened to them. Over the past couple of weeks, he had started to settle into this new home of his. Despite his losses, a new life that he liked was already forming.


    The boys eventually finished their bath and left to start their day. Just outside the bath, Adam heard his mother call: ¡°Adam, I have something to talk to you about.¡±


    ¡°What about my morning lesson with Julianne?¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s talk first, and then we¡¯ll decide from there.¡±


    ¡°Okay?¡±


    Adam was a little concerned: ¡®Why wouldn¡¯t I continue lessons with Julianne?¡¯


    As Vivienne led him forward, Adam¡¯s mind started coming up with all sorts of reasons why he wouldn¡¯t be able to continue lessons with Julianne. His greatest fear was: ¡¯Am I not learning fast enough for them to be confident in me? Will I not be allowed to continue performing at Madame¡¯s?¡¯


    Vivienne took Adam to a bench out in the courtyard. ¡°Adam, before I talk to you about this, you have to promise me something: Don¡¯t get your hopes too high, okay?¡±


    Vivienne had Adam¡¯s full attention as he fearfully nodded, his worst fears seemingly coming to life. Vivienne couldn¡¯t help but chuckle a little seeing this: ¡°It¡¯s okay, sweetie. There¡¯s no reason to be afraid, it isn¡¯t anything bad. I just don¡¯t want you to get your hopes up, only to have them dashed to pieces. You¡¯ve finally started smiling on your own again and I don¡¯t want to see that go away. So just listen to what I have to say, okay?¡±


    Adam slowly nodded his head before Vivienne continued: ¡°Healer Edward gave me a few papers before we had left. They describe two ways your eyes might be healed.¡±


    ¡°Really!?¡±


    ¡°Yes, but remember you promised not to get too hopeful?¡±


    Adam¡¯s excited face fell a little. He simply asked: ¡°Why?¡±


    Vivienne sighed. ¡°Because there is almost no chance for them to actually happen! The first method is to somehow get the king¡¯s personal physician, who is a spiritualist skilled in healing, to treat your eyes. It is the most likely method to succeed, but it would be extremely expensive to pay him for the treatment if he would even see you. Nobles, and those who work for them have a certain kind of pride that prevents them from normally associating with commoners, So the physician would probably never treat you.¡±


    Adam was speechless. He had no idea what to say or even think about this. Vivienne continued: ¡°Besides, the capital is far from here. I don¡¯t know how we would even go about making such a journey! That leaves the less likely to succeed method... which is to become a spiritualist yourself.¡±


    ¡°...What?¡± At the same time, he thought: ¡®A Spiritualist¡­ me?¡¯


    Vivienne brought his attention back: ¡°Adam, there is a school here in Hessler called SIH or The Spirit Institute of Heider. It is a school that exists in our kingdom to find people with the talent to become a Spiritualist. If we go to them, they can test your chances of becoming a spiritualist. If you can become one¡­ there are stories of blind Spiritualists that are somehow able to see. But becoming a Spiritualist is definitely not easy! Without being able to see¡­ I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll be at a disadvantage. However, we can at least try since we don¡¯t have to go somewhere out of the city.¡±


    Adam didn¡¯t pay much heed to Vivienne¡¯s warning. Putting aside his blindness, this was something all the boys around Fort Erich dreamed about! Just having the opportunity to be tested for becoming a spiritualist was exciting! ¡°When can I go get tested!?¡±


    Vivienne smiled: ¡°Well, that¡¯s why I told you earlier we would decide whether you wanted to go to your lesson with Julianne. We could instead take a coach over to SIH. They are doing tests today.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s go!¡±


    Vivienne¡¯s smile only grew: ¡°I thought you would say that. I already let Julianne know, so we¡¯re good to go right now.¡±


    Excitement grew in Adam as Vivienne took his hand and started to guide him out of Madame¡¯s. Along the way, Adam heard the heavy thunking of Vivienne¡¯s cast. She had recently undergone the rebreaking treatment. Instead of a splint, her leg was now wrapped by a cast. It was more uncomfortable than the splint but less painful. Her leg hardly twinged with any pain at all!


    There was a coach station just on the opposite side of the street from Madame¡¯s. It made it incredibly easy for people to visit Madame¡¯s, regardless of their working class.


    Just as they started out, Vivienne said: ¡°There¡¯s another thing that¡¯s been on my mind a little. You¡¯ve been so busy recently that you haven¡¯t been around when Dallen, Sarah, and the others came over to talk.¡±


    Now that she brought it up, Adam felt a little guilty for not thinking about them much. ¡°How¡¯ve they been?¡±


    ¡°Good, They¡¯ve found a town just outside Hessler that they were more comfortable living at. Before long, they will move there. Well, everyone but Dallen. He¡¯s been deeply considering joining the army since he really hates what Luxom did back at Fort Erich¡­¡±The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement.


    ¡°Oh¡­ Are we going to see them off?¡±


    Vivienne nodded: ¡°There will be a little get together in a few days.¡±


    There wasn¡¯t much more to say beyond that, so Adam¡¯s attention turned to the sounds coming in from outside the coach. While it was all very similar, there were many small differences Adam worked to pick out. From the number of people haggling over goods to soldiers marching along the road.


    Before too long, they arrived at their destination. The coach stopped before a large spectacular building. It was oval instead of a standard rectangular structure. It was also rounded going up, almost like an egg sitting on its side. Beautifully colored glass followed the contours of the building. It was totally foreign and out of place when compared to the other buildings around it.


    This oval building had a large open ground surrounding it that had many people walking to and from the oddly shaped building. Above the entrance to the large foyer were gold gilded letters reading: ¡®Spirit Institute of Heider¡¯


    Vivienne had never been to the institute before. She¡¯d had no reason to believe she could become a spiritualist, so the place had little interest to her when she was growing up. Now, she stared at everything in awe of its majesty as she described everything to Adam.


    ¡°I¡¯ve never seen a place such as this¡­¡±


    Vivienne led Adam through the entrance. Inside, the foyer was packed with people lined up before reception desks. Vivienne found one with a sign hanging over it, that read with gold gilded letters; ¡®Spirit Essence Affinity Testing¡¯


    Waiting impatiently in line, Adam constantly thought: ¡®Can¡¯t the line go any faster?¡¯ His hopes were riding on the test, and he was anxious to get it done. He ended up asking Vivienne: ¡°What are they doing for the test?¡±


    Vivienne shook her head: ¡°I can¡¯t really tell. It looks like the receptionist is giving the testee something but¡­ I can¡¯t see anything more than that from here.¡±


    Adam gently sighed. It only made him more anxious that he had no idea how he was going to be tested! Vivienne draped her arm around his shoulders to try to comfort him a little. Adam took to humming to both occupy himself and to try drowning out the hubbub surrounding them.


    Vivienne watched the people being tested, trying to find out what was going on. However, she only saw the same thing over and over. The families that hopefully approached the desk would leave with disappointed looks just minutes later. Finally, their turn came. Vivienne led Adam forward while telling him: ¡°The receptionist just motioned us over.¡±


    Adam nervously followed Vivienne as they went forward. There was a small area roped off before the reception desk to separate it from the line. As soon as they crossed into this roped off area, all the noise of the busy foyer disappeared! Vivienne¡¯s eyes went wide. ¡°Is this done by a Spiritualist?¡±


    Adam was equally stunned. The bustling noise of the foyer was gone. In its place, though, was a faint sound. It was almost like music that tantalized the edges of his thoughts. He couldn¡¯t hear it with his ears, but felt it all the same. He heard Vivienne¡¯s remark and only had one thing to say: ¡°Wow!¡±


    As they approached the receptionist, she gave Adam a concerned look. While he no longer really needed to wear bandages over his eyes, he preferred to continue wearing a blindfold. He had heard a few comments about how weird he looked with his eyes being unfocused that he became self-conscious about it and decided to hide his eyes away.


    After the brief concerned look, the receptionist launched into her task: ¡°My name is Alyssa. I imagine you¡¯re here to test your chances at becoming a spiritualist?¡±


    Adam enthusiastically nodded his head: ¡°Yup!¡±


    Alyssa smiled at his response. Vivienne stepped in and said: ¡°This is Adam and I am Vivienne. He has come to be tested.¡±


    ¡°Come, sit in the chairs. I have to ask, are your eyes injured?¡±


    Adam nodded his head: ¡°I¡¯m blind now¡­¡±


    Alyssa was taken aback: ¡°Oh, I¡¯m sorry to hear that¡­ Well, let¡¯s move on to the testing.¡±


    Vivienne helped Adam to sit properly on the chair. Alyssa opened a drawer on her side of the desk and pulled out a small rod of metal the size of a piece of chalk. When she brought it out, Adam curiously found the tantalizing music at the edge of his thoughts disturbed. Alyssa told him: ¡°Hold out your hand.¡±


    When Adam did so, she put the small rod in his hand. ¡°Hold onto this and do your best to concentrate it. It will do the rest of the work.¡±


    When the cool metal touched his hand, Adam heard something new! A different tune from the one that started tantalizing the edge of his thoughts when he entered the roped off area. Instead of concentrating on the metal in his hand, he instead concentrated on the tune. While doing so, he couldn¡¯t help but hum along with it. As he did so, the rod in his hand turned a bright green!


    Alyssa showed a look of surprise. She then smiled: ¡°Looks like you have good affinity with Wind Spirit Essence. With that, you have the chance of becoming a Spiritualist!¡±


    Adam was stunned for just a moment, then his hands shot up as he excitedly screamed: ¡°Yes!¡±


    Alyssa couldn¡¯t help but smile at Adam¡¯s enthusiasm. It wasn¡¯t a very common occurrence for someone to appear that had a strong affinity for any type of Spirit Essence. But then she sighed. She hadn¡¯t spoken of it earlier because most people failed the test. However, Adam didn¡¯t fail! Alyssa said: ¡°Congratulations. Only¡­ I feel the state of your eyes is going to severely affect your studies.¡±


    Adam¡¯s excitement was curbed: ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Well, to do anything special that a Spiritualist does, you need to use what¡¯s called a Spirit Formation. The only way to learn them is to read and memorize their shape and form...¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    Adam was at a loss as his heart fell and tears started to form at the corner of his eyes. ¡°But I had heard that there were some Spiritualists that were blind.¡±


    Alyssa nodded: ¡°Yes, they were all unique circumstances. I don¡¯t know the details of it though. The first class you can attend will be next week. I can pass the word on to your teacher and see if they can figure anything out for you, I just don¡¯t know what will happen.¡±


    Vivienne spoke: ¡°Remember that I told you not get your hopes too high?¡±


    Adam nodded, so she continued: ¡°We¡¯ll just have to wait and see what will happen. There is still a chance you could become a Spiritualist, but we just don¡¯t know how good of a chance it really is.¡±


    Alyssa retrieved the metal rod from Adam before pulling out a golden medallion. Inlaid in a circle were a series of symbols. There was a radiant sun, waves of water, swirls of wind, a deathly skull, a raging fire, and a stout mountain. ¡°Adam, this medallion shows that you have been recognized by the institute to come and learn. Please hold onto it and concentrate on it for a moment.¡±


    ¡°Okay?¡± Adam felt the round metal medallion in his hand. There was no apparent tune, like when he held the rod. Unsure of what else to do, he concentrated on the feel of the round metal in his hand. Suddenly, a tune flared up that seemed to suck him into the medallion! Adam dipped forward in his chair, becoming unbalanced, before both the tune and the sensation went away as suddenly as they came! Vivienne became concerned: ¡°Are you okay, Adam?¡±


    Adam briefly shook his head: ¡°I think I¡¯m fine, just got a little dizzy.¡±


    Alyssa nodded her head: ¡°The medallion just took an imprint of you. It will recognize only yourself as its owner until the Spirit Formation inside it is reset. You¡¯ll show this medallion to one of the admission reception desks by the grand staircase. They will verify it and then tell you where to go. There isn¡¯t a learning structure to classes beyond an introductory class that is held once a week. This week¡¯s introductory class has already passed, so you¡¯ll have to wait till next week. The both of you may attend the introductory class, as the Magister teaching your class will answer any of your questions.¡±


    After letting them know the date and time of the next class, Alyssa saw Adam and Vivienne off. Adam felt a little lost about everything. ¡°So, what does this mean, mom?¡±


    Vivienne shook her head: ¡°Nothing¡¯s really changed, Adam. You shouldn¡¯t hold too much hope on this, but it is a chance. We will have to see how things go next week¡­¡±


    They passed back over the sound barrier to hear a rather loud voice complaining: ¡°Why is it that my son is refused entrance to this institution when that plebeian is allowed!? Don¡¯t pretend that you don¡¯t know what I¡¯m talking about, that receptionist clearly spent more time with him and gave him something!¡±


    Vivienne looked over to the commotion. A richly adorned man was yelling at someone who was dressed similarly to how Alyssa had been. Most likely, he was another receptionist. To her horror, though, Vivienne noticed the rich man was pointing his finger at Adam while he was yelling! Attracting the disdain of someone with power was the last thing she wanted.


    The receptionist responded: ¡°We only accept students if they have an affinity for Spirit Essence. No money or political recommendation will override this. If that boy was accepted, then he clearly has the potential to become a Spiritualist, where your son does not. If you don¡¯t even know about this, don¡¯t come complaining to me about why your son was not accepted! I expect you don¡¯t even understand what this place is!¡±


    The rich man was astounded that he was being back talked. Vivienne took this chance to quickly steer Adam away and out of sight. Adam asked: ¡°What was that yelling about?¡±


    Vivienne tried to play it down: ¡°Oh, just a father upset that his son didn¡¯t make the cut.¡±


    The two of them boarded another coach to get back to Madame¡¯s. The whole way, Adam gingerly held the medallion in his hands. He could feel the cool metal in his hands, and he rubbed his thumbs across its front. ¡®With this¡­ will I be able to become a Spiritualist?¡¯


    As he continued to focus on it, Adam also began to feel something odd. It was like a song, whispering in the back of his mind. Somehow, this whispering let him feel the location of the medallion. It was an odd sensation that was completely separate from his other senses.


    ¡®Is this another special thing about it? ¡­ I guess I¡¯ll just have to wait till next week when cla-¡¯ Adam then exclaimed aloud: ¡°-Crap!¡±


    Vivienne suddenly looked at Adam, slightly startled by his sudden outburst: ¡°Something wrong?¡±


    ¡°I thought I was finally done with school, but now I have to go back again to learn how to be a Spiritualist!¡±


    Vivienne couldn¡¯t help but burst into laughter while Adam sat grumbling about his misfortunes.

 Chapter 8 Treason

    Treason


    The week crept on by at an unbearably slow pace for Adam. His thoughts constantly drifted over the class that was to come and that strange medallion he always kept on him. It distracted him enough that he rarely joined the conversations of his friends. It had gotten to the point where they made fun of him ¡®not really being there.¡¯


    As the week passed, Dallen and the others also left to continue their own livess. Just as Adam was trying to push forward in his, they were trying to push forward in theirs. Then, finally, the day for the class came! In the afternoon, Adam and Vivienne made to depart. Adam¡¯s friends saw him off and wished him luck. Alfred exuberantly said: ¡°Good luck! Oh, and don¡¯t forget to bring Adam back this time!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not funny!¡± The others laughed while Adam despaired. He has started to get tired of these jokes.


    As they took the coach to SIH, what felt like a squirming mass of worms started to form in the pit of Adam¡¯s stomach. He was anxious to finally get to class and figure out what his chances of becoming a Spiritualist really were, but he was also afraid. This was his last shot at seeing again. Also, he still didn¡¯t like the idea of going to school again. Trying to calm his nerves, Adam began to hum while stroking the medallion with his thumbs. In a way, this cold piece of metal held his last hopes at seeing again inside it.


    Adam and Vivienne exited at the coach station across from SIH. Just as they were going to cross the street, a man rushing by bumped into Adam, knocking the medallion from his hand onto the ground!


    Seeming to finally pay attention, the man quickly bent to the ground and picked up the medallion. He quickly handed it to Adam while mumbling ¡°Sorry.¡± Before taking off again at a swift pace.


    Vivienne shook her head, muttering: ¡°Some people.¡± She then turned to Adam: ¡°Are you alright?¡±


    Adam nodded his head, clenching tighter onto the medallion in his hands. ¡®I definitely cannot lose this!¡¯ He thought.


    Without further delay, Vivienne quickly led Adam over to SIH before another person too busy in rushing to wherever they were going bumped into them.


    Entering SIH¡¯s oddly shaped building, Vivienne led Adam up to a reception desk that had an ¡°Admission¡± sign hanging above it. A man greeted them: ¡°Hello! My name is Erik. I imagine you are here for the introductory class?¡±


    Adam nodded his head as Vivienne said: ¡°Yes, we are. This is Amadeus Finch, and I am his mother, Vivienne.¡±


    Adam piped up: ¡°Call me Adam.¡±


    Erik gave a concerned glance at Adam¡¯s blindfold. He asked: ¡°Do you have your admission medallion?¡±


    Adam stretched out the hand holding the medallion. Erik looked with a frown. ¡°This is a round piece of bronze.¡±


    Adam¡¯s mind blanked as a bolt of fear struck him in the heart. He tried to say something, but nothing came out.


    Erik shook his head: ¡°Did you misplace it at home, by chance?¡±


    Vivienne suddenly thought of something: ¡°The man that bumped into you Adam, did he take your medallion?¡±


    Erik frowned: ¡°That is a serious accusation. As SIH is supported by the king, this is akin to treason! If you are lying about this¡­¡±


    Vivienne gave Erik a disgruntled look while Adam was thinking of something else. ¡®Maybe the medallion is still close enough that I can¡­¡¯


    Adam concentrated on what he remembered of the medallion. How the cool metal felt in his hands and the engravings upon its front. He searched for that feeling that he got on the coach ride home the last time they were here. That feeling of just knowing where the medallion was! Adam scrunched up his face as he desperately searched for that feeling, then he felt it! A tiny little sing-song that seemed to tickle him with silent whispers that told him of its location. Pointing off behind him, Adam asked: ¡°Is the man coming back, mom? The medallion is getting closer.¡±


    Vivienne looked where Adam was pointing, confused. She only saw a family of three that was richly adorned. The mother and father were walking close together, lovingly watching their young son bounce around them with excitement. The man who bumped into Adam was nowhere to be seen.


    Erik, on the other hand, gave Adam an interested look before looking at the incoming family. Recognition seemed to dawn upon his face. He turned back to Adam and Vivienne: ¡°Could the two of you wait by the side for a moment. I will help you figure out your issue with the medallion in a moment.¡±


    Vivienne couldn¡¯t help turning resentful as she felt that Erik was choosing to serve rich folk first before helping who was first in line. On Adam¡¯s part, he was disappointed that the feeling he had thought he found was apparently wrong. Together, they stepped to the side while the rich family came up. The father gave a condescending glance to them before speaking to Erik: ¡°My son has come to attend your academy. He has a medallion.¡±


    Erik merely smiled at the man: ¡°Vincent, did your son manage to pass the test after all? I thought he didn¡¯t test positive for Spirit Affinity.¡±You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    Vincent glowered darkly at Erik, curtly saying: ¡°Dominick, show him your medallion.¡±


    The boy stepped forward with the medallion in hand. Erik pointed to a dark metal plate on his desk: ¡°Press the medallion onto the metal plate. Then concentrate on the medallion, much the same as you did when first imprinting it. The Spirit Formations will do the rest.¡±


    Dominick gave a worried glance back to his father, whose own eyebrow turned up quizzically. Still, he gave a nod for his son to continue. At this point, Vivienne suddenly recalled something. Seeing Erik and Vincent close together, she remembered the rich man yelling at the attendant last week. Vincent was the rich man and Erik had been the attendant! A small worry rose in her heart, unsure of what this meant.


    Dominick placed the medallion on the plate and concentrated on it. A moment later, he suddenly yelped and let go of the medallion! ¡°It hurts!¡±


    ¡°What did you do to my son!?¡± Vincent yelled as he aggressively stepped toward Erik.


    With a hand gesture by Erik, guards suddenly appeared and quickly surrounded Vincent! ¡°What¡¯s the meaning of this!?¡± Vincent yelled, appearing a little unsettled.


    Erik shook his head: ¡°You really have no idea, do you? SIH is not some private academy, it¡¯s a public institute that is only open to those who have the ability to become a Spiritualist. You cannot buy, bludgeon, or steal your way in. To try and do so, is the same as treason against the king who funds and support us! And you, you bloody idiot, have done just that!¡±


    Vincent paled a little: ¡°Watch who you are accusing of treason! I am Vincent Adronnel, head of the Adronnel Merchant Association! Do you have any proof that I have committed such an act!?¡±


    Erik leisurely picked a piece of lint of his clothes. ¡°Yes, yes, the third tier trading group that popped up a few years back. You obviously know a lot about trading, but nothing about SIH or Spiritualists. Adam, I believe this medallion is yours. Come, press it down on the metal plate while concentrating on it. If it gives off a white glow, instead of burning your hand, then it is clearly the one that was imprinted to you.¡±


    Vincent¡¯s eyes darted around, trying to find a way out of his current predicament. Emboldened by Erik¡¯s words, Adam felt for the medallion again. Sure enough, he felt it just in front of him. Without anyone¡¯s assistance, Adam stepped forward and placed his hand down upon the Medallion. After a moment, a soft white glow was given off by the medallion under his hand!


    Erik gave a brief smile to Adam: ¡°Welcome to The Spirit Institute of Heider.¡±


    Erik then turned to the guard surrounding Vincent: ¡°Take this man to the guard captain. His punishment will be decided by the nobles of Hessler.¡±


    Vincent was utterly shocked by the direction things were going. In his shock, he offered no resistance to the guards as his wife started turning hysterical. Little Dominick just seemed scared and had no idea what was going on. Adam cast a worried look where he heard the wife sobbing. Vivienne did her best to try and pull Adam back in a way that would not draw attention to them. It would not be good for the Adronnels to mark them for revenge.


    Erik pulled their attention by saying: ¡°Don¡¯t worry too much. Even though it is considered treason, Vincent didn¡¯t commit high treason. It¡¯s doubtful his life will be taken and measures will be put into place to make sure he doesn¡¯t try to do anything against the two of you. Rather than worrying about all of that, let me lead the two of you to class!¡±


    Erik led Adam and Vivienne up a luxurious set of stairs located behind the reception counters. The stairs were wide with a rich plush carpet running up its center. The wood railings were well polished and glistened in the light that entered through the many windows of the building. It took them a small while to get up as Adam had to carefully find the steps while Vivienne needed to haul her cast up each step. A few families passed them right on by, led by other receptionists.


    Along the way, Erik spoke: ¡°I¡¯m impressed by you Adam, you may just have what it takes to become a Spiritualist!¡±


    Adam was slightly surprised by this remark: ¡°Really!?¡±


    Vivienne didn¡¯t like the idea of unnecessarily getting Adam¡¯s hopes up. She asked: ¡°Why do you say that?¡±


    ¡°Adam is currently blind, yes? I had heard rumors that he was enrolling today. Did you notice, though, that Adam knew exactly where his medallion was without even being able to see it!?¡±


    Vivienne seriously thought about. Beyond her confusion and worry of what happened earlier, she finally noticed what Adam did. With a shocked expression she said: ¡°You''re right.¡±


    Adam turned giddy in his heart: ¡°I¡¯ll be able to become a Spiritualist then!?¡±


    Erik shook his head: ¡°Nothing is ever certain. I myself have an affinity for Spirit Essence. However, I could never take that next step to becoming a Spiritualist. Even those who could feel out their medallion, like you can, have difficulty making it to the next step. And that is when they can actually see the study materials¡­ You will have a difficult road ahead of you.¡±


    Erik¡¯s words dampened his spirit a little, but Adam felt renewed confidence. ¡®Just wait, I¡¯ll show everyone I can become a Spiritualist and then I will be able to see again!¡¯


    Finally, they made it to the second level of SIH. Here, a long hallway extended off the stairs. The walls of the hallway were convex, not straight. Along the length of the hall, there were doors that were curved to follow the contours of the walls. The other end of the hall seemed to open up into circular a library. Adding this to the way the outside of the building was made, it seemed that not a single straight line had been used in its construction!


    Erik led them to one of the doors: ¡°This is your class. Choose any open seat you wish and the Magister will be in shortly.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Erik.¡± Vivienne said, before leading Adam in.

 Chapter 9 Path

    Path


    The classroom they entered was just as lavish as any other part of the institute. The desks were large and made of well-polished oak while the seats were finely cushioned. A large black slate was hanged on the front wall of the classroom with chalk sitting nearby. Adam¡¯s old school was held inside the nave of the church.They didn¡¯t even have desks, let alone a chalkboard!


    At almost all of the desks, there were families sitting as everyone waited for the first day to start. Vivienne led Adam over to an empty desk as she explained everything she saw. Adam did his best to envision it as he bounced up and down on the soft cushion of his seat.


    A dull murmur could be heard across the classroom as everyone talked among themselves. Adam asked: ¡°When does class start?¡±


    ¡°It should be soon. We arrived early, but it took us a little longer than I thought to get through Admissions.¡± Vivienne responded.


    Just as she finished talking, the door to the classroom opened and a lady in a richly adorned blue robe walked in. Everyone in class quieted down as she stopped in front of the slate chalkboard at the front of the classroom. Everyone but Adam could now clearly see her. With her gray hair, you would think that she was rather old. However, she only had a few wrinkles gracing her face. Behind her eyes wasn¡¯t a tired wisdom, but a youthful vigor.


    After everyone¡¯s attention had been gathered on her, she spoke: ¡°My name is Catherine. My rank as a Spiritualist with Heider is Magister. It is respectful to refer to me as Magister Catherine. You are all here today in hopes that one of you might become a Novice Spiritualist. Let me clarify a couple things about this process. First, you are in no way guaranteed to become a Spiritualist by attending this class. Second, our plan of study follows an unconventional method that is the most reliable in helping others to become Spiritualists. This method requires constant study, most of which can only be accomplished here at SIH. You will find out why in a moment.¡±


    Catherine held her hand in the air for a moment, before sweeping it in a large motion in front of her. Clicking sounds echoed out across the entire class as a drawer at each desk was unlocked! However, Adam was the only one to hear a different sound behind all the clicking. Another one of those faint sounds that accompanied the fantastical things that Spiritualists do.


    Catherine calmly spoke to her stunned audience: ¡°Open up the top right drawer of your desks. Pull out the book held within and place it on the desk, but please do not open it yet.¡±


    Like everyone else, Vivienne opened up the drawer, only to pause when they saw the book! Carefully, Vivienne pulled out the surprisingly heavy book and placed it on the desk. Just at a glance, Vivienne believed the book to easily be worth more than The Dancery and all the income it had made since she opened the business!


    The book had an odd cover. The edges were gilded in gold, while the face itself was richly colored. On a black backdrop, a dark mountain sat rising out of a swirling lake of water. Flames seemed to rise behind the mountain, while a black skull stared up from the depths of the water. In the sky full of blue lighting that crackled among clouds, a white sun hung. It was both fantastical and terrible. The scene seemed ready to come alive at any moment! Everyone stared at the covers, even Adam noticed a difference after the books were brought out, as another subtle song sang at the back of his mind.


    Catherine spoke, bringing everyone out of their staring contest with the books: ¡°These books are called: A Spiritualist¡¯s Path. They are the reason why you can only study here. As you can well imagine, these books are quite expensive and are not allowed to be taken out of SIH. The Path of a Spiritualist starts with the cover of this book!¡±


    ¡°The cover is very symbolic and many of the images it uses are also used to represent different types of Spirit Essence. I¡¯ll start with the easy ones; the lake represents Water, the mountain represents Earth, the flames behind the mountain represent Fire, the clouds above represent Air.¡±


    As she spoke, Catherine walked to the chalkboard and started scrawling upon it. She drew simple symbols representing the different types with their names by it. She drew them in a circular pattern, but it seemed holes were left at the top and bottom of the pattern.


    She continued: ¡°Now, for the more obscure ones; The white sun above represents Life, while the black skull below represents Death!¡±


    Catherine then drew those two types in, filling the gaps in the circle.


    Again, she spoke: ¡°The cover represents our world as it is; disordered and in chaos! There appears to be no structure to the way the Spirit Essence mixes and lightning seems ready to crash down and destroy everything! As a Spiritualist, you take this chaos and put it in order!¡± She pointed to the circle diagram she drew: ¡°Water and Earth are grouped with Life while Fire and Air are grouped with Death. Each type is placed on the other side of the circle from their opposite. Life opposes Death, Earth opposes Air, Water opposes Fire. You all should have seen this diagram before, on the admission medallions you were each given!¡±


    Adam clutched the medallion in his pocket. He couldn¡¯t see the book and Vivienne hadn¡¯t had any time to describe it to him. Luckily, Catherine was describing things in just enough detail for him to make his own image in his mind. Still, fear started creeping up on him: ¡®I feel like I¡¯m already barely keeping up, even though we¡¯ve just begun!¡¯


    ¡°This book has quite a few chapters in it, and they all just touch on the most basics of what a Spiritualist should know. The library further down the hall has more books that get deeper into these subjects. It is your individual job to come here and study whenever you can. There is no method that can force someone to become a Spiritualist. You can only become one based on your own ability and hard work. There is one element provided by this book that is necessary to becoming a Spiritualist. Open your books up to the center two pages.¡±


    The center two pages were rather easy to pick out. They were actually thin gold plates located in the center of the book! The heavyweight of the book was obviously from these two plates. Carefully, Vivienne separated the two plates to get to the center of the book. When the two plates were separated, a gentle white light radiated from the inside of the plates! Startled, Vivienne quickly pulled her hands back from the book. A few others did the same across the room. Everyone stared at the wondrous gold plates. Across their surface, they could almost make out a symbol. However, it was shifting as though it were alive! The shape never stayed constant! Just staring at it, Vivienne felt something stir deep in her mind.


    Adam reached forward and quickly felt for the book on the desk. Finding it, he closed the book, before covering his ears. Vivienne became concerned: ¡°What¡¯s wrong Adam?¡±


    As soon as each of the books¡¯ gold plates had been opened, the subtle song in the back of his mind had grown into a dull thrum that seemed to exist in his ears! Alone, the thrum from one book would have been fine, but each book sounded like it was in a different spot in a song than the others. Altogether, it made for a horribly wretched sound! It also seemed that covering his ears did nothing to halt the sound while his head started to pound from the onslaught of sound! Barely hearing his mother¡¯s question, he responded in a voice loud enough to be heard over all the noise: ¡°It¡¯s loud, how can you stand this noise!?¡±


    Everyone in the room easily heard Adam and looked over at him. They had all been stunned into silence and were staring at their books. What noise was there to be heard? Catherine also stared at Adam, but with different thoughts in mind. Quickly, she once again held her hand up before sweeping it across the room. A small breeze blew across the room, causing all the books to suddenly flip closed under its gentle touch! As each book closed, the thrum receded back into the subtle sounds playing at the back of Adam¡¯s mind. He let go of his ears with a relieved sigh.


    Catherine spoke: ¡°Amadeus and Vivienne Finch, please stay after class has ended. There is much to talk about with your¡­ unique situation.¡±


    Everyone stared at the two of them and a few whispers could be heard. Vivienne shifted uncomfortably under their stares and was unsure how to react to Adam¡¯s sudden outburst. Adam merely cocked his head to the side, unsure of what to say. Catherine continued: ¡°Let¡¯s talk a little about those two golden pages. As you saw, there was a changing shape on the pages. This shape was a Spirit Formation! Spirit Formations are what Spiritualists use to order Spirit Essence and command it to do their bidding. That formation was written down in these books to help each of you on your Path to becoming a Spiritualist. Staring at the formation stirs the Spirit Essence in your soul and attracts more to it. The hope is that you will eventually learn to control the Spirit Essence that is attracted to you and use it to grow your soul further. Be warned, though. Extended use of the Formation over a short period of time can lead to death!¡±Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    That last line caught everyone¡¯s attention. Somebody cried out: ¡°What are you saying!? Our son could die from this!?¡±


    Catherine shook her head: ¡°Only if he stares at the Formation for longer than we allow. It is another reason why we don¡¯t allow you to take the books home. We can control the length of time they stare at the formation, which prevents overexposure of their soul to Spirit Essence. He would also receive a terrible headache long before he would be killed, but many a desperate person has pushed past this only to die in the end.¡±


    Murmurs spread through the class: ¡°You don¡¯t have to stay if you don¡¯t want to. There¡¯s no guarantee that anyone in this class will be able to become a Spiritualist, anyway.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯ve said that before, but just what are the chances of them becoming Spiritualists?¡±


    Catherine turned to the father who had spoken up: ¡°We get at least one-thousand applicants every year. As for the number who become Spiritualists¡­ That¡¯s two to five every year.¡±


    That number was dreadfully low! More than a few families stood up and walked out. There was far too much work and effort to put in. The chances of being rewarded for that effort was simply too low. Vivienne turned to her son: ¡°Adam¡­¡±


    ¡°I can only try. It¡¯s better than doing nothing!¡±


    Vivienne nodded while holding onto Adam¡¯s hand. She desperately hoped the effort Adam was going to put into this wouldn¡¯t be in vain. Catherine looked across those remaining: ¡°For the rest of today, I will be going over common terms for Spiritualists so you can better understand what it is being said when you join the regular classes.¡±


    This time, someone politely raised their hand instead of interrupting. Catherine motioned at them to speak: ¡°So, is there actually no structure to the classes after this one? How are our children going to learn in future classes?¡±


    Catherine responded: ¡°There really isn¡¯t much of a structure. Each classroom is run by a Magister who teaches a particular subject. We each set our own curriculum and it is up to the student to keep up and research anything they don¡¯t understand. Naturally, we accept questions during class, but they must pertain to the lesson at hand.¡±


    ¡°This doesn¡¯t seem very efficient.¡± Someone piped up.


    Catherine nodded: ¡°It is not normal, but a Spiritualist is not normal to begin with! It¡¯s hard to explain. The threshold to becoming a Spiritualist is not something that is reached gradually over time. One moment you have no idea how to control Spirit Essence, the next something just clicks and you know how! Everything we teach has some impact towards reaching that moment where everything clicks. It is the accumulation of this knowledge that somehow just helps you to understand what cannot be truly explained in words. However, each Spiritualist is different. We each follow what we call a ¡®Path¡¯. Our Path is the way that we personally think and see. That is different for everyone and each of us has our own interests. Even in a particular element, such as fire, there are many uses. It can be used for cooking and heating, or to kill. There are so many things that could be taught that may or may not be useful to each student, so we don¡¯t even try to set a standard curriculum. It is up to the student to find their own Path, we are only here to help.¡±


    Catherine¡¯s class continued in much the same manner. Most the questions were being asked by the parents of those who came to learn, as they wished to know what their children were getting into. Finally, class ended after a few monotonous hours of study!


    Under her instruction, everyone placed their books back in the desk drawers before Catherine¡¯s sweeping hand locked them back up. Before she dismissed them, she said: ¡°You can get the class schedules from the receptionists and you are free to come back at any time. If there aren¡¯t any classes being held, the library is always available for free study until SIH closes at night. Class is now dismissed, except for Vivienne and Amadeus. I still need to speak to you two.¡±


    Before leaving, everyone spared Adam and Vivienne a glance. He was the odd blind boy who screamed about something being loud when all was silent. Quickly, though, they all filed out of the classroom. It was starting to get late and it was just about time to eat dinner.


    Catherine closed the door behind everyone else before grabbing a chair and sitting in front of Adam and Vivienne¡¯s desk. ¡°So, Amadeus, I hear you are blind.¡±


    ¡°I prefer Adam, and yes. At least, for now. I am hoping to change that by becoming a Spiritualist!¡±


    Catherine smiled gently at Adam¡¯s enthusiasm, but it quickly faded away. ¡°There is quite a bit to discuss, but let¡¯s put most of that aside right now. Rather, I¡¯m interested int why you said it was noisy earlier in class.¡±


    Vivienne reached out to her son¡¯s hand: ¡°Adam-¡±


    ¡°-Let him speak on his own.¡± Catherine interrupted with a steady voice.


    Adam paused due to the weird atmosphere: ¡®Why is mom acting worried?¡¯


    Catherine prompted him: ¡°Please, speak.¡±


    ¡°Well, it was a little loud, wasn¡¯t it? I mean the, what are they- Spirit Formations! The sound of all the Spirit Formations together was a little crazy.¡±


    Vivienne was flabbergasted at Adam¡¯s response, while Catherine shot him a quizzical look. Vivienne started: ¡°Ad-¡±


    Catherine once again interrupted: ¡°-Let me finish talking to him. This is important and I need to know the truth. It could be critical to his Path!¡±


    Vivienne was unsure of what to say. She could only cry out in her mind: ¡®What is going on!?¡¯


    Adam¡¯s curiosity was thoroughly peaked: ¡°What do you mean, Magister Catherine?¡±


    Catherine pulled out a copy of A Spiritualist¡¯s Path from the desk behind her. She opened it up to the center two pages made of thin golden plates. She then asked: ¡°You can hear this, Adam?¡±


    He nodded his head. Catherine continued: ¡°Now, pretend as though neither I nor Vivienne could hear it. Could you replicate the sound for us?¡±


    Vivienne glanced at Adam with her worried filled heart. In a way, it seemed Catherine was just trying to call Adam out on a bluff. It wasn¡¯t uncommon for kids to act out in weird ways to get attention. However, the seriousness Catherine was showing wasn¡¯t the sternness of someone reprimanding a child. Instead, it seemed she was truly trying to get to the bottom of this! A sense of wonder mixed into her worry: ¡®Does Adam really have some capability as a Spiritualist!?¡¯


    Adam responded: ¡°Uh, sure. Oh, let me use my flute! I think it will be better than me humming.¡±


    Adam pulled his flute out and placed it to his lips. He listened to the subtle song of the book that had risen from the back of his mind into a quiet thrum in his ears. It was oddly stirring. Adam felt somehow uplifted as he listened to it. Finding a spot where he could join in, Adam began to play along with the song. As he played, that feeling of being uplifted increased! However, Adam began to feel that the sound of the music he played didn¡¯t do the song justice. Somehow, it was lacking and Adam wasn¡¯t sure how to make it better.


    Catherine closed her eyes and concentrated. After listening for a minute, she frowned and shook her head. This only made Vivienne worried. Catherine interrupted Adam: ¡°Adam, do you¡­ feel anything while listening to this¡­ song?¡±


    Adam nodded and told her of what he felt while playing the song. Catherine once again frowned: ¡°I¡¯m going to try one more thing. It will give you a little headache, but please continue trying to play the song.¡±


    ¡°Okay?¡± Adam felt unsure of what exactly it was that Catherine was looking for. Still, he thought: ¡®Well, she¡¯s the teacher. There must be something to this.¡¯


    Adam once again began playing with the tune he heard from the book. As he did so, Catherine stretched her hand out and placed the tips of her fingers against his forehead. Adam briefly flinched from surprise at the touch. His playing momentarily stuttered at the touch, and then again when he felt a sudden jolt go through his head! It felt to him as though something foreign was trying to invade his mind! He tried to continue playing, but the pain caused him to grit his teeth which prevented him from playing correctly. Then, as suddenly as it came, the pain went away.


    Catherine looked stunned as she said: ¡°Remarkable, you really are reacting to the Spirit Formation.¡±


    Adam gave a confused look. Seeing this, Catherine elaborated: ¡°Adam, we really can¡¯t hear anything from the Spirit Formations. I have never heard of someone who could do this before! I had some doubts, but I thought you seemed too sincere to be playing tricks.¡±


    Adam was still lost: ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°Adam, when the classroom was noisy to you it was silent to the rest of us! No one can hear what you can from Spirit Formations! This is a remarkable start. You haven¡¯t even become a Novice Spiritualist yet, but we already have clues to your Path as a Spiritualist! You just need to make that first step!¡±


    Catherine¡¯s words resounded through him. He still didn¡¯t fully know what was going on, but he understood enough to be truly excited! ¡®I really can become a Spiritualist!¡¯


    Then Catherine started mumbling; ¡°Hmm, I¡¯m not even sure how we are to go about teaching you though¡­¡±

 Chapter 10 Study Partner

    Study Partner


    Adam left SIH with mixed emotions. While he showed promise toward becoming a Spiritualist, his Path clearly departed from the normal way SIH taught. Still, it was something. It was hope.


    When they returned to Madame¡¯s, Adam boasted to his friends: ¡°I can do something nobody has been able to do before! I can hear Spirit Formations!¡±


    Alfred and the others were both excited and confused: ¡°That sounds neat, but what are Spirit Formations?¡±


    ¡°Uh, they¡¯re the things Spiritualists use to fling fireballs around and do all the other cool stuff!¡±


    Their eyes widened with wonder: ¡°Wow. I thought it was going to be a while yet before you could do that! Fling some fireballs for us!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not what I said!¡±


    It took Adam a while to sort out the confusion. They were all just too excited to properly understand all the complicated stuff. Vivienne grinned as she watched on. She then said: ¡°Don¡¯t forget Adam, you will need to put in a lot of work for this.¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°When can I go back?¡±


    Vivienne shook her head: ¡°Probably not until next week. Catherine said she would let us know if she can find anything that will help your unique situation. Until then, you have to study like anyone else. She said you could bring someone to help you write notes down. I imagine it would be a little embarrassing to be the only one bringing his mom to school, so we should find someone to help you.¡±


    Adam inwardly groaned. He was not feeling exuberant at the thought of actually studying. While he was in mental anguish, Franklin quickly raised his hand: ¡°Can I go!?¡±


    Vivienne quickly answered: ¡°No, I¡¯m pretty sure you¡¯re just hoping to learn how to fling fireballs around. You need to actually pay attention to class and help Adam study. Do you really want to do dull school work? That¡¯s all it¡¯s going to be.¡±


    ¡°Uhh.¡± Franklin now seemed off-put by the idea.


    ¡°So, we will need to round up some parchment and ink as well as someone who can help you study, before you can go back to SIH.¡±


    ¡°Okay,¡± Adam said, right before his stomach started to rumble.


    Vivienne chuckled: ¡°It¡¯s getting late. Before anything else, let¡¯s get some dinner!¡±


    ----------------------------------------


    A few days later, Vivienne had found her prime candidate for helping Adam. She brought Adam to a room where they were going to talk. Vivienne enthusiastically spoke: ¡°She seems to be good at studies. She has accepted one of Madame¡¯s higher education programs that it offers to its orphans, and she has gotten excellent grades. She¡¯s also close to your age, so it shouldn¡¯t be too awkward going to SIH together!¡±


    A thought suddenly came to Adam, to which he shuddered: ¡°It¡¯s not Susan, is it? Please tell me that it isn¡¯t Susan.¡±


    Vivienne laughed: ¡°Of course it isn¡¯t. She¡¯s a few years older than you, and she clearly lacks the drive for study. No, her name is Helen.¡±


    Adam gave the name a thought. ¡®That name sounds familiar.¡¯


    The answer came to Adam as the door to the room opened. Jannette walked in saying: ¡°I snagged Helen¡¯s interest with a new study opportunity. I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll make her gobsmacked when you tell her what she¡¯s to help Adam with! Oh¡­ she appears to be already.¡±


    Helen stood by the door, slightly stunned. Adam quickly piped up: ¡°Mom, remember how I told you Susan took me into the women¡¯s bath while someone was in there? That was Helen.¡±


    Helen¡¯s face started to turn red at the memories. Janette looked at the two of them thinking of what to say when a look of enlightenment passed over her: ¡°Oh! Helen, is that why you sometimes leave the room when Adam enters?¡±


    ¡°What!?¡± Adam was surprised at this news. He had wondered why he had never seen Helen since that day. It was apparently because she was totally avoiding him! Jannette tutted at Helen: ¡°You know he didn¡¯t even see a single freckle on your bare skin. There¡¯s nothing to be embarrassed about.¡±


    Helen got grumpy: ¡°You think that matters! It was still embarrassing to be bathing with a boy in the room!¡±


    Adam stood up from his chair: ¡°I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Well, I never got the chance to say that until now. I¡¯m sorry that I was in there.¡±


    Helen gave a gentle sigh: ¡°It¡¯s not your fault. I just can¡¯t help but feel embarrassed¡­¡±


    Vivienne had no idea what to say to either Adam or Helen. It didn¡¯t seem Helen was holding anything against Adam and her feelings were well justified, so there really wasn¡¯t anything else to say. In the moment of silence that followed, Janette clapped her hands together: ¡°Well, back to the main topic. Adam needs some help keeping notes and reading study material while he tries to become a Spiritualist. Would you like to help him?¡±


    ¡°Wait, you want me to help Adam study at SIH!?¡±


    Janette nodded: ¡°Yup. If you want, you can also test to see if you can become a Spiritualist. The chances, though...¡±


    Helen initially showed some interest, then it seemed to fade away. She shook her head: ¡°Let me think about it first.¡±


    Helen then walked away. Janette was then left gobsmacked: ¡°Wai-¡±


    Vivienne stopped her; ¡°It¡¯s fine Janette. Let her come to her own decision. She¡¯s probably still not comfortable around Adam, and that is understandable.¡±


    Janette pouted: ¡°I thought for sure she would jump at this.¡±


    Vivienne couldn¡¯t help but laugh at her old friend. Even if she was the Madame now, she still seemed a child at heart. She then turned to Adam: ¡°We¡¯ll wait for Helen¡¯s response. Even if she says no, there are others who could help you. I just thought she fit best. Concentrate on your flute lessons for now, and we¡¯ll sort everything out soon.¡±


    ----------------------------------------


    For today¡¯s flute lesson, Julianne was giving Adam a test! He was to play a couple of songs on his own, up on the second floor of Madame¡¯s! Adam felt a little nervous as she led him to the spot he would take. Julianne chuckled at how stiff Adam looked: ¡°You¡¯ll do fine, Adam. The next few songs are set, and you know exactly which ones are playing. As long as you perform like you have practiced, you¡¯ll get through this without a problem!¡±


    Adam could only nod to Julianne, unable to voice his agreement. Thoughts churned in his head: ¡®I want to treat this the same way as I did at The Dancery, but Madame¡¯s is just so much more.... Professional. I don¡¯t want to mess up!¡¯


    Julianne looked ahead to the musician they were going to take over and frowned. The booth next to the musician seemed to be occupied. After a moment of thought, she decided to continue with the test. Turning to Adam, she said: ¡°Looks like we¡¯re adding one more variable to your test.¡±


    Adam jumped at this: ¡°T-there¡¯s more?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not truly including it as part of the test, but it is something you will need to pay attention to. The booth next to where you will be playing is occupied. One of the duties of the musicians up here is to pay attention to what is going on in the booths. If things seem to get rowdy, there is a rope near to you that you can press down on. This will cause a curtain to swing that will alert the bouncers to come and check things out. If anything does happen, signal the bouncers with the curtain but keep playing like normal! You can¡¯t do much on your own, and we don¡¯t want to cause an out of control scene. The bouncers are quick and can handle these things discreetly. I¡¯ll be nearby paying attention to it on my own, but I would like for you to try and pay attention to it as well.¡±


    Adam and Julianne relieved the musician that was currently on duty. Julianne quickly showed Adam where the rope for the curtain was. It was close to the floor and within reach. Adam really only need to put his foot out and step on the rope to get it to move. Behind him was the booth that was occupied. The heavy tapestries enclosing the booths blocked a lot of sound. However, there were gaps between the hanging tapestries. The placement of the tapestries had been planned in such a way that a gap was conveniently located by Adam. This would allow any musician on duty to more easily hear and see what was going on in the booth.


    Julianne nodded: ¡°I think you¡¯re all set. I will be hanging around nearby, but you are going to be on your own! Good luck!¡±


    As Julianne walked away, she stole a glance through a gap. Two men were downing drinks like no tomorrow, and they apparently had enough coin to pay for a dancer in addition to the booth. The girl dancing appeared fairly young. ¡®I¡¯m going to need to keep a close eye on them.¡¯ She thought.Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings.


    After Julianne walked away from him, Adam took a deep breath to try and calm his nerves. Listening out, the next song started to play, and Adam found his spot to join in on the music. As he continued to play, Adam became a little relieved; ¡®I didn¡¯t mess up my entrance!¡¯


    Adam put his focus on listening to the other musicians. He needed to match their tempo and the crescendos of the song. As he did this, slurred voices drifted over to him from inside the booth; ¡°Hic, I dink dey just shanged mushishans. Wash dat a blind kid?¡±


    ¡°Hic¡­ yeah.¡±


    ¡®They¡¯re drunk!¡± Adam thought.


    The men then tried to lower their voices, though they were still loud enough for Adam to hear: ¡°Hic, you dink we can cop a feel on da girlie widout gettin caught?¡±


    ¡°Hic¡­ yeah.¡±


    Adam nearly stumbled over his notes. ¡®What are they going to do!?¡¯ Adam wasn¡¯t sure what ¡®cop a feel¡¯ was, but he was certain it was bad! Quickly, he stepped on the rope a few times to signal the bouncers.


    Julianne had placed herself so she could kinda see the dancer inside the booth. She noticed Adam¡¯s warning curtain moving. She stood up from where she was sitting, uncertain what was happening. She then briefly saw a man roughly approach the dancer she was watching. Mixed feelings of relief and worry washed over her. Relief that Adam had quickly caught what was happening and worry about the dancer. The bouncers would arrive within twenty seconds, so there really wasn¡¯t enough time for the men to do anything irreversible, but to the dancer, it would surely feel like an eternity!


    Adam briefly heard a girls voice; ¡°What-¡± It was then quickly muffled as someone covered her mouth! Adam stopped playing as he recognized the voice. They had been talking just a couple of hours ago; it was Helen!


    The men continued in voices they thought were too low for Adam to hear: ¡°Hic, Don cha worry girrlie, we ain¡¯t gunna take dish too far.¡±


    ¡°Hic.... yeah.¡±


    Adam heard a muffled scream from Helen and couldn¡¯t take it, he rushed into the booth; ¡°What are you doing!?¡±


    ¡°Hic, Wash you doin here kid? Yaz shupposed to be playin yer mushik.¡±


    ¡°Hic¡­ yeah.¡±


    Adam was starting to get not only mad, but annoyed by these two. Especially the one that could only say yeah! In as stern a voice as Adam could muster, he said: ¡°Let her go.¡±


    ¡°Hic¡­ no.¡±


    Despite them not complying, Adam was relieved to finally hear the ¡®yeah guy¡¯ finally say something else!


    The slurring guy added in: ¡°Hic, now shoo!¡±


    The slurring man tried to push Adam back with what little strength he could muster. Adam was startled by the sudden assault, but only need to put one foot back to steady himself and keep from being pushed back. Hansen¡¯s exercises had helped his balance, and a half-assed push by a drunk wasn¡¯t enough to knock him over.


    Adam cast a frown before him and stepped forward and pushed in the direction he had felt the slurring man push against him! The slurring man was not expecting this and was easily tipped back: ¡°Whoa!¡±


    He fell back into his friend, and their hold on Helen was broken! She quickly scrambled away as two looming forms entered the booth. A familiar gruff voice said: ¡°Let us take it from here, Adam.¡±


    Hansen and the other bouncer easily restrained the two drunken men. Slurring man was berating yeah man; ¡°Hic, Why didn you shtop me!? You know I¡¯m drunk!¡±


    ¡°Hic.... yeah.¡±


    Hansen couldn¡¯t help shaking his head at the two as he took them out. Adam looked around, unsure of where he should face; ¡°Helen, are you alright?¡±


    ¡°I-I¡¯m fine.¡± Came a shaky response.


    Julianne quickly walked in: ¡°Adam, Helen, are you two alright?¡±


    Adam nodded his head while Helen was unable to find her voice again. She simply nodded after being unable to voice herself. Julianne came over to comfort her: ¡°Here, let me take you to your room. I think you can take the rest of the day off.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam had finally finished up his test with Julianne. She had come back after taking Helen to her room. She had been pleased with Adam¡¯s performance, but heavily scolded him for interfering with the two men harassing Helen; ¡°What if one of them had a knife and stabbed you instead of shoving you!? The bouncers were not more than a few seconds behind you. You should have just left it to them!¡±


    While Adam understood what she was saying, he didn¡¯t regret trying to help Helen. He wasn¡¯t sure he would do again, though, now that he thought about the potential of being stabbed. Julianne then put the nail in the coffin on the subject; ¡°I¡¯m also going to let Vivienne know about this. I¡¯m sure she¡¯ll have some choice words of her own to share.¡±


    Adam inwardly groaned; ¡®Mom¡¯s going to chew me out! I¡¯ll never do it again!... probably.¡¯


    Julianne dropped Adam off at the dormitory, before heading back to continue her work at Madame¡¯s. With a heavy sigh, Adam went inside while wondering how long it was until dinner time. Adam didn¡¯t get too far in before he heard a couple of arguing voice quickly approaching: ¡°Helen, you need to take someone with you! I have to go to work soon, so I can¡¯t go with you. You really shouldn¡¯t leave on your own after what happened.¡±


    ¡°But I want to go somewhere to relax and forget about it, Susan. There¡¯s no place better.¡±


    ¡°I know, but-¡±


    ¡°-hmph, fine! I¡¯ll take him with me then!¡±


    Adam¡¯s hand was suddenly grabbed as Helen pulled him along. ¡°Happy now!?¡±


    ¡°Wait, Helen!¡±


    Helen didn¡¯t wait as she stormed off with a stunned Adam in tow. Susan shook her head before storming off in a different direction with an idea in mind. Adam wasn¡¯t sure what to say as Helen¡¯s delicate hand firmly pulled him along. After a minute, Adam finally said: ¡°Uh, where are we going?¡±


    Helen¡¯s quick paces slowed: ¡°Sorry that I dragged you without asking, it¡¯s just that I had to get out of there!¡±


    Adam wasn¡¯t entirely sure what the men were trying to do to Helen, but she obviously wanted to escape the fresh memories of what happened. He tried to smile at her: ¡°It¡¯s fine, just lead the way! I¡¯m just curious about where we¡¯re going.¡±


    Helen¡¯s grip became gentler as she led him forward; ¡°We¡¯re going to The Hill Garden. It¡¯s a hill that has gardens built into it. It¡¯s rather peaceful there. I often go there to relax.¡±


    ¡°Sounds like fun!¡± Adam replied.


    The Hill Garden was around a twenty-minute walk from Madame¡¯s. The hill was a steep man-made mound that rose fairly high. A paved path snaked its way clockwise up the hill at a lower grade than the hill. There were many well-maintained flowers along the path with plenty of trees to enclose the area and make it feel private. There were a few vista points higher up that allowed one to take a breathtaking view across Hessler. From the very top of the hill, one could even see over the walls of Hessler!


    Adam was surprised when they entered the area. Even though Helen had said it was peaceful, he hadn¡¯t expected the sounds of the city to quiet down as much as they did. It also made him realize just how loud the city was and how used to it he had gotten.


    After walking along for a short while, Helen pulled them off the path to a flat grassy area that she liked. She sprawled herself out on the grass and let out a relieved sigh. ¡°This is my favorite place here. A little off the path and around a couple trees, it¡¯s hard to be seen from the path.¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°It¡¯s really nice here, thank you for taking me.¡±


    For a moment, the two of the just bathed in the peaceful quiet of the park. In the relative silence, one could hear squirrels chattering away, birds calling to one another, and leaves gently swaying in the trees. Adam couldn¡¯t help a sudden surge of questions: ¡°So, you dance at Madame¡¯s then? I thought you had higher education or something.¡±


    Helen nodded her head: ¡°I am still going to school, but I also still need to work at Madame¡¯s to pay for my schooling. I don¡¯t have too much work, though. Personally, I love studying, and this is one of my favorite places to relax and read a book! Sometimes, though, I just want to get up and move, and there¡¯s nothing quite like dancing to get you moving!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s neat. It seems you get to do what you really like.¡±


    ¡°Yup.¡±


    It seemed Helen was equally passionate about dancing as she was about learning. No other questions came to Adam¡¯s mind, but he didn¡¯t like sitting there doing nothing, so he pulled his flute out and began playing a gentle tune. At first, Helen wasn¡¯t sure what to think about Adam playing his music. His questions and music weren¡¯t quite the peace she had come here for, but she quickly found she liked the song. It wasn¡¯t a beautiful peace he was playing, it was just¡­ nice. And it seemed to somehow fit with the garden. Closing her eyes, her mind drifted with the music.


    A little while later, she opened her eyes as she heard heavy footsteps coming through the grass. Giving a disgruntled groan, she said: ¡°What, are you here to bring us back?¡±


    A gruff voice responded: ¡°I¡¯m just here to ensure the protection of the both of you.¡±


    Adam had stopped playing when he also heard the footsteps. Now recognizing the voice, he said: ¡°Hi Hansen!¡±


    Hansen nodded; ¡°Adam.¡±


    ¡°How did you even find us here?¡± Helen asked.


    ¡°Just followed the music.¡±


    Hansen didn¡¯t say anything more and just loomed where he stood. Helen gave an exasperated sigh: ¡°Let¡¯s just go back. I can¡¯t tolerate all these people in my spot!¡±


    Helen got up and helped Adam to his feet before taking his hand and leading the way forward. Hansen silently followed behind. After a few minutes of walking, Helen asked: ¡°Adam?¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°I¡­ I think I¡¯ll help you with your Spiritualist studies.¡±


    ¡°Really!? Thank you so much! It might be difficult, though. I don¡¯t even really understand what I¡¯ll be studying.¡±


    Helen sweetly nodded: ¡°It¡¯s fun that way! Studying is about learning the stuff you don¡¯t know!¡±


    What once been awkward between the two due to the bath incident, had turned happy and accepting. An unbidden thought suddenly popped into Adam¡¯s head; ¡°Hey, I¡¯ve been meaning to ask someone; what does brothel mean?¡±


    Silence followed for a moment as Helen¡¯s face turned red. She smacked Adam upside the head: ¡°Don¡¯t make me take back my offer to help you study!¡±


    Adam was absolutely stunned. He rubbed the back of his head as he grumbled: ¡°It was just a question.¡±


    Hansen couldn¡¯t help letting out a chuckle.

 Chapter 11 Bandit

    Bandit


    A few days later, Helen started helping Adam to study at SIH. When they would arrive at SIH, Adam would first spend around an hour studying the formation within A Spiritualist¡¯s Path.Actually, he was just listening to the song of the Spirit Formation contained within it. While he was doing that, Helen explored the library to her heart¡¯s content. When it was finally time for classes to start, Helen grabbed Adam and took him to class. For a lot of the subject matter, Adam had a hard time wrapping his head around, so Helen was constantly whispering explanations to him. It got to the point where she would even tutor him back at Madame¡¯s!


    Adam moaned and complained all about it , but it actually wasn¡¯t quite as bad as when he first went to school back at Fort Erich. There was something different about SIH and learning with Helen. One of the largest differences was that there were a few interesting classes he could attend. One day, he learned about dragons! How there were many differences between dragons and how they were the closest creatures in the world to Spirits!


    Adam gave a heavy sigh. He had just gotten off another tutor session with Helen. ¡®As much as I am learning with Helen, I don¡¯t feel that I¡¯m getting any closer to that one step that will make me a Spiritualist!¡¯


    Disturbing his thoughts, Alfred came running over: ¡°Hey Adam!¡±


    Adam gave a slightly depressed: ¡°Hello.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s got you down?¡±


    ¡°Spiritualist stuff.¡±


    ¡°Ah, well¡­ me and the others were thinking recently; Hansen knows how to wield a sword, right?¡±


    Adam nodded his head: ¡°He used to be part of the city guard where I lived.¡±


    ¡°Well, we were thinking about asking him to teach us how to use swords! What do you think?¡±


    Adam was a little taken aback: ¡°Well, you¡¯d have to ask him. Why are you asking me about it? It¡¯s not like I can really continue learning it since I can¡¯t see.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re going to fix that, aren¡¯t you? After you become a Spiritualist, you¡¯ll be able to see again! Oh, but I guess flinging fireballs might be cooler than swinging a sword.¡±


    Adam laughed: ¡°You¡¯re right, I am planning on fixing my eyes! My dad was training me before he died¡­ It might be good to continue. Hansen told me once: ¡®it¡¯s better to train and not need it¡¯ than need it and not be trained for it. I don¡¯t know what I will do until I can see, but let¡¯s ask Hansen to teach us how to wield swords!¡±


    Alfred pumped his fist in victory: ¡°Yeah! Let¡¯s round up the others and then find Hansen!¡±


    It didn¡¯t take long to collect Franklin, Clyde, Bruno, and Derek. Altogether, they went out in search of Hansen. It wasn¡¯t that hard to find him as it seemed he was either on duty or exercising. He never seemed to do anything else besides the two. When they found Hansen, he was doing some exercises in their normal spot. In fact, he appeared to be in the middle of practicing a few sword sets.


    ¡°Hansen!¡± They cried out.


    Stopping his motions, Hansen cast a quizzical glance their way: ¡°Why are you gathered?¡±


    Adam started off: ¡°We came to ask you if you could teach us how to wield the sword. It has been so long, I feel I have even forgotten everything dad taught me!¡±


    Alfred and the others nodded: ¡°Yeah, won¡¯t you teach us!?¡±


    Hansen sheathed his sword, fully stopping his practice. He nodded to them: ¡°I must do something first. I will tell you when the decision has been made whether I can or not.¡±


    Saying only that, Hansen turned and left leaving the boys confused. Franklin piped up: ¡°So, was that a yes or a no?¡±


    ¡°It was more like a maybe. Does he need to figure something out first?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know.¡±


    With disappointment in their hearts, the boys broke up and continued about their day. Later in the afternoon, Vivienne collected Adam from his flute lesson with Julianne: ¡°Adam, Hansen apparently wants some kind of meeting that we need to go to.¡±


    ¡°A meeting?¡±


    Vivienne nodded: ¡°Yeah, it kinda surprised me too. He said it was important and wants us to meet in Janette¡¯s office. I¡¯m not entirely sure what this is about, as he wouldn¡¯t say anything more. After all this time, I still don¡¯t get that man!¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t help feeling some excitement: ¡®Maybe this is something to do with the sword training!¡¯


    Together, the two of them took off for Janette¡¯s office. Upon entering, Janette and Hansen were already waiting. Janette jumped up with excitement: ¡°Finally! This guy won¡¯t crack a smile at any of my jokes!¡±Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    Vivienne couldn¡¯t help smiling at her friends antics: ¡°Well, not everyone can appreciate your humor.¡±


    Janette pouted at her as she helped Adam into a seat before sitting down herself. She then turned to Hansen: ¡°Well, what is this all about.¡±


    ¡°Adam and his friends have asked me to teach them how to wield a sword.¡±


    ¡°What? Adam, is this true?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°Yes. Everyone was extremely interested in learning the sword. I don¡¯t know that there is any way I can learn too, but I will eventually see again¡­ If that incident with Helen at the booths taught me anything, it was that it is better to be prepared for anything that might happen¡­¡±


    Janette turned to Hansen: ¡°So, are you seeking permission to teach them how to wield a sword?¡±


    Hansen spoke straight: ¡°There¡¯s more. Before teaching them to fight, you should know I was once a bandit.¡±


    The room turned silent. Vivienne was the first to speak as she suddenly stood from her chair: ¡°You what!?¡±


    Janette also stood up to restrain her friend from doing anything rash: ¡°Calm down Vivi! What is this about, Hansen?¡±


    ¡°Before teaching these boys to fight, you should know my past.¡±


    Janette gave a sigh: ¡°Madame¡¯s doesn¡¯t overly care for your past. As long as you are not an active criminal it doesn¡¯t matter too much.¡±


    Hansen shook his head: ¡°It must be done.¡±


    Vivienne suddenly shouted: ¡°And why didn¡¯t it matter until now!?¡±


    Hansen looked at her: ¡°Physically training them is one thing. Teaching them to fight¡­ to kill, is another.¡±


    Vivienne wanted to yell and shout but had no idea where to even start. Janette spoke: ¡°Vivi, let¡¯s just listen to him.¡±


    Vivienne looked into her friend¡¯s eyes, imploring her to just sit and listen. Crossing her arms, Vivienne sat down with a ¡®hmph.¡¯ Adam had been silent the whole time: ¡®Hansen¡¯s a bandit? But¡­ he¡¯s not a bad person, is he?¡¯


    Hansen told his story; having been orphaned at a young age, he was left to fend for himself. Stealing became the only thing he could do to keep himself alive. As he grew older, so did the range of his crimes. Eventually, he found himself in a bandit gang. He plundered¡­ he murdered, he did it all. For a long time, he lived that life and then¡­ he finally decided that wasn¡¯t the kind of life he wanted anymore. The deaths he had seen and caused started to weigh on him. Picking the right time, Hansen was able to leave without alerting anyone from the gang.


    Having finally left, Hansen found himself lost. The bandit life had turned his demeanor callous. He couldn¡¯t socialize normally with anyone and he didn¡¯t have any skills beyond fighting. There was no way he could assume a ¡®normal¡¯ life again. His guilt made him want to somehow make up for his crimes. Turning himself in wasn¡¯t enough, he had to do something about it. Thankfully, the answer came to him. A mercenary group came through the village he was in. The group had many former bandits as its members. People who had come to feel much the same as Hansen. They took him in and he helped them with many jobs. Primarily, they targeted bandit groups that were attacking defenseless villages. Something Hansen could do to directly make up for his past crimes! Finally, after spending a few years with the mercenary group, Hansen tired of killing in general. Still, he was left with a problem; he only knew how to fight. He didn¡¯t have experience with any other kind of job, so he found himself as a guard at Fort Erich. It was a job that required his experience as a fighter but did not require constant killing.


    Silence met the room as Hansen finished the rendition of his life. Janette finally spoke: ¡°Now, what was the point of this again?¡±


    Adam, Vivienne, and even Hansen stiffened. Her words seemed a little¡­ harsh for someone who had just spilled their past out before them. She then continued: ¡°It really doesn¡¯t change much at all. You¡¯ve done your best to atone in your own way and you are not an active criminal. What were you expecting from this?¡±


    Janette wasn¡¯t being callous or uncaring, she just didn¡¯t see how it changed anything. Hansen answered: ¡°Teaching the sword is more than just sets, it is how to kill. If I am the one to teach them how to kill, you should know how I learned to do so.¡±


    Adam was a little taken aback; ¡°How to kill!? That¡¯s not what we¡­¡±


    Suddenly, the meaning behind wielding a sword became heavy to Adam. It wasn¡¯t just fun and games. A sword was a sharp instrument intended for one particular purpose; to kill. It was more apparent now that somebody said it aloud.


    Hansen nodded: ¡°The sword is more than what you thought. There is much to teach you, boys, before you would be allowed to touch a real sword. And, when it is finally time to start training with one, I will require each of you to give me a personal conviction as to why you wish to wield a sword. If I find it lacking, you will not be trained! Killing, is not for everyone¡­¡±


    Janette spoke next: ¡°I personally don¡¯t have much against it. It¡¯s up to the boys what they wish to do in their spare time, but it will have to be just that! This cannot take over their jobs here at Madame¡¯s. I don¡¯t want them getting any smart ideas about living off the sword before they even become adults! They also cannot be harmed during the training.¡±


    ¡°Bruises and the occasional broken bone should always be expected in training,¡± Hansen responded.


    Janette almost growled as she said: ¡°My boys are not to be harmed!¡±


    A debate started to rage between the two as Hansen explained how the training would go and how potential injuries were likely to occur. Honestly, the training sounded quite grueling! Adam wasn¡¯t sure he and the others could withstand it long enough for them to actually get to the part where they would learn the sword. Eventually, Janette gave a heavy sigh: ¡°Let me think on this some more. I¡¯ll let you know whether I¡¯ll allow your crazy training plan tomorrow.¡±


    Hansen nodded: ¡°Very well.¡±


    He then got up and left the room without another word. Vivienne shook her head: ¡°I will never understand that man.¡±


    Janette heaved a dramatic sigh: ¡°Tell me about it, what a grouch!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not exactly what I mean-¡±


    ¡°-Oh I know that, you killjoy! You just want to talk about all the serious stuff. At least you now know why he¡¯s so awkward and gruff; he just doesn¡¯t know how to properly socialize!¡±


    Vivienne shook her head at her friend before getting up: ¡°Well, we¡¯ll leave you to your decision making.¡±


    ¡°Sure, leave me all the hard bits to figure out on my own!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s why you¡¯re the Madame.¡±


    Janette stuck her tongue out at her friend¡¯s retreating back. The next day, Janette finally gave her answer: a begrudging ¡®yes.¡¯

 Chapter 12 Constrained

    Constrained


    Adam had just gotten off from his afternoon flute lesson with Julianne when Alfred came running over, shouting: ¡°Adam, did you hear the news!?¡±


    ¡°What? No, what¡¯s going on?¡±


    ¡°Madame Jeanette said Hansen could train us in the sword! Everyone that isn¡¯t working is talking about it!¡±


    Excitement also filled Adam: ¡°Really!?¡±


    Many young boys and girls aspiring to become a hero wished to learn the sword. Whenever you heard a story about some great knight slaying a dragon, it was always with a sword!


    ¡°When are we going to start?¡± Adam asked.


    ¡°In a few days. Apparently, a few people have been asking to join in on the training too. Hansen¡¯s going to have us all head to our regular exercise spot, and we¡¯ll start off from there!¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Later that night, Adam was talking to Vivienne: ¡°Hansen¡¯s going to start training us the sword in a few days! It¡¯s been so long since I¡¯ve trained with father. I wonder if I can remember everything.¡±


    Vivienne nodded: ¡°I¡¯d heard. About that, though, I don¡¯t think you should start training with the sword again.¡±


    Adam¡¯s heart started to plummet: ¡®Is mom going to make me give it up!?¡¯


    ¡°Adam, you are already doing flute lessons and trying to study to become a Spiritualist. I don¡¯t think you should add this to the mix. However¡­ before we had to leave, your father and I had talked about letting you make your own decisions. While it¡¯s still a few years off, you¡¯ll become an adult before we even know it¡­ I¡¯ll let you make your own decision about whether you want to train with the sword again, but I want you to promise me one thing; if you need to choose between doing one thing or another, do what is right, not what is fun.¡±


    Adam gave a defeated: ¡°Okay.¡±


    At the same time, he thought: ¡®Do what is right, not what is fun? Studying isn¡¯t fun at all, so that¡¯s probably what mom wants me to do¡­ ugh. Hopefully, I¡¯ll be able to keep up with the training in addition to everything else and won''t be forced to choose.¡¯


    -----------------------------------------


    For the next few days, the boys continued their morning exercises with Hansen as normal. A few prospective trainees came around, wondering if maybe they would start the sword training early, but Hansen never spoke of the subject. Finally, the day they all had been waiting for came. There was a large turnout of around twenty people clustered behind the dormitory where the boys normally exercised. Most of those gathering were boys, with a few girls actually being in attendance. A few among them even carried some simple wooden swords made of two planks of wood that formed a cross.


    Hansen appeared in front of the eager group. He calmly observed the group before saying: ¡°You are all here to learn the sword?¡±


    The crowd enthusiastically nodded and voiced their agreement. Hansen continued: ¡°Before you can even hope to hold a sword, your bodies must first be thoroughly trained. Adam, Alfred, Bruno, Clyde, Derek, and Franklin; lead the others in our normal morning exercises.¡±


    Hansen didn¡¯t say anything else as the boys stepped forward. They hadn¡¯t done something like this before, so it was a little awkward at first. Many of the trainees were left disappointed as they expected to go straight to the sword.


    When they were finally done with their exercises, they were gasping for breath on the ground. Hansen merely nodded and said: ¡°I¡¯ll see you here again tomorrow.¡±


    The next day, they did the same exercises. And the next day, and the day after that. As the days progressed, fewer and fewer trainees showed up for the morning exercises. Finally, after a week of exercises, Hansen said something new: ¡°Those without the resolve to stick to proper training have been culled. Now the exercises will intensify to prepare you for the next phase of training.¡±


    Hansen pushed them all to their limits. This time, Adam and the other boys were left gasping for breath with everyone else. While relaxing in the baths after the hard exercise, Adam groaned: ¡°I thought Hansen¡¯s exercises were already exhausting. I didn¡¯t know he had worse ones hidden up his sleeves.¡±


    Franklin piped up: ¡°Yeah, I can¡¯t believe we¡¯ve lost almost everyone that initially wanted to join us! If I hadn¡¯t started exercising with you guys, I probably would have quit too.¡±


    Derek added in: ¡°Why do you think Hansen is driving us this hard?¡±


    ¡°I think he¡¯s testing us,¡± Adam said.


    The others looked at him: ¡°Do you know something about this?¡±


    Adam shook his head. He wouldn¡¯t tell them of Hansen¡¯s past behind his back. ¡°He said that those without the resolve were culled. If he doesn¡¯t feel we¡¯re good enough for it¡­ I don¡¯t think Hansen will teach us anything about wielding a sword.¡±


    Even as he said that, Adam privately thought: ¡®I know Hansen has his reasons but is this all really necessary? Dad was never this tough when he was training me¡­¡¯


    Reluctantly, the boys got out of the bath. Hansen¡¯s intensified exercises were well and truly exhausting. As tired as they now felt, it was only the start of the day! Adam had to push himself forward. If he wanted to learn the sword under Hansen¡¯s exacting conditions, he would still need to keep up with his flute lessons and Spiritualist studies¡­


    -----------------------------------------


    After a month of the intense exercises, Adam was finally getting used to them. Despite some of the more boring subjects lulling him to sleep, he had been able to keep up with his studies during this time too. Adam met up with the other boys in the morning, as usual, but they had an extra tag along. She was the only one of the few remaining trainees that had managed to weasel her way into their little circle. They were still friends with the other trainees, but they felt something more with those in their little group. It made it hard for others to join in, but Kadara had somehow managed it.


    Kadara greeted them: ¡°Hey guys, are you ready for another day at Hansen World?¡±


    Franklin gave Kadara a disgruntled look: ¡°I still have no idea where you came up with that name. It sounds ridiculous!¡±


    She just shrugged: ¡°It just seems to fit whenever I say it.¡±This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    Hansen arrived shortly after they had. The hopes of those present began to rise as he said: ¡°Before learning to fight with the sword, you will learn how to fight without one! Starting today, I will teach you hand-to-hand combat!¡±


    Hansen started by guiding them through a few simple punches and kicks. Every one of them had poor form that needed to be corrected. Of them all, Adam was the worst: ¡°Adam, your punch is too high!¡± ¡°Adam, your kick was off to the left.¡± ¡°Adam, your punch is too low!¡±


    Over and over, he was corrected. If it wasn¡¯t one thing wrong, it was another as he over- compensated for his errors. He couldn¡¯t actually see what he was doing, so it was understandable. At the same time, though, he burned with embarrassment at constantly being called out. At least he wasn¡¯t the only one: ¡°Franklin, put your weight into it! Look at Kadara, she knows how to do it.¡±


    Franklin looked over at Kadara, who seemed to be having the easiest time among them. ¡°How are you so good at this!?¡± he hissed.


    Bruno and Clyde attentively listened in as they weren¡¯t doing so well either. Kadara merely flashed a bright smile and said: ¡°All the girls here are taught how to dance. It taught us a lot about the balance and control of our bodies! The movements are different, but it¡¯s similar in many ways to dancing!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s¡­ not helpful at all.¡± Franklin said with a defeated look. Kadara couldn¡¯t help doubling over and laughing at him before Hansen started yelling at the two of them.


    After a while, they started to get the hang of the punches and kicks that they were being taught. They had hardly broken a sweat too! Secretly, they were all gleeful at the thought that maybe all the exhausting days of training were over! And then Hansen brought out small bags of sand: ¡°Now we will tie these bags to your wrists and ankles. I expect you to maintain form!¡±


    At first, it was rather easy. The bags weren¡¯t more than a pound and hardly affected their punches and kicks. Slowly, though, the bags seemed to grow in weight as their arms and legs started to tire. By the end of the session, everyone was feeling a whole new kind of pain and exhaustion caused by the weights. Being theatric, Franklin huffed: ¡°What kind of demon is he to put us through this torture!?¡±


    Despite saying that, he showed up with everyone the next day as they continued where they left off. Unknown to them, Hansen had added a little more sand to each of the bags¡­


    -----------------------------------------


    A few weeks passed and Hansen started training them on light sparring. Mostly, it was just drilling them through moves they would use on each other in a slow practiced manner. While everyone sparred¡­ Adam stood on the side continuing to practice forms on his own. It was hard enough practicing the forms, which he was still terrible at, let alone sparring. As he was, it was impossible for him to continue the training in any meaningful way¡­


    As Adam heard Hansen call out each set for those sparring, the frustration within him built up. Sure, if he managed to become a Spiritualist, he could probably do better concentrating on that rather than training, but he wasn¡¯t really progressing much there either. Finally, he had enough of it. He stopped practicing the forms and picked up his walking stick before walking off in a huff.


    ¡°Adam!¡± Alfred called out in a worried voice. This was the first time one of them had just walked out.


    At this point, the others noticed what was happening and stopped their own spars. Adam merely waived in their general direction, saying: ¡°I¡¯ll be back, just keep doing your own thing.¡±


    Hansen hollered at them: ¡°Back to work! Before you worry about others, worry about your own terrible form!¡±


    Even as he said that, Hansen cast a glance back at Adam before continuing the drills. Adam made his way around into the dormitory. Once inside, he headed into the cafeteria and sat down. Adam didn¡¯t even know what he wanted to do as depression washed his frustration away. He recalled the last time he had spoken with Catherine.


    -¡°I don¡¯t feel like I¡¯m getting any closer to making the next step in becoming a Spiritualist.¡±


    Catherine chuckled: ¡°Adam, you¡¯ve only been at this for a couple months. It¡¯s too early for you to be complaining like this.¡±


    ¡°But, you said only a couple people make that step every year. Shouldn¡¯t I be feeling different or something?¡±


    Catherine sighed; ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true. However, I never said that it was the ones who started studying that year who became Spiritualists.¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°It takes more than just one year of study to become a Spiritualist. Most students average at least two years of study. Only a very rare few take less time than that. You still have a while to go before you finally take the next step.¡±-


    Adam gave another sigh as he thought about that conversation: ¡®That¡¯s just not soon enough for me.¡¯


    Adam then heard someone sit down next to him. Helen¡¯s voice came to him: ¡°Why aren¡¯t you training with the others?¡±


    ¡°Oh, hi Helen. I just got frustrated with everything. I can¡¯t keep up in training with the others and I¡¯m not getting anywhere as a Spiritualist. I just don¡¯t know what to do.¡±


    ¡°Sounds like you should try to get away from everything and relax.¡±


    ¡°That actually sounds nice... ¡° Adam responded.


    Helen looked at him. Even though it sounded nice, it didn¡¯t seem he had a good idea on how to go about it as he still wore his depression heavy on his face. She said: ¡°I¡¯m free later this afternoon. If you want, I could take you over to the Hill Garden.¡±


    Adam was surprised. He hadn¡¯t thought of that before. Thinking on it, Adam liked the idea of visiting the Hill Garden: ¡°Thanks! That place was rather calming.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll see you later then!¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    A breeze swept through the trees around them. Adam played a tune freely as he relaxed. Helen laid out in the grass nearby. It was quite nice, but Adam¡¯s mind inevitably began to wander. He began to think of his troubles again and how powerless he currently was to change them. As his mind wandered, so too did his music. Helen piped up: ¡°What happened? Your music turned sour or something.¡±


    Adam put his flute down and gave a sigh: ¡°Sorry, my mind began to wander. I was thinking of my problems I¡¯ve been having with studying the Formation in A Spiritualist''s Path.¡±


    ¡°You were supposed to come here to relax, not think of your problems more! You¡¯re defeating the whole purpose of me bringing you here.¡±


    ¡°Sorry.¡±


    ¡°We haven¡¯t really talked about your problems with the book. Catherine knows more about that stuff better than me, but maybe you just need a fresh mind working on the problem. What exactly can¡¯t you figure out about it?¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s like there¡¯s something wrong when I recreate the song I heard. I do my best to replicate it, but something is just¡­ off. If I can just figure out what that is, I¡¯m sure I¡¯ll be able to make that next step into becoming a Spiritualist.¡±


    ¡°Can you play the song for me?¡±


    ¡°Sure.¡±


    Helen listened to the song awhile before shrugging: ¡°I don¡¯t know much about music and less about being a Spiritualist. Still, I feel that what you are playing is more¡­ constrained? Is that the word? I don¡¯t know, but I definitely don¡¯t like that song as much as the one you were playing earlier when trying to relax. Try to play it more like that!¡±


    ¡°But that¡¯s different from the song from the book.¡±


    Helen once again shrugged: ¡°You said it yourself, your Path is totally different from other Spiritualists. The book just might be the problem.¡±


    Adam blanked for a moment: ¡°Maybe you¡¯re right.¡±


    Adam started out playing the song from the book as normal, but this time changed it. He tried to make it livelier and more free. After trying a few variations, Adam started to feel something change within the song. A small breeze picked up around them and then Adam suddenly felt tired. He stopped playing with an ¡°Ugh.¡±


    Helen glanced at him: ¡°Are you alright, Adam?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t know, I just suddenly felt tired.¡±


    ¡°... Is that good or bad? I¡¯d heard you could get tired or develope headaches while studying the Formation inside A Spiritualist¡¯s Path, this could be similar. I don¡¯t know how good that is, though.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know, but I really feel like taking a nap.¡±


    ¡°Adam?¡±


    Adam fell from sitting on the ground onto his back, unconscious. In the deep recesses of his mind, something stirred. It was a want, a desire for that song to continue. Adam found himself dreaming of the song he had just played.

 Chapter 13 Spirit Sight

    Spirit Sight


    Adam¡¯s dreams started to churn with the song. As time passed, the song began to grow. It was like drums being added to Adam¡¯s flute piece. It was then followed by maracas, and then even trumpets! More and more instruments seemed to add to the song, completely transforming it! And then the very fabric of the dream began to shift. Adam began to have an inexplicable feeling. It was as though each part that the instruments added were more than just music. Adam felt that if you could describe an object in the world with song instead of words, it would be done just like this!


    As Adam completed that idea, colorful images began to form in the empty space of his dream. These images weren¡¯t very well-defined; they were just a bunch of different colored silhouettes that seemed to form a room that had two beds in it. Someone was lying on one bed while another sat on a bed just beside the first. Looking around this colorful room that had formed around him, it reminded Adam a lot of the dormitory room he shared with Vivienne. But it was way too colorful. There even seemed to be a haze of colors hanging in the air that was mostly green. Quite frankly, it was all starting to make Adam feel nauseous!


    Adam began to stir with a sick groan: ¡°Ugh.¡±


    The bed next to Adam creaked, as Vivienne got up and asked: ¡°Are you awake, Adam?¡±


    Within the colorful dream that was still in his mind, Adam saw the figure that was sitting on the bed stand up and move to the first bed. In Adam¡¯s dream, he was on the other side of the room from where he was really laying on his bed. The sound of his mom getting up, coupled with the dream figure standing up from the bed at the same time led to a weird sense of vertigo. This, coupled with the nausea he already had, caused Adam¡¯s stomach to lurch. Leaning over the edge of his bed and heaved the contents of his stomach out.


    Vivienne quickly reached his side: ¡°Adam!?¡±


    As she rubbed his back to try and comfort him, Adam also reached out to her. Within his dream, he could see the figures in that room were reacting exactly how both he and Vivienne were. Realization dawned on Adam: ¡®Could this really be!?¡¯


    Shakily, he said: ¡°Mom, I¡­ I think I can see!¡±


    ¡°Adam, what?¡±


    Before he could say anything more, exhaustion once again overcame Adam. This time, his dreams slipped away from him. The orchestra of sound, and the odd dreamscape it had somehow created, faded away...


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam groaned in pain from a headache as he awoke. As he fought through the pain, he came to realize he could no longer hear the orchestra of sound, nor see that nauseating dreamscape. As nice as it was to no longer feel sick, he also couldn¡¯t see!


    Fear and confusion began to overcome Adam: ¡®Was that all just a dream?¡¯


    Once again, Adam heard the creak of the bed next to him: ¡°Are you feeling any better, Adam?¡±


    Adam slowly nodded: ¡°I think so, but¡­ maybe it was just a dream. I thought I could somehow see again. It was really odd.¡±


    ¡°Maybe you should see Magister Catherine about this. Helen was quite scared when you collapsed after playing that song you heard from the book.¡±


    Adam nodded as he then thought: ¡°How did I get back?¡±


    ¡°Helen managed to find some help at the Hill Garden. I think you should thank her, but not before you rest some more.¡±


    ¡°Right.¡±


    Now that he appeared better, Vivienne left Adam so he could rest on his own. With a sigh, Adam lied back down on his bed; ¡®Helen really helped me out there. I don¡¯t even know how I should thank her.¡¯


    Adam tried to go back to sleep, but his headache would throb at just the right times to keep him from falling asleep. Left with nothing else to do, Adam thought about that odd dreamscape and how it might tie into what had happened at the Hill Garden. He started to hum the song he had played before he lost consciousness. As he did so, a spike of pain assaulted his mind! A sea of sounds started to crash into him, each eagerly responding to the song he hummed. Adam yelled out: ¡°Stop!¡±


    But they didn¡¯t stop! Each little song cried out to Adam, starting to once again form the odd dreamscape, but it was extremely chaotic! Unlike when he was dreaming, the sounds weren¡¯t forming an orderly orchestra, it was more like tons of instruments blaring out notes however they pleased! The song, Adam had hummed moments ago, was drifting in the back of his mind, nearly drowned out by everything he was now hearing. A random desperate thought struck him, and he decided to act on it; Adam quickly began to hum a song similar to the one before, but totally out of tune! It was horrendous and caused all the sounds clamoring for his attention to suddenly scatter, as though they were frightened rabbits.


    Adam sighed in relief. He was both excited and afraid of what just happened: ¡®So, it wasn¡¯t just a dream! I really need to see Catherine about this.¡¯Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.


    -----------------------------------------


    ¡°That¡­ is rather interesting,¡± Catherine said.


    Adam had told Vivienne of what happened after she had left. They had made their way to SIH as soon as they could, but Adam had yet to try humming that song again. They had both deemed it too dangerous to try without Catherine to help figure out what was going on.


    ¡°Do you still have a headache, Adam?¡±


    Adam shook his head. Nodding, Catherine said: ¡°I think you¡¯ve stumbled across something with this new song of yours. Somehow, the song kept going while you were asleep causing your soul to become overexposed to Spirit Essence. Let¡¯s see what happens if you try it again.¡±


    Adam nodded, a little scared of what might happen. Taking a deep breath, Adam briefly went over the song in his head. Adam suddenly hissed in pain as the sounds already began to clamor for Adam¡¯s attention!


    ¡°Is it working?¡± Catherine asked.


    Adam nodded: ¡°I didn¡¯t even need to hum the song this time. I just thought of it and it happened. It still hurts though.¡±


    ¡°Is it better or worse than last time?¡±


    ¡°Better, but still not pleasant.¡±


    Catherine nodded, jotting down notes: ¡°So, can you see?¡±


    Adam concentrated on the dreamscape starting to form in his mind. He started to feel a little vertigo again as his position in the dreamscape was a little off: ¡°It¡¯s weird. It¡¯s not so much like I can see, more like I simply know what is around me. By knowing that, I form this¡­ dream full of silhouettes in my mind. I can even see myself!¡±


    Catherine seemed impressed. In Adam¡¯s mind, her form exuded an odd colored light. With a smile, she said: ¡°I believe you have achieved what you wanted; you now have a form of Spirit Sight. Though, it is unlike what I have heard of before. The pain you are feeling is probably because your soul is not quite strong enough to keep up with the information it is trying to process. It will likely get better with time.¡±


    Adam slowly nodded, trying to beat down the nauseous feelings that were starting to grow. Then, Adam began to hear something. He was hearing voices, but it was almost like they were muffled by something: ¡°It looked like Catherine was meeting with Adam again.¡±


    ¡°Interesting kid, but I don¡¯t know how his future will pan out. I¡¯ve never heard of someone hearing Spirit Formations before.¡±


    As Adam listened to the two voices, his ¡®vision¡¯ suddenly shifted! It was almost as though he were a ghost and he suddenly shifted through the wall into the office next to them! In there, there were two magisters talking to each other. As this happened, the vertigo Adam was feeling skyrocketed, and he quickly broke the song before he became so nauseous that he would throw up!


    As he leaned over and groaned, both Catherine and Vivienne became concerned. Adam told them of what happened. Catherine shook her head: ¡°You¡¯re becoming more and more of an enigma to me, Adam. I simply cannot comprehend where your Path is taking you. It would be a little difficult, but I would recommend that you should go to the capital. SIH in Heider City is more advanced than here. I believe you have made the first initial step to becoming a Spiritualist, but we don¡¯t have anything here that can help to continue your unique Path.¡±


    Adam was slightly stunned: ¡®Move? But¡­¡¯


    Vivienne said: ¡°We don¡¯t have the money for such a move.¡±


    Catherine nodded: ¡°I will still try to help Adam, but I feel even less confident in helping him than before. I can send a few letters out to see if anybody can help, but..¡±


    Adam felt a little better when he heard they wouldn¡¯t be moving. He said: ¡°Well, I might finally be able to spar with the others now!¡±


    Catherine gave a quizzical look: ¡°Spar with others?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°I¡¯m learning how to fight with a few friends. I can¡¯t do much right now, but they are in the middle of sparring with each other. With this Spirit Sight, I might be able to spar with them now!¡±


    Catherine frowned: ¡°You need to be careful with this, Adam. Have you heard of Martial Artists before?¡±


    Adam shook his head, so she elaborated: ¡°Where Spiritualists control Spirit Essence outside their body, Martial Artists control Spirit Essence within their bodies. Be careful when you are sparring as you can only be one or the other. Much like becoming a Spiritualist, it is hard to become a Martial Artist without the proper knowledge. However, it is still possible. You don¡¯t want to create a conflict between your body and soul fighting for control over Spirit Essence that would kill you!¡±


    ¡°So¡­ I can¡¯t continue with the others?¡±


    ¡°You can, but you just need to be aware of the possibility. For Martial Artists, it is said that you will feel a cool fluid circulate through your body. By controlling that circulation, you will begin your Path as a Martial Artist. Just pay attention to your body and immediately stop if you feel this.¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°Okay.¡±


    ¡°If you think you¡¯re up to it Adam, I think we should explore the limits of your Spirit Sight before you leave.¡±


    After spending some more time, they figured Adam could see a space of about ten meters all around him. With intense vertigo, he could even see through walls! Though, Adam was finding some difficulty on walking around while seeing. Still, it was a start.


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam sat, watching the others spar. He started to notice something: living beings, such as humans, can change colors. This color change was centered mostly around the head and seemed to be based on what that person was thinking. If he focused, Adam could even see slight fluctuations as the others moved through their spar sets.


    Before too long, they finished with their sparing. Adam stood up and tried to walk over and join them. After a few steps, Adam had to stop and break his Spirit Sight. Alfred waived over at Adam: ¡°Still having trouble?¡±


    Adam nodded as he started using his walking stick: ¡°I can¡¯t seem to get used to moving while using the Spirit Sight. I¡¯ll get there, though.¡±


    Alfred smiled: ¡°I can¡¯t wait to wipe the floor with you!¡±


    Adam smiled back: ¡°Just you wait!¡±

 Chapter 14 Moving Along

    Moving Along


    Before Adam knew it, a few months passed by! He had been busy learning to cope with the Spirit Sight and he could now finally move around without getting sick! He would still get a headache after using it for a few straight hours, though. At least he could now finally spar and train normally with the others! Unfortunately, though, Adam had yet to make any more progress as a Spiritualist. He just couldn¡¯t seem to control any other Formations!


    Adam treated this with a slight detachment: ¡®It would have been cool to learn how to actually be a Spiritualist and fling fireballs around, but at least I can more or less see now.¡¯


    Adam met up with the others for the morning training. This time, though, something seemed different. Hansen had a wooden sword held in each of his hands! Excitement spread through Adam and the others; ¡°Are we finally going to start learning the sword!?¡±


    ¡°Shut it, all of you!¡± Hansen quieted them down.


    ¡°Today starts the next phase of training. But you must first prove yourself! Adam, step forward.¡±


    Everyone was confused about what Hansen meant. Adam tentatively stepped forward and Hansen gave him one of the wooden swords. Without saying a word, Hansen stepped back a few paces before readying his own wooden sword. Adam quickly readied his own sword as Hansen advanced at him! Hansen harshly struck the sword out of Adam¡¯s hands while yelling: ¡°Why are you holding that sword!?¡±


    Holding his stinging hands, Adam gave a frightened: ¡°W-what?¡±


    Hansen merely gestured at the wooden sword on the ground: ¡°Pick it up.¡±


    Adam shakily grabbed onto the wooden sword as everyone else looked on, dumbstruck. Hansen once again advanced on Adam, yelling: ¡°Why are you holding that sword!?¡±


    Adam¡¯s wooden sword was once again struck out of his hands. Adam¡¯s mind was in turmoil as he tried to figure out what was going on, but then he remembered the meeting where Hansen revealed his past. He wouldn¡¯t teach them unless they had the conviction to hold the sword!


    Adam thought: ¡®He isn¡¯t asking why I¡¯m holding this wooden sword, He¡¯s asking why I want to wield the sword!¡¯


    Without waiting for Hansen to tell him, Adam picked up the wooden sword on the ground. Turning to Hansen, he said: ¡°I never want to be helpless again! That night, I lost both Emilia and my dad. If I was stronger¡­ maybe something would have been different! I want the strength to protect my friends and family so something like that night never happens again!¡±


    ¡°Are you ready to kill if it means saving them?¡±


    Adam hardened his resolve: ¡°If I have to.¡±


    Hansen nodded: ¡°Pass the sword on.¡±


    After Adam¡¯s display, the rest now had an idea of what was going on. Adam passed the wooden sword to Alfred, who stepped forward with mild confidence. Just the same as with Adam, Hansen quickly advanced while yelling: ¡°Why are you holding that sword!¡±


    Alfred ineptly tried to deflect Hansen¡¯s attack that he had anticipated. However, the wooden sword was still knocked from his hands. As he bent to pick up the sword, he said: ¡°I want to be strong enough to protect someone. She¡­ her parents were killed by kidnappers. By accident, I had discovered the house where the kidnappers were keeping the kids a few days before that happened. If I had been able to escape, instead of being captured by them, her parents would still be alive. I want the strength to do what I feel is right!¡±


    Hansen nodded: ¡°If it had just been for the girl, I would¡¯ve kicked you out. Next!¡±


    Alfred quickly handed the sword to someone else before Hansen could change his mind. In truth, it was still mostly for the girl that Alfred wanted to do this. Luckily, there was a little more to it than just her.


    Next up were Bruno and Clyde. It turned out that they had an ideal that they wanted to live up to. Their father had been a soldier, and he had firmly instilled the idea that the strong should protect the weak before he died in a skirmish between Heider and Luxom. The two of them wanted to follow in their father¡¯s footsteps and become soldiers! To become someone strong who would protect others, like their father!


    Derek, on the other hand, initially tried to beat around the bush and not give a real reason. After his hands started to bleed from having his sword knocked out of them so many times, he finally told Hansen his real reason for learning the sword; ¡°I don¡¯t want to become like my deadbeat father! He constantly got drunk and ended up beating my mom to death! I want to be strong enough to make a living on my own and protect the family I will eventually have!¡±


    Hansen responded to this: ¡°Keep your resolve strong.¡±


    Franklin had it tougher than Derek. He came right out with saying: ¡°My parents were killed by muggers. That man saw me as a helpless and weak child, so he let me live. I don¡¯t want to be that helpless again!¡±


    ¡°...I need something more than that.¡± Hansen replied.


    Hansen continued to force Franklin to pick up the sword over and over, without telling him anything more. Franklin finally screamed: ¡°What more do you want from me!?¡±


    ¡°An image of strength. You merely seek to no longer be helpless. You don¡¯t need a sword for that, so why do you want it!¡± Hansen replied.


    Franklin sat on the ground, silent. Hansen was just about to give up on Franklin when he suddenly spoke: ¡°I know I¡¯m not as strong as the others. But they are my friends and I want to stay with them! If we end up joining the army, or even just becoming guards, I know they will be ones who will push themselves to the front! They will need someone to watch their backs, I will be that person!¡±


    Hansen stared deeply at Franklin, who started to fidget: ¡°Being the rearguard is the most dangerous position. More than just learning the sword, you will have to improve your perception. It is from behind, that the enemy will often try to sneak up and strike from! Pass the sword on!¡±


    Franklin was ecstatic that he had finally passed Hansen¡¯s test. The last of Adam¡¯s circle of friends to be tested was Kadara. She was the only girl to stick with the training this far. As Hansen advanced on her, Kadara took a different approach than the others. Instead of trying to block and withstand Hansen¡¯s blow, she danced around and dodged it! Hansen was rather impressed, she was the only one to not lose hold of her sword! As she danced around Hansen¡¯s strikes, she said: ¡°I want to become a mercenary! I want to live my life my own way, I won¡¯t become a weak domestic wife!¡±Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    As she finished her declaration, Kadara stopped moving. She thought she was done, but Hansen continued and directly hit the sword she was holding loosely in her hand! Kadara cried out from the surprise as Hansen said: ¡°There are many paths to escape being a domestic wife. If that is all you desire¡­ forget the sword!¡±


    Kadara picked up the sword with gritted teeth; ¡°Perhaps, but only if I become a mercenary and join the Silver Saviors will I be able to kill bandits! No one should live under the influence of those putrid creatures!¡±


    Hansen was actually surprised by the determination Kadara showed! More than even Derek, a sense of hatred seethed through her. There was obviously a story behind it, but it also showed Hansen what he wanted. Nodding, he said: ¡°Work hard.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam put his flute down with a sigh: ¡°This just isn¡¯t working!¡±


    Catherine merely tutted at this: ¡°It took you awhile to change the Spirit Essence Formation in A Spiritualist¡¯s Path, it will also take you a while to change this Wind Formation into something you can use.¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°I¡¯ve been slowly getting this feeling, but the two are completely different¡­ I don¡¯t know that I can learn a Formation like this.¡±


    Catherine frowned: ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s the feeling I get from them. I don¡¯t know if it makes sense, but the Spirit Essence Formation feels more like it¡¯s simply inviting Spirit Essence to follow along.¡±


    Catherine nodded her head: ¡°That particular formation is more about directing the natural flow of Spirit Essence around you into your soul, rather than putting it to a certain task. Its complexity is rather simple. What about the Wind Formation?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s just it, I feel that the Wind Formation is commanding all the Wind Essence around to do something! My music can easily invite Spirit Essence, even people, to listen to it and follow along! However, I can¡¯t command anyone with my flute alone! It just doesn¡¯t have the force behind it that the Formation has.¡±


    Catherine shook her head: ¡°But it¡¯s not just the flute you should be using! Remember, you can start gathering Spirit Essence to form your Spirit Sight by merely thinking of the song. No one who hears your song gets the same effect! It¡¯s not just your music, but your soul imposing its will upon the Spirit Essence. I think you just need to find the right combination¡­¡±


    Adam sighed and continued trying to create a Wind Formation with no success.


    -----------------------------------------


    A month later, it was time for the Harvest Festival! Everyone else was quickly catching up to Adam¡¯s meager skill with the sword, as he had been briefly trained by his father before. However, his Spiritualist studies were still stagnating. Helen was still helping Adam at SIH, as his Spirit Sight would only let him see the form of a book or page, not the words written upon it. There was hope that Adam would learn something that would help him, but they had yet to find anything like that.


    Thinking of Helen, Adam asked: ¡°Where¡¯s Helen? I haven¡¯t seen her all day.¡±


    Adam was walking with his circle of friends through city streets crowded full of excited people. Stalls could be found every couple of feet along the road selling all kinds of snack foods or toys for the festival.


    Alfred hesitated a moment before speaking: ¡°It¡¯s kind of personal for her, so I won¡¯t tell you much, but she lost her parents on a Festival day. I¡¯m not entirely sure where she hides, but you likely won¡¯t see her all day today.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡± Adam said. He then thought: ¡®Is she hiding out at the Hill Garden?¡¯


    Adam spent most the rest of the day with his friends. As they were having fun, his mind constantly drifted. He didn¡¯t like the idea of them having a fun time if Helen was sulking somewhere in depression. Alfred seemed kind of out of it as well. In the afternoon, most of them had to head back to work their shift at Madame¡¯s. The Festival was a big day for business and pretty much everyone would be working at some point during the day. Adam was actually one of the few lucky ones who didn¡¯t have a shift!


    Left on his own, Adam¡¯s thoughts once again turned towards Helen: ¡®Maybe I should find her. I know it¡¯s not pleasant to be alone while you think of those you¡¯ve lost¡­¡¯


    Asking around, Adam was certain Helen wasn¡¯t anywhere around Madame¡¯s. Going with his original thought, he headed off to the Hill Garden. Sure enough, Adam found Helen sprawled out at her usual spot. She looked up as Adam entered the little clearing: ¡°What are you doing here?¡±


    Adam shrugged: ¡°I heard that you always hide yourself away during the Harvest Festival¡­ I didn¡¯t like the idea that the rest of us were having fun while you weren¡¯t. I figured this is where you were hiding, so here I am.¡±


    Helen heaved a sigh and, after a moment of silence, asked: ¡°Did they tell you why I hide away from the Festival?¡±


    ¡°A little. Alfred told me you lost your parents on a day like this, but that was all.¡±


    Helen seemed to contemplate something as Adam sat down near her. Seeming to come to a decision, she gave another sigh before saying: ¡°Did you know that the Harvest Festival is the best time to kidnap children?¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°There are so many people around, you wouldn¡¯t think it, but everyone is doing their own thing without paying attention to others around them. You¡¯ll also often see parents dragging kids home who want to stay out and play¡­ Kidnappers make it look just like that, two parents dragging a kid home among the crowd.¡±


    Adam didn¡¯t dare speculate where this conversation was going, but he already had an idea that he didn¡¯t like. Helen continued: ¡°That happened to me.¡±


    Adam had no idea what to say: ¡°... Helen.¡±


    Ignoring him, Helen continued with tears streaming down her cheeks: ¡°I was only separated from mom and dad for a moment when those strangers started dragging me away! Mom and dad saw what was going on as they took me down an alley. They tried to follow and stop the kidnappers, but¡­ they killed mom and dad and took me anyway!¡±


    At this point, Adam did the only thing he could think of; he took hold of Helen¡¯s hand and gave it a gentle squeeze. If she wanted to talk about it, there was no way he would stop her. But he also had no idea what to say back.


    After a long pause, Helen once again continued: ¡°I was locked away in a cage with others they had recently kidnapped. Alfred was there too.¡±


    ¡°Alfred!?¡±


    Helen nodded: ¡°He was also kidnapped¡­ I don¡¯t know what happened to him or what happened after I was put in the cage, but soldiers found the kidnappers and freed us. Madame¡¯s picked us up later. I was five years old then and couldn¡¯t tell whether or not I had any other family that could take me in¡­ So now I¡¯m here. Whenever the Festival hits, I can¡¯t celebrate. I can only remember what happened...¡±


    After Helen was silent for awhile and Adam was certain she was done telling her story, he pulled out his flute and played for her. Nothing really special, just something to pass the time by with. It wasn¡¯t mournful so that she would continue remembering those terrible memories. Nor was it happy, as Adam respected her thoughts. It was simply music, drifting along that could fill your mind. Helen was grateful for it as he tears slowly stopped and simply listened to his music.


    As the evening started to descend, Adam and Helen finally got up to leave. Neither of them had yet to have dinner, and they needed to make it home before dinner at the dormitory was done! As he walked in silence, Helen said: ¡°Thank you, Adam.¡±


    Adam merely smiled at here: ¡°Anytime.¡±

 Chapter 15 Peeper

    Peeper


    The edges of Adam and Bruno¡¯s swords clashed together as they spared. Hansen yelled out: ¡°Stop smashing the edges of your swords against each other! If those were real, you would only chip and wear the edge down! Guard with the flat of your blade or redirect the blow!¡±


    As he continued watching the two boys, Hansen couldn¡¯t help grumbling to himself: ¡®Why do they all believe blocking is done with the edge of the sword!?¡¯


    Adam did his best to listen to Hansen¡¯s words while focusing on Bruno. Catherine had called the colors that Adam sees in the heads of others, Auras. One¡¯s Aura was heavily connected to the soul and would change with their emotions. If Adam paid enough attention, he could even see small changes based on their thoughts! In this case, Adam was looking for any fluctuations in Burno¡¯s Aura to predict when he was going to attack! This could give Adam a huge advantage in spars! Unfortunately, the fluctuations were easy to miss and Adam missed a lot of them.


    Part of the reason why Adam missed them was that, if he focused solely on Bruno¡¯s Aura, what he could see of the world around him became distorted and blurry. Not being able to see the battlefield around you could quickly kill you, and Hansen drilled that hard into Adam. He couldn¡¯t allow himself to focus solely on one thing.


    As Adam watched, he managed to catch Bruno¡¯s thoughts! After having seen it numerous times, Adam could tell Bruno was thinking something more deceptive than just straight up attacking: ¡®A feint!¡¯


    Bruno made a move to attack Adam. In response, Adam moved his sword to defend but didn¡¯t fully commit to it. Just as he expected, Bruno changed the way he was attacking mid- strike! Adam quickly followed suit and easily blocked the attack!


    The spar continued on for a while before wrapping up as they normally do; neither side winning. Hansen just wanted them to get used to moving their bodies and fighting. It wasn¡¯t quite yet necessary for them to work on winning. After Adam and Bruno were done, Hansen rounded everyone up: ¡°Listen up! Tomorrow, we¡¯re going on a trip!¡±


    Everyone was surprised at this announcement. Ignoring their shocked faces, Hansen continued: ¡°Since you lot want to live off the sword, it¡¯s time you¡¯re shown what that entails! I will be taking you all to visit the Silver Saviors headquarters! We¡¯ll see if that¡¯s the life you really want. Dismissed!¡±


    Hansen quickly left before anyone could ask him any questions. They could only excitedly talk among themselves about this trip that Hansen had planned. Kadara pumped her fist as she exclaimed: ¡°Hell yes! This is exactly what I wanted!¡±


    Franklin was a little frightened by her outburst: ¡°Careful with your language! You know Madame¡¯s rules about swearing!¡±


    Kadara scoffed: ¡°What, are you going to tattle on me?¡±


    ¡°No, but you yelled really loudly! I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if half of Madame¡¯s heard you.¡±


    Kadara paled a little: ¡°Point taken.¡±


    Before moving to the baths, Adam decided to take a little breather from the spar. He rested against the brick wall that was behind the dormitory. It was at this point that Adam noticed Helen walking over to him: ¡°Hey Adam, I have a message from Julianne.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s going on? Will she not be able to make it to the lesson?¡±


    Helen nodded her head: ¡°There was a last minute shift change, so she won¡¯t be able to make it. She said to just practice on your own today.¡±


    Adam nodded his head in understanding. Then, a random thought came to Adam: ¡°Uh, not that I don¡¯t mind her absence, but I haven¡¯t seen Susan in a while. Anything happen to her?¡±


    Alfred walked over, joining the conversation: ¡°Didn¡¯t you know, Susan finally turned sixteen last week! I haven¡¯t heard anything, but she should be leaving Madame¡¯s. There are only so many spots for adults here, after all.¡±


    Alfred looked smug as he secretly thought: ¡®The she-witch has finally left!¡¯


    Helen shook her head as she glanced at the wall beside them. Or, rather, she was glancing at the building on the other side of the wall. She said: ¡°Well, she hasn¡¯t left yet.¡±


    ¡°Eh?¡± Alfred noticed where Helen was looking. ¡°Wait, don¡¯t tell me¡­¡±


    Curious at what they were looking at, Adam spread his sight past the wall. He was just close enough that he could see into one of the rooms of the building past the wall. At this distance, things started to distort. However, Adam was able to make out just enough. He could see a woman moving on top of a man, both groaning! Suddenly, the woman stopped and reached between the man¡¯s legs, denying him his sweet release. He heard Susan¡¯s chiding laugh. She then spoke in a husky voice: ¡°Don¡¯t think we¡¯re done yet, I¡¯m not through playing with you!¡±


    The man moaned in both pleasure and frustration. As he began to realize what was happening, Adam quickly snapped his Spirit Sight back to himself. As his face turned beet red, Adam stuttered out in a squeaky voice: ¡°W-w-w-what are they doing over there!?¡±


    Helen gave Adam a shocked look: ¡°Did you peep on her!?¡±


    Adam fervently shook his head: ¡°I was just trying to see what you guys were looking at!¡±


    Alfred gave Adam an incredulous look: ¡°Adam¡­ can you see inside the brothel from here!?¡±


    Adam nodded his head: ¡°Just what is that place?¡±


    Alfred started laughing, but then he noticed Adam wasn¡¯t joking. He really had no clue what a brothel was! ¡°You really don¡¯t know?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°I asked Helen once, and she smacked me for it!¡±


    Alfred couldn¡¯t help but start laughing again as Helen spoke up: ¡°I don¡¯t want to talk about that place, least of all to a boy! And Adam, you had better not peep at anyone again!¡±


    With that said, Helen quickly left with turbulent emotions. Adam could see her aura constantly shifting. The others started making their way over, as they heard the commotion. Derek started out: ¡°Is Adam peeping on someone?¡±


    Adam defensive said: ¡°No!¡±


    While Alfred spoke with humor: ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not like I meant to do it!¡±


    Looking past them, up at the part of the brothel that stuck up above the wall behind them, Derek asked: ¡°Can Adam see inside the brothel!?¡±A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    Adam timidly said: ¡°Yes.¡±


    Derek grabbed Adam by the shoulders: ¡°Dude, you gotta tell me what you¡¯re seeing!¡±


    Kadara disgustedly clucked her tongue: ¡°Boys.¡± And then stalked off away from them.


    Alfred interrupted: ¡°Wait, that¡¯s not the important part here! Susan might be staying on at the brothel! She hasn¡¯t left!¡±


    ¡°What, really!? I¡¯d heard a few girls chose that route, but Susan?¡±


    Adam piped up: ¡°Just what is a brothel? Is it a place where people have s-s-sex!?¡±


    Adam said the last bit with a squeak. Derek chuckled as he wrapped his arms around Adam¡¯s shoulders: ¡°We have a lot to talk about, my friend.¡±


    Derek told Adam all about what a brothel was. Adam was horrified: ¡°Do all the girls do this!?¡±


    Derek laughed: ¡°No, only a few do. There are quite a few greasy men willing to pay a lot of money to bed one of Madame¡¯s girls for the first time. Most of the money actually goes to the girls and not Madame¡¯s! It¡¯s a way girls can get a head start on their adult lives. It¡¯s not mandatory, so few rarely take the offer. Even fewer stay on full time at the brothel! ¡­ It¡¯s almost sounding like Susan will be a full-timer.¡±


    Speaking of Susan brought back images of what he had seen in that room. He shuddered as he tried to forget about it. Later in the day, Adam got a stern talking-to from his mother. If she ever heard a rumor of him peeping on someone like that again, he would be in big trouble! It was firmly set in his mind to never peek over that wall again: ¡®Besides, who would want to peep at Susan?¡¯


    -----------------------------------------


    The next morning, everyone met like they always would for normal morning practice. This time, once they all had gathered, Hansen said: ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡±


    Kadara quickly waved her hand to get his attention: ¡°How long will our visit be? I¡¯ll get in trouble if I just skip my work shift today!¡±


    ¡°I already cleared your shifts with Jannette.¡±


    Saying only that, Hansen turned and started to walk off. Everyone quickly followed him. Despite Hansen¡¯s apparent stern demeanor, he was fine with his trainees talking among themselves while they walked. It would be a long walk to the other side of the city to get to the Silver Saviors and even he would likely get bored on the way, let alone young kids.


    By the time they finally got there, everyone had worked up a small sweat. Even if they were physically conditioned, walking still required exertion. Add to that the sun that peaked over the city walls, shining Sunlight on their backs while being surrounded by the morning rush of people, things got a little hot. They were all thankful to have finally reached their destination.


    Before them was a small complex of buildings at the edge of the city. There were a few training yards each dedicated to different types of training such as archery and even horseback riding. Nearby was a barracks that looked big enough to house around one hundred people. In front of all this sat a two-story building that was most likely the administration building for the Silver Saviors. It wasn¡¯t much larger than a house, but it served the Silver Savior¡¯s purposes for a place where others could apply to join them or try to hire them for a job. Next to the administration building was a stable for a few horses and a couple wagons.


    As they approached the administration building, a man came out to greet them: ¡°Hello, my name is Isley. You must be Hansen and his litter of hopefuls.¡±


    With a quirked eyebrow, Hansen glanced at Adam and the others before chuckling. They were his litter of kittens that would hopefully turn into lions, someday. Adam couldn¡¯t quite catch the meaning of the wordplay, but Isley invited them forward before he could spend much time thinking about it.


    ¡°Follow me. I¡¯ll show you around and talk about how we do things around here.¡±


    As Isley showed them around, he talked about how they were looking for either skilled warriors or those willing to put forth the effort to become skilled. That included them! They had a host of jobs available from simple hunts of dangerous wildlife to bandit subjugation. Kadara was rather emphatic when it came to that latter part.


    Isley did stress on one thing: ¡°If you are looking to join a war with the Silver Saviors, forget about it! War is simply unsavory and the Silver Saviors will never take part in it!¡±


    Bruno and Clyde were rather disappointed by this. Clyde asked: ¡°But what about those Luxom bastards!? Are you going to just let them assault our borders as they please!?¡±


    Isley gave a heavy sigh: ¡°The kingdom can take care of its own borders. Besides, have you ever actually been on a battlefield and seen what goes on both during and after?¡±


    ¡°Well, no.¡±


    ¡°Then don¡¯t talk like you know it until you do. Let¡¯s put this matter aside for now and continue.¡±


    Everyone showed varying degrees of interest. However, Adam seemed to have the least interest: ¡®It¡¯s great that everyone else likes the idea of joining the Silver Saviors, but¡­ I don¡¯t really want to make a living as a mercenary. I just want the strength to protect my family. My flute can make the money¡­¡¯


    Isley wasn¡¯t sure what to make of Adam, and he didn¡¯t have a good way of asking Hansen anything. Adam was surprisingly wearing a blindfold for some odd reason. Beyond that, he didn¡¯t show much interest in the Silver Saviors. Isley merely shrugged: ¡®This life isn¡¯t for everyone.¡¯


    They had lunch in the barracks with the other Silver Saviors before getting in the training they had missed during the walk there. Left tired from the training, Adam and the others were more than ready to go home and rest. As they were getting ready to leave, Isley said: ¡°The Boss had intended to meet you all before you left, but we¡¯ve had a sudden influx of job offers he had to overlook. I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll be able to meet him the next time you come.¡±


    Kadara seemed keen on this: ¡°I¡¯d heard he was a mountain of a man, is that true?¡±


    Isley laughed: ¡°Yeah, I guess it¡¯s true.¡±


    While they were talking, Adam curiously swept his Spirit Sight into the administration building. Up at the second floor, he saw something interesting! There was a rather large and robust man sitting at a desk. What was interesting about him was that there appeared to be thin streams of Spirit Essence cycling through his body! Suddenly, the man seemed to perk up as a dangerous gleam flared from his soul! The man turned his head to him and Adam was momentarily stricken by fear, as the man seemed to be looking right at him!


    Adam quickly retracted his Spirit Sight, when a BOOM! was suddenly heard! Splintered wood fell to the ground as the large man directly jumped through the wall on the second story of the administration building! Adam scrambled backward as the large man landed right in front of him! He towered over Adam with a domineering aura. Then the man saw that Adam was merely a young boy and blinked his eyes in disbelief. ¡°Ahhh¡­¡±


    Isely stuttered out: ¡°B-B-Boss, what are you doing!?¡±


    ¡°Well, I felt something watching me with Spirit Essence. I thought it was a spy or something so my instincts kicked in, but I guess that¡¯s not it.¡±


    Adam tried giving an apology: ¡°I-I¡¯m so sorry! I didn¡¯t mean to pry!¡±


    The others were starting to recover from the shock of having the hulking man jettison himself out the side of a two-story building to land right in front of them! Derek was the first one to come to his senses. Laughing, he said: ¡°I thought you said you weren¡¯t going to peep at anyone again, Adam!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not what I was doing! I was just curious about this ¡®mountain of a man¡¯...¡±


    Adam¡¯s cheeks were tinged with embarrassment as Alfred and the rest started laughing. Even the ¡®Boss¡¯ joined with a booming laugh. Even as they laughed, Adam¡¯s curiosity got the better of him as he asked: ¡°Are you a Martial Artist? I¡¯ve never seen Spirit Essence circulate in someone like that.¡±


    ¡®Boss¡¯ nodded his head before holding out his hand to Adam: ¡°The name¡¯s Heinrich. And yes, I am a Martial Artist.¡±


    Adam reached out his own hand, that looked way too small compared to Heinrich¡¯s, and said: ¡°I¡¯m Adam.¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯d talk more but I have a mess to clean up.¡±


    Heinrich looked back at the hole he had just made in the wall of his office. He gave a simple wave to the others before heading off to finish his work and patched his wall. Isley spoke up: ¡°Well, I guess you kind of got to meet the boss after all.¡±


    Leaving the Silver Saviors, Adam was crowded by the others. Kadara seemed emphatic to know more about Heinrich: ¡°What is a Martial Artist? Is that how Boss was able to jump from a two-story building?¡±


    Kadara already considered it a given she would be joining the Silver Saviors. With how strong Heinrich appeared to be, he occupied a place of reverence in her heart. She couldn¡¯t casually refer to him as Heinrich.


    In this way, they started their walk back home.

 Chapter 16 The Hunt

    The Hunt


    Half-way through fall, Hansen made another announcement: ¡°We have another trip.¡±


    Everyone perked up. Their last trip to the Silver Saviors had been an interesting one. Having their full attention, Hansen continued: ¡°Next week, we will be joining the Silver Saviors on a three-day hunt!¡±


    Confusion and excitement spread through everyone. Adam couldn''t help but state the obvious: ¡°None of us know how to hunt, won¡¯t that be a problem?¡±


    Hansen nodded his head: ¡°You won¡¯t be hunting. You¡¯ll be helping to dress the kills. The sword can only be used for one thing; to kill! It¡¯s time you saw death up close. We¡¯ll see if you can stomach it!¡±


    That put a bit of a damper on their opinion of the hunt. Still, it was something new and Kadara was happy to do anything at all with the Silver Saviors.


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam felt Vivienne was overly fussing: ¡°Did you pack everything?¡±


    ¡°Yup.¡±


    ¡°Be careful out there. Not only are there dangerous animals, but poisonous plants too!¡±


    ¡°Yes, mom.¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t help but feel embarrassed, as he felt the stares of others on his back.


    ¡°C¡¯mon mama¡¯s boy, we¡¯re leaving!¡± Derek teased.


    ¡°I gotta go, mom!¡±


    ¡°Be careful!¡±


    Even as they were teasing him, Adam¡¯s friends felt envious. Among all the orphans at Madame¡¯s, Adam was the only one who still had one of his parents with him.


    Hansen led them through the streets to the Silver Saviors headquarters. Each of them had a small pack with a few changes of clothes. The rest of the equipment they would need for the hunt would be picked up at the Silver Saviors.


    At the Silver Saviors¡¯, Isley met them: ¡°Hey, it¡¯s been a while. Come this way, we¡¯re almost ready to leave.¡±


    One of the training yards was partially filled by Silver Saviors checking and packing their travel gear and supplies. Isley said to them: ¡°You should all grab a pack and prepare for a long hike. Once we start, we might not stop until lunch.¡±


    Isley reached down and grabbed a pack himself. Franklin asked: ¡°Are you coming with us?¡±


    Isley nodded: ¡°I¡¯ve been more or less designated as your liaison with the Silver Saviors. In short, it means it¡¯s my job to watch over you, figure out what kind of training you need, and make sure you¡¯re all Silver Savior material.¡±


    After they each grabbed a pack of travel gear and the Silver Saviors finished checking everything, they headed out from Hessler. Rather than a disciplined march, the Silver Saviors walked in a disorderly line. They didn¡¯t walk side-by-side as they would end up blocking the road if they all did that. Along their line, an occasional pole was stuck high up in the air tipped with a metal spearhead and cross guard. These spears were specially designed for boar hunting. In addition to the Silver Saviors, there were a few hunting dogs playfully bouncing around.


    As the day wore on, the pack on Adam¡¯s back seemed to get heavier and heavier and began to bite into his shoulders. It almost felt like an eternity before the Silver Saviors finally stopped for lunch. Adam threw his pack onto the ground with Alfred and the others following suit. Franklin nearly collapsed to the ground as he groaned: ¡°When are we going to get there!? I don¡¯t know that I can take much more of this.¡±


    Isley chuckled: ¡°Soon enough, but not before you¡¯re thoroughly tired, I expect. No amount of at-home-training can truly prepare you for the life of a mercenary. And if you think just hiking to the hunting ground is exhausting, just think about the hunt itself!¡±


    Franklin groaned again as Isley smiled at him. Someone waved at them from further down the line: ¡°You ain¡¯t giving them too hard of a time, are ya Isley? That grin of yours looks like an evil villain having the time of his life!¡±


    Isley laughed as he said back: ¡°Just the normal new-comer banter. This boy really plays his part well, though!¡±


    The rest of the Silver Saviors started laughing hard as Franklin became embarrassed. It didn¡¯t last long as the Silver Savior that spoke earlier walked over to him and helped him up: ¡°Come on, boy. Let¡¯s get you some grub!¡±


    As it turned out, lunch was only some dry rations with water from a canteen to wash it down. Hardly refreshing at all! After that, it was time to continue the march. At least Adam found something good from all of this. Unlike the Hill Garden, the forest surrounding the road was true wilderness. There were trees and plants and animals galore! It was something different from the constant environment of Hessler he was used to and was a welcomed change of pace. With his Spirit Sight, it was far more colorful than anything he had seen in Hessler. He also detected subtle differences in the way Spirit Essence seemed to interact. It was a vague sense of it being more wild.


    An hour after lunch, the Silver Saviors turned off the road and headed deeper into the wilderness that surrounded them. Adam was hopeful that they had finally reached their destination, but they just kept on walking and walking. It wasn¡¯t until three hours later, as the sun fell, that they settled on a clearing they came across.


    This time, Franklin really did collapse on the ground! With ragged breathing, he said: ¡°Finally, huph, we stopped.¡±


    Isley was once again grinning as he nodded his head: ¡°Yup! Now it¡¯s time to set up camp! There¡¯s no time to be lazing around!¡±


    ¡°Urgh.¡± Franklin could only groan in response. Isley happily muttered to himself: ¡°The funnest trainee I¡¯ve ever had!¡±


    He hoisted Franklin onto his feet: ¡°Come on, I¡¯ll show you the ropes!¡±


    For his own humor, Isley actually showed him the ropes they would be using to secure the tents that they were going to pitch. Derek, Bruno, and Clyde also helped with the tents. Hansen took Adam, Alfred, and Kadara out to scavenge for dry wood to help start a fire. As it turned out, Adam¡¯s Spirit Sight was perfect for this! He could easily pick out the dry dead wood out from among the living greenery. Compared to the thriving and lively Spirit Essence that made up everything else, the dry wood seemed rather dull and dim.


    The next thing to do was to actually start the fires. After preparing a pit and throwing the wood they found into it, Isley pulled out a tinderbox and showed them how to use flint. Adam found it rather interesting as he watched Isley strike the flint. Each spark showered red Fire Essence across the dry wood. Shimmering, the Fire Essence began to dance among the wood as the fire lit!Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    Adam and the others collapsed in exhaustion. Seeing this, Isley decided to make the stew by himself and let them rest. The stew was made from dry meat and a few things the Silver Saviors had found around the campsite. It didn¡¯t taste very good, but they were ravenous for the food, so they gulped it down!


    As the day finally died, Adam and the others fell into their sleeping bags. But, for a few Silver Saviors, the day wasn¡¯t done quite yet. Even though it was unlikely anything dangerous would find its way to their came, it was still prudent to set up a night watch.


    In the middle of the night, Adam awoke with a start! In the distance, he could hear wolves howling into the night! Adam immediately used his Spirit Sight to fill the void around him as he got up. Adam peeked out the tent, but none of the Silver Saviors seemed alarmed to hear the wolves as they continued to sleep soundly. Even the dogs were calm. The two Silver Saviors who were awake and on watch merely remarked at how far they thought the howls might be. Adam stepped out of his tent and walked over to them.


    Hearing him approach, one asked: ¡°Did the wolves wake you up?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°They won¡¯t attack, will they?¡±


    The two men laughed: ¡°No, not unless something has gotten them riled up. We still got a fire going, and we have quite a few people on our side. We¡¯re not an appetizing meal they could easily gobble down.¡±


    The other man spoke up: ¡°They do sound a little odd tonight, though.¡±


    ¡°Odd?¡± Adam asked.


    The man nodded: ¡°yea, but I can¡¯t put my finger on what it is.¡±


    Adam listened to the intermittent howls, but couldn¡¯t hear anything besides a wolf howl. Shaking his head, Adam yawned while saying: ¡°I think I¡¯m going to try to go back to bed.¡±


    The two men nodded: ¡°Tomorrow may just be worse for you than today was!¡±


    With that depressing thought, Adam quickly went back to his tent to get some more sleep in before the morning came.


    -----------------------------------------


    Before the sun was even up, Isley went around knocking on the sides of their tents: ¡°C¡¯mon, time to wake up! Let¡¯s get something to eat, so we can start the hunt!¡±


    Adam groggily managed to scarf down some bread and dry meat before he and the others were dragged along by the Silver Saviors. Isley spoke to them as they walked: ¡°Do any of you know anything about hunting?¡±


    Of course none of them knew, but it was a small surprise when Hansen also said: ¡°I do not.¡±


    He was walking right next to Isley and seemed so sure of himself. Adam could tell Hansen wasn¡¯t being dishonest with his Spirit Sight, but the rest doubted his words. Isley merely took it in stride and began to explain: ¡°Well, the first thing you need to do is to find your quarry! Depending on the animal, you¡¯ll want to look for tracks along the ground, game trails, feces, or any signs of nesting that might have been used by them. Today, we are hunting down some boars! Their populations have been getting a little large, and they¡¯re one of the more dangerous animals to hunt. Thus, the Silver Saviors are here instead of regular hunters!¡±


    ¡°You¡¯ll want to keep an eye out for any flattened land where boars might have rested as well as any patches of uprooted plants. Since we¡¯ve got dogs with us this time, it will be a simple matter to track the boars when we find their scent!¡±


    It didn¡¯t take long for the experienced Silver Saviors to find the first tracks. However, tracking them to the boars themselves took several hours! They were moving slowly and quietly, so as to not spook the boars and cause them to flee before they could encircle them. It was just before noon when they finally caught up with their quarry!


    It started out with the dogs running off and barking a lot. Having already gone over their plan earlier, the Silver Saviors didn¡¯t need to discuss their next step. They immediately began to spread out with the spear bearers standing at the front. Despite their exhaustion, Adam and the others perked up at this sudden development.


    Isley motioned them back saying: ¡°Remember to stay behind. If a boar somehow breaks through the line, don¡¯t close in on it. We don¡¯t want any of you becoming a victim of its charge.¡±


    As they moved behind the Silver Saviors, they slowly came to see the scene. There was a small group of four boars cornered by the barking dogs. Behind the dogs, the Silver Saviors were approaching with their spears pointed at the boars. Advancing forward, the Silver Saviors each made a skillful thrust with their spear, hitting the boars¡¯ vitals. Pinned under the cross guards of the spears, the boars quickly died.


    The methodic ease of it slightly disturbed Alfred and the others. Regardless of the fact that they weren¡¯t human, they were still lives that were reaped before them without any reluctance on the Silver Saviors¡¯ part.


    While Alfred and the others looked rather discomforted at what they witnessed, Adam actually looked horrified! As he watched with his Spirit Sight, the colors within the boars began still as an inky blackness quickly pervaded their bodies! It was the one color Adam hadn¡¯t seen since he got his Spirit Sight and it only represented one thing: death!


    That creeping blackness seemed to be calling out! It was as though it wished to corrupt the whole world and turn it into black! Adam turned his Spirit Sight off as he shuddered. Noticing his sudden paleness and trembling, Hansen asked: ¡°Are you alright?¡±


    Adam could hardly hear him. ¡®Does that happen to everyone who dies!?¡¯


    That creeping blackness was like a sickness, a plague. Just thinking of that stuff spreading through his own body- Adam turned to the side and hurled up his breakfast.


    ¡°Adam!?¡±


    Alfred and the others finally noticed something was wrong with Adam: ¡°Adam, are you okay!?¡±


    Isley mere nodded: ¡°Some become sick at the sight of killing animals. It¡¯s nothing unusual. We just need to let him calm down. Why don¡¯t you take Adam to the side while the rest of us start the process of bleeding the boars.¡±


    Alfred didn¡¯t have time to ask what Isley meant when he was shooed away with Adam. He led Adam a small distance away. ¡°Are you really okay, Adam?¡±


    Adam shook his head as he told him what he saw. Alfred was as equally disturbed by what he heard as he was from watching the boars die: ¡°That¡¯s¡­ I don¡¯t even know what to say.¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°I just want to forget about it. What are the others doing?¡±


    Alfred looked back at where the boars had died and secretly became relieved that he had been told to help Adam. The boars had been strung up by their back feet and the Silver Saviors were having Bruno, Clyde, Derek, and Kadara slit the throats of the boars. Vast amounts of blood spilled out into shallow holes dug beneath the boars. Unfortunately, Bruno and the others couldn¡¯t avoid blood spilling over their hands and instantly became as sick as Adam was earlier when it happened!


    Alfred gave a weak laugh: ¡°Well, as bad as what you saw was, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s as bad as what they are going through.¡±


    Isley walked up to them: ¡°Adam, are you good to come back over?¡±


    Adam took a deep breath; ¡°Give me a moment.¡±


    Adam slowly built his Spirit Sight back up and tentatively looked back at the boars. Thankfully, it wasn¡¯t as bad as he thought. The Death Essence that had invaded the bodies of the boars was evenly spreading throughout it and mixing with the other Spirit Essence. Instead of seeing an inky blackness invading the body, the Spirit Essence that had once been lively inside the boars had become dim and lifeless. Similar to what the dry wood, and even food, would look like.


    Adam nodded: ¡°I¡¯m good.¡±


    Isley brought them over to watch the next step. A few experienced Silver Saviors stepped forward and started gutting the boars. They separated out the more useful organs while throwing the rest into the shallow holes that had been dug before. After the waste had been placed in the holes, they were filled back over with dirt.


    Isley explained to them: ¡°Leaving blood in their bodies for an extended time can ruin the meat of the boars. We also take this time to remove any of the less useful parts of the boar to lighten our load. However, the smell of blood attracts predators. By taking care of this work as fast as we can and burying it under the ground, we reduce the chance of predators coming by to find the source of the smell.¡±


    After that was done, what was left of the boars were strung to the spears used to kill them. Two Silver Saviors then lifted the spear on either end before they began carrying them back to camp.


    By the time they were finally back, the day was well into the afternoon. Adam and the others were even more tired than the day before and desperately wished to wash themselves. Not only were they sweaty, a few of them were covered in blood! Isley told them: ¡°There is a small stream nearby that we grabbed water from for the stew last night. We¡¯ll be heading over there in rounds to clean up. Then, you can rest. Tomorrow, you¡¯ll have to rise bright and early to help us tear down camp before we head back!¡±

 Chapter 17 Ghul

    Ghul


    Adam once again awoke in the middle of the night. This time, Adam could tell there was something wrong! The wolves were howling again, but they weren¡¯t calling out. They were whining in pain! Behind it, vicious barks could be heard in the night! Hansen was already up and rasping on their tents: ¡°Up you lot!¡±


    Many ¡®What¡¯s going on?¡¯ questions came from Alfred and the others as they were startled awake. Hansen merely responded: ¡°Don¡¯t know, just get ready!¡±


    The camp was already abuzz with activity as the Silver Saviors roused from their slumber. Quickly, they took up their weapons and made themselves ready for a fight! Isley came by: ¡°Start packing up! We¡¯re leaving as soon as we can!¡±


    Hansen questioned: ¡°We¡¯re leaving in the dark?¡±


    Isley shook his head: ¡°It¡¯s too dangerous when we don¡¯t know what¡¯s got the wolves like this. We¡¯ll be leaving as soon as the morning starts to lighten up the sky.¡±


    Adam scrambled with the others to pack up the tents and other supplies. Since many of the Silver Saviors were forming a protective perimeter around camp, they had to pack up their gear as well. Not long after they started, the cries and barks of the wolves died down. But, the Silver Saviors didn¡¯t relax their vigilance nor did they tell Adam and the others to stop.


    It took a couple hours on their own, but they had finally packed everything up. All that was left was to sit and wait for enough light to safely hike through the forest. While they sat, they talked among themselves: ¡°We haven¡¯t heard anything from the wolves, recently. Shouldn¡¯t everything be alright now? I just want to go back to bed.¡±


    Isley overheard them and said: ¡°Why do you think the wolves have been quiet?¡±


    They turned to Isley with a questioning look: ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°The wolves have been quiet yes, but why? It could be that they are all dead!¡±


    They froze when they heard that. Isley continued: ¡°If that is the case, we have to continue watching out for whatever got them. If the wolves won, on the other hand, they might go out on the prowl to remove any intruders from their territory, and we¡¯re definitely in their territory.¡±


    Another three hours passed before the sky finally began to gain some light. After talking with the others, Isley came over: ¡°It¡¯s time to go. As we walk, try to be silent and don¡¯t talk. We¡¯re going to be making a slight detour to head over to where we heard the wolves.¡±


    ¡°Why!?¡± Franklin was the first to get his frightened question out.


    ¡°Because we don¡¯t know what happened. If we know what caused that ruckus, we can prepare for it! If it sneaks up on us, we won¡¯t be surprised by whatever it is. The road is still roughly in the same direction, so the danger won¡¯t really escalate by much. In fact, it would be safer since we would know what else is out here with us.¡±


    Without having any room to debate it, they silently followed the Silver Saviors into the forest. An hour later, the sun had started to light up more of the sky, and they could fully see the ground at their feet. With this much light, it was much easier to pick out wolf tracks and follow them to their source.


    They all became tense when they finally found the Wolves¡¯ den. Littering the area, were their broken forms! Many bones in each of the wolves were broken to pieces and blood pooled around their bodies from open fractures that pierced through their skin. The sight was ghastly and Derek couldn¡¯t help but ask aloud: ¡°What could have done this!?¡±


    The crumpled forms of the wolves were downright disturbing in a way that was far worse than when the Silver Saviors killed the boars. There was something that just felt unnatural about it. A few of the Silver Saviors quickly scouted the area while the rest kept a wary eye out.


    Adam cast his Spirit Sight about the area with a disturbed look. The Death Essence claiming the wolve¡¯s bodies could no longer be clearly seen. It had already mixed with the other Spirit Essence in their bodies, turning them dim. Looking at all these dead forms, Adam¡¯s skin began to crawl. It was as though tendrils of death caressed his skin looking for a way in! It was wholly disturbing.


    Having found all the evidence they needed, the scouts whispered their findings: ¡°There are large bear tracks all over, so it was definitely a bear that did this!¡±


    ¡°No normal bear could do that to a wolf!¡±


    The scout nodded: ¡°We fear¡­ it is a Ghul!¡±


    Everyone paled when they heard this! Adam recalled what he had learned of Ghuls at SIH. Ghuls were creatures that came to have a large amount of Spirit Essence somehow inhabit their body. This Spirit Essence would rage within them, causing them to go insane and kill others. Their very blood was transformed by the Spirit Essence causing anyone that had the blood entered in them to become a Ghul as well. There were three ways to kill a Ghul; cut off its head, pierce its heart, or if all else fails you bleed it out. Ghuls are a plague that, if left unchecked, would spread and corrupt not just living creatures but the land itself! However, if the bear was a Ghul¡­The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation.


    Someone asked: ¡°If it was a Ghul, why haven¡¯t these wolves turned too?¡±


    The scout pointed at the wolves: ¡°Just look at them! They¡¯re practically mushed to a paste! So many vital bones broken and leaking blood everywhere, there¡¯s nothing left behind to turn into a Ghul!¡±


    Hansen added his thoughts in: ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. It¡¯s some kind of large bear we don¡¯t want to cross. Now that we know, let¡¯s get the hell out of here!¡±


    Everyone agreed. Just as they turned to leave, Adam noticed something amid all the dead wolves! Just inside the burrow that the wolves were using as a den, there was a wolf on the ground. Underneath the wolf, there was a glimmer of life! A lone shivering pup that had somehow survived what killed the rest of its pack. Maybe the dead wolf on top of it¡­ protected it from being seen by the Ghul!


    That pup¡¯s family had been ripped from it by a Ghul. Adam immediately felt a sense of kinship with it and there was no way he was just going to leave the poor thing to die on its own. Running over to the burrow, Adam told the others: ¡°Wait!¡±


    Adam taking off like that gave everyone a surprise. Hansen recovered from it and quickly caught up with Adam: ¡°What are you doing!? We need to leave.¡±


    Adam gently rolled the dead wolf off the pup. The pup looked positively scared as it yipped at Adam while scampering backward. Adam quickly caught the pup and held him to his chest. The pup promptly bit down on his hand, to which Adam grimaced. While it hurt, it wasn¡¯t terrible. Turning, Adam said: ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go.¡±


    The Silver Saviors didn¡¯t waste any more time as they headed out. They kept a careful watch out for what they suspected was a Ghul Bear. Staying on constant alert like this was far more exhausting than a normal hike. It also took longer, as they moved slowly.


    The pup in Adam¡¯s arms grew tired from trying to bite his hand and merely shivered in his hold. Adam felt sorry for it, but there was no time to make its situation better. Whether food or even a blanket, they would have to be unpacked and it was far too dangerous to stop and do that.


    Suddenly, someone at the front threw up a hand signal. Immediately, almost everyone stopped. Adam and the others were a step behind since they hadn¡¯t been taught anything about hand signals yet. After a moment of silence, Franklin asked: ¡°Why¡¯d we-¡±


    ¡°Shush!¡± Hansen glowered at him!


    Franklin immediately stopped talking. After another moment, everyone could hear a heavy crack! Off in the distance. Another hand signal was thrown up and the Silver Saviors moved into a defensive circle. Isley whispered to them: ¡°Stay in the center and don¡¯t interfere!¡±


    Trepidation grew among everyone as they all thought the same thing: ¡®Was that the Ghul!? Is it coming towards us?¡¯


    It didn¡¯t take long to get the answer to that question. A giant looming form in the shape of a bear could be seen walking through the trees! It was just inside the range of Adam¡¯s Spirit Sight and what he saw gave him a small fright! The bear was filled to the brim with madly swirling Earth Essence! It was as though a raging tempest was blowing inside the bear! Just looking at it gave a sense of oppressing might!


    Everyone tensed, but they all kept still and quiet. The bear was moving parallel to their group and had yet to notice them. They didn¡¯t want to do anything that would make the bear notice them. Then a small breeze blew past the Silver Saviors in the direction of the bear. Those smart enough to know the consequence of this mentally cursed: ¡®Shit!¡¯


    The bear lifted its large head and sniffed the air. Then it turned its head to find a group of men not too far off! It gave off a low hissing huff before running at them at a speed you would think was impossible for something its size! The Silver Saviors quickly formed a defensive formation with their spears leveled at the bear. At the same time, Isley shouted: ¡°C¡¯mon, we need to run while they hold the Ghul off!¡±


    Adam and the others looked shocked. Alfred quickly asked: ¡°We¡¯re just going to leave everyone?¡±


    Hansen barked: ¡°Do you think you can do anything here? All you¡¯ve got is that skinning knife. Move!¡±


    Under Hansen¡¯s aggressive orders, they started running away while still heading towards the road. As they ran, low hanging branches began to scratch their faces and brush snagged their clothes.


    Adam did his best to protect the pup who seemed to have given up on life. First, that monstrous Ghul killed its pack. Its own mother lied dead on top of it to protect it! Then, it was abducted by a strange creature it had never seen before! The Ghul then once again appeared and then the strange creature carrying started running away! It was now being jolted left and right as the creature ran while the world was racing by almost faster than it could see. It was all too much for it to handle so it gave up everything. Whether figuring out a way to escape the creature or even just trying to comprehend what was going on, it was done.


    When they finally made it to the road, they were all out of breath and looked a sorry sight. They started to catch their breath while looking back. Franklin asked: ¡°Do you think they¡¯re okay?¡±


    ¡°They¡¯ll be fine.¡± Isley answered. ¡°They only needed to hold it back so we could escape before retreating themselves. We¡¯re ill-equipped to take out a Ghul, especially a bear so they won¡¯t even try.¡±


    While they were talking, Adam gave the pup in his arms a worried look. It seemed to have lost all its spirit. He tried petting it, but it didn¡¯t even seem to register.


    Isley walked over: ¡°So you retrieved that pup from the den? Can I take a look at it?¡±


    Isley briefly inspected the pup before handing it back to Adam. ¡°Well, it¡¯s a boy. He doesn¡¯t seem to be infected by Ghul blood. However, I don¡¯t know how long he¡¯ll survive like that. I think he received too much stress from what happened.¡±


    Hansen piped in: ¡°Should we continue moving?¡±


    Isley nodded: ¡°We¡¯ve rested enough. We¡¯d better get back to the city and tell the guard what¡¯s up. The others will meet up with us there too.¡±


    Together, they took off down the road for Hessler. It wasn¡¯t until late in the afternoon that they finally reached the gates. Isley decided to part with them here: ¡°I¡¯ll talk to the guards about the Ghul. Why don¡¯t you just go home and rest. You can worry about dropping off your packs with us later.¡±


    Everyone relaxed at the thought of returning home. Isley then directed to Adam: ¡°That pup needs to eat something within the next day, or it will die. Try some milk. If it won¡¯t have anything, bring it over to the Silver Saviors. Our dog handlers might be able to help, but¡­¡±


    Adam merely nodded in response as he petted the unresponsive pup. He really didn¡¯t want it to die. Adam started on his way to Madame¡¯s: ¡°Let¡¯s get home quick!¡±

 Chapter 18 Silber

    Silber


    Following behind Adam, Alfred said: ¡°It might be best to just take the pup to the Silver Saviors. Madame¡¯s doesn¡¯t allow pets.¡±


    Adam¡¯s steps faltered. He nodded: ¡°Okay.¡±


    The Silver Saviors were closer anyway, so it would still work out. Adjusting his course, Adam headed toward the Silver Saviors. Hansen decided to follow Adam while the rest were too tired to do anything other than go home.


    As they entered the Silver Saviors¡¯ compound, many gave Adam and Hansen a curious look. A few recalled Adam and Hansen, but most had yet to meet them. Ignoring them all, Adam made for the dog kennels near the stables. Adam walked up behind a woman that was tending to a dog nearby: ¡°Isley said you might be able to help me with this pup.¡±


    The woman was startled by Adam¡¯s sudden appearance behind her; ¡°What!? Isley sent you? Ah, you must be one of the potentials that went hunting. I hadn¡¯t heard the hunting party had come back. Is this a wolf pup you picked up in the forest? You know it¡¯s not good to take wild animals from their homes.¡±


    The woman cast a worried glance at the lifeless pup in Adam¡¯s arms. ¡°Well, let¡¯s see what we can do.¡±


    The woman took the pup and tried enticing it to eat chicken bits, toys, or, at least, drink some milk. But, the pup just laid there as though it were dead. She didn¡¯t try to force feed it since she felt it would only make things worse. After a good half-hour of trying, she could only give up; ¡°Physically, the pup is fine. He just¡­ doesn¡¯t want to do anything. He became too stressed when you brought him from his home. This place is hardly relaxing, either.¡±


    The Silver Savior compound was full of activity; people trained and shouted at one another over the din. The woman continued; ¡°I suggest you take him home and¡­ hope that he gets into an eating mood.¡±


    Before he left, the woman gave Adam a flask of milk: ¡°Just in case he changes his mind about eating before you get home.¡±


    Thanking her, Adam left with a heavy heart. Hansen quietly followed, unable to add anything useful. Adam spoke: ¡°I think I¡¯m going to head to the Hill Garden first. I think that place is more relaxing than Madame¡¯s¡­¡±


    Hansen nodded: ¡°I¡¯ll tell your mother where you¡¯re at.¡±


    ¡°Thanks.¡±


    Adam had forgotten about his mom. She was probably waiting at home, anxious for him to return. Still, the pup came first. To his surprise, Adam found Helen already at their secluded spot.


    ¡°Hey, Helen.¡±


    ¡°Adam, you¡¯re back! Ugh, you stink!¡±


    Adam shrugged: ¡°I just got back, so I haven¡¯t bathed yet.¡±


    ¡°Is that a puppy!?¡±


    Adam nodded and told her what had happened. She became wide-eyed when he mentioned the Ghul. She looked at the almost-lifeless puppy with moist eyes. ¡°Can I hold him?¡±


    Adam nodded as he carefully passed her the pup. He also passed her the milk flask that the woman from earlier had given him. ¡°If he seems like he¡¯ll eat, have him drink that.¡±


    Helen nodded as she gently petted the poor pup. With a weary sigh, Adam heaved his pack to the ground and sat down. As he laid himself out, a nap called to him. Helen was watching the pup, and there wasn¡¯t much else he could do to help. Something felt a little out of place though; ¡®Ah! No music.¡¯


    Adam almost always played a song while he was in this secluded spot, so it felt weird not to. Adam pulled his flute from his pack. He hadn¡¯t been able to really play at all the past couple days since he was so tired.


    As he played his flute, he was glad he spent the effort to. Everything felt more peaceful with a song hanging in the air. Adam didn¡¯t notice it, but even the pup stirred with the song! It languidly wagged its tail to the song. Seeing the pup becoming lively, Helen quickly pulled the top off the flask. She didn¡¯t have anything to pour the milk into, so she dipped her finger in the flask and then brought it to the pup¡¯s mouth. At first, the pup did nothing. But then, it timidly licked her finger. Finger by finger, Helen fed the pup as much as he would take.


    When Helen turned to tell Adam the exciting news, she found him gently snoring. He had lulled himself asleep with his own music. Looking at his sleeping form, she couldn¡¯t help but smile.


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam yawned groggily. His nap hadn¡¯t been long enough, but the day was getting late, and it was time for them to head back to Madame¡¯s. Adam looked at the sleeping pup in Helen¡¯s arms. Its aura was no longer as dim as it had been earlier. It seemed they might pull the pup away from the brink of death.


    ¡°Earlier, Alfred said Madame¡¯s doesn¡¯t allow us to keep pets. Is that true?¡±You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version.


    Helen nodded sadly while staring at the pup: ¡°Such a shame. I wanted to keep the little guy as well.¡±


    Adam gently sighed. This was becoming more troublesome by the minute. But, he did not regret saving the pup. He only wished that taking care of it was easier than it was proving so far.


    Before long, they found themselves back at Madame¡¯s. Adam gently took the pup from Helen¡¯s arms; ¡°I¡¯m going to find Mom and talk to her about this. She might have an idea.¡±


    Helen gave the pup a couple pets before reluctantly letting go: ¡°Okay, tell me how it goes.¡±


    Using his Spirit Sight, Adam quickly searched for his mother. He found that she was actually talking with Madame Janette in her office. He apprehensively approached the office and knocked on the door: ¡°Mom, it¡¯s me.¡±


    Vivienne quickly opened the door. ¡°Adam, what took you so long to return!?¡±


    ¡°I fell asleep while trying to help this little guy.¡±


    Vivienne hugged Adam, while being careful to not squish the pup; ¡°Hansen told us what happened. Are you okay?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°I¡¯d heard we can¡¯t keep pets here, but this little guy needs a lot of help if he¡¯s to survive. My music seemed to help him a bit, so¡­¡±


    Adam wasn¡¯t sure what he meant. Janette looked at the sleeping pup and groaned: ¡°I can¡¯t play favorites, but I also can¡¯t abide just throwing the pup into the streets. You can care for him, but you must look for a place outside of Madame¡¯s where he can stay! Perhaps even someplace that can care for him instead of you. He can only stay until he is healthy, and then he is out of here!¡±


    Adam flashed a grin. ¡°Thanks, Madame Janette!¡±


    ¡°Yeah, yeah, just make sure he doesn¡¯t pee on anything expensive, or you¡¯re paying for it!¡±


    Taking her words seriously, Adam vigorously nodded his head. Vivienne could only shake her head at her friend¡¯s poor joke.


    -----------------------------------------


    The next day, news of the Ghul Bear had spread in the city. Word was that the Silver Saviors encountered it while on a hunting expedition. Using their boar spears, the Silver Saviors gouged out the Ghul¡¯s eyes before making a run for it. Unfortunately, they had lost a member during the fight.


    Adam spoke with the others over lunch: ¡°Who¡­ who do you think it was that died?¡±


    None of them could truly imagine that one of the people they had camped with the day before had died while they had fled. It came as a shock and a message that death often came without warning. However, it only reaffirmed their desire to learn how to wield the sword. They didn¡¯t want to be easy prey for anything that might come their way.


    Deciding to distract themselves from that topic, they turned to the pup Adam had placed on the table.


    ¡°I can¡¯t believe you were allowed to keep the little guy.¡±


    ¡°Only until he¡¯s better, or I can find someone to take care of him.¡± Adam responded.


    ¡°Still¡­ Have you named him yet?¡±


    Adam shook his head. Helen quickly piped up: ¡°Let¡¯s name him Buttons!¡±


    Everyone around the table gave Helen an incredulous look. Helen wilted at their gaze and blushed crimson. ¡°What? You don¡¯t like it?¡±


    The boys shook their heads; ¡°He¡¯s a boy and a wolf at that! His name has to be strong and empowering! Like¡­ Frankfurt!¡±


    ¡°No, Hunter!¡±


    ¡°I vote for Leviathan!¡±


    Kadara pounded the table as she said: ¡°War Mongrel!¡±


    Everybody stared at her, much as they had done with Helen. However, Kadara didn¡¯t shrink from their gaze as she shrugged and said: ¡°I thought we were just saying the craziest names we could think of.¡±


    Laughter permeated the table. Adam petted the as-of yet-to-be-named pup beside him. The pup wasn¡¯t faring much better than he had the day before. Although he weakly ate now, he didn¡¯t react to anything besides food. Even when Kadara pounded the table, and they all laughed, he didn¡¯t react. His aura remained dormant.


    Adam thought: ¡®What would be a good name for you? What¡¯s a good name for a wolf?¡¯


    Wolves hunted and roamed in packs. They typically had a white and grey coloration. They also liked howling. These were pretty much everything Adam knew about wolves. Adam passed a few names through his mind before one popped out, the old-tongue word for silver. Adam spoke it aloud to the pup; ¡°Silber.¡±


    The two words differed only slightly, but Silber rolled off the tongue. As he said it, Adam noticed the pup¡¯s aura stir. It¡¯s eyes even turned to him! Adam gently smiled as he continued petting the pup; ¡°His name is Silber.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    There was a flute lesson planned for Adam later in the day. Adam didn¡¯t have any choice but to bring Silber with him as everyone else had a shift. When Adam walked into the room with Silber in his arms, Julianne swooned over the poor pup; ¡°Would you look at the little cutie! Such a shame what happened to his family. I¡¯m glad Janette let you keep him for a while.¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°Still, I can¡¯t keep him forever. Once he gets better, I have to find a place for him.¡±


    Julienne continued to pet Silber while contemplating. She then said: ¡°Maybe he can stay with me.¡±


    ¡°With you!?¡±


    Julienne nodded: ¡°Me and my husband live in a house not too far from here. It¡¯s almost perfect!¡±


    ¡°Would you really do that!?¡±


    Julienne nodded: ¡°I¡¯ll have to talk to Todd, first. I¡¯m sure he¡¯ll be fine with it though. But... I don¡¯t know whether Janette will let me take him back here for small visits. You might not be able to see him too much.¡±


    After Julianne finished cooing over Silber, they placed him in a comfortable spot before launching straight into the lesson. As they played, Silber¡¯s tail slowly wagged. Silber cast his eyes upon Adam, the strange creature that had plucked him from his home and spirited him away from the terrifying Ghul. Perhaps¡­ he could trust this strange creature to keep him safe. He liked the music and the petting. Maybe things would be alright...

 Chapter 19 Rival

    Rival


    Over the next few days, Adam continued to care for Silber. He only ate when either Adam or Helen fed him, so Julianne was unable to take him home. Adam was happy that he could continue spending time with Silber, though he wished it was under better circumstances. A hidden benefit of taking care of Silber was that he gained a chance to train his Spirit Sight by concentrating on Silber¡¯s Aura. He could now glimpse a person¡¯s mood or thoughts from their aura¡¯s fluctuations and color.


    Finishing his shift at Madame¡¯s Tavern, Adam met Helen in the dorm cafeteria for lunch. She had Silber and was coaxing him to eat small chunks of chicken.


    Sitting down, Adam asked: ¡°How was Silber this morning?¡±


    ¡°Fine. But, he¡¯s still not eating enough.¡±


    When Silber heard Adam¡¯s voice, his head perked up a bit. He looked at Adam and wagged his tail. He then ate a couple more chicken pieces, before settling back down.


    Adam petted Silber: ¡°There¡¯s a good boy. You¡¯ve gotta make sure you eat enough to stay healthy.¡±


    Helen shook her head and said with a smile: ¡°He always seems to have a larger appetite when you¡¯re around.¡±


    Adam bashfully shrugged: ¡°At least he eats with you. Besides us, he won¡¯t eat with anyone else.¡±


    After eating some food, Adam played a quiet song on his flute. As he played, Adam payed attention to Silber¡¯s Aura. A pleased feeling rippled as Silber listened to the music. Adam wasn¡¯t sure about the effects of these ripples, but he continued playing songs in hope that the young wolf would get better.


    While he was looking at Silber¡¯s Aura, he couldn¡¯t help seing Helen¡¯s own. Her Aura had been a source of worry for Adam. Her Aura had a pink hue and pulsed with small but rapid ripples. He had observed the same phenomena in the Aura of couples walking through the Hill Garden! Clearly, Helen had some deep feelings, and it always seemed to show up when both he and Silber were around her. It begged the question: ¡®Is she just enamored with Silber? Or does she¡­ like me?¡¯


    It was one thing if Helen¡¯s deep feelings were for Silber. But, if they were for Adam? That was where the trouble would lie. Adam liked Helen, sure, but did he like like her? He wasn¡¯t sure how to answer that question, and the more he thought about it, the less certain he was.


    After Adam finished the song, Helen reluctantly stood up: ¡°My shift starts soon.¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°I¡¯ll see you later then.¡±


    Adam petted Silber as the two of them watched Helen walk away. When she was too far away to hear, Adam whispered to the pup: ¡°So, who is it that she likes? You or me?¡±


    Silber just stared at Adam. Adam sighed: ¡°You¡¯re no help.¡±


    Just as Helen was leaving the cafeteria, Alfred walked in. He cheerfully said, ¡°Hi, Helen!¡±


    Helen smiled back: ¡°Hi, Alfred.¡±


    This was the source of Adam¡¯s worry. Alfred¡¯s aura glowed with that same pink hue as he talked to Helen. No matter Adam¡¯s feelings about Helen, it was clear as day that Alfred like liked Helen! Upon realizing that Alfred liked Helen, Adam had remembered something. Long ago, Alfred had mentioned that the parents of the girl he liked were killed by kidnappers he had been unable to stop. It fit perfectly with what happened to Helen! Adam couldn¡¯t believe he hadn¡¯t put the two together before.


    After Helen continued on her way, Alfred came and sat down beside Adam. ¡°Hey, Adam.¡±


    ¡°H-hi Alfred.¡± Adam said stiffly.


    Adam pleadingly looked at Silber. He was trying to ask with his eyes: ¡°Do I talk to Alfred about this, or not?¡±


    Silber stared back, giving no response. You¡¯re really no help, Adam thought.


    ¡°What¡¯s got you so stiff, Adam? You¡¯ve been acting kinda weird lately.¡±


    Adam nervously scratched his head before deciding to spill what he¡¯d been hiding. ¡°Well¡­ I can divine more about others¡¯ emotions lately. And Helen¡­ might be, slightly, kind-of enamored by me or Silber.¡±


    Alfred was confused and a little alarmed. ¡°...What?¡±


    Adam described what he¡¯d been seeing in Helen¡¯s Aura, and how he was unsure of who it was for, and how he¡¯d also seen that Alfred liked Helen. Alfred stiffened as Adam quickly described all of this.


    Alfred carefully chose his words. ¡°Yes, Helen is the girl I like, but what about you? You said she might like you. Do you like her?¡±The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation.


    ¡°I¡­ don¡¯t know.¡±


    ¡°Either you do, or you don¡¯t. Which is it!?¡± Alfred demanded.


    Alfred¡¯s sudden intensity surprised Adam. Perhaps I really shouldn¡¯t have talked to him, he thought.


    He also gave some more thought to whether or not he liked Helen. She was a likable girl. She¡¯d also been kind to him, and they spent a fair amount of time together. Another big plus: she wasn¡¯t crazy like Susan. He remembered her soft hand when she guided him to and from the Hill Garden before he gained his Spirit Sight. That had been¡­ pleasant.


    As Adam was deep in thought, his facial expressions betrayed what he was thinking. Sighing, Alfred said: ¡°So you do like her.¡±


    ¡°I¡­ guess I do.¡±


    ¡°Then that makes you my love rival!¡±


    ¡°What do you mean!?¡±


    Alfred shrugged: ¡°I overheard two guys fighting over a girl say that. But, it sounds right. Both of us like Helen, and we will be fighting for her affection!¡±


    ¡°Okay so¡­ what do we do?¡± Adam asked.


    ¡°I have no idea.¡± Alfred responded.


    -----------------------------------------


    In the end, Adam and Alfred decided they would literally fight for Helen¡¯s affection! Setting a date, Adam and Alfred invited Helen to the Hill Garden. They didn¡¯t tell her what it was for, but they were going to have her witness their duel!


    Adam and Alfred arrived before Helen. Looking around, Alfred turned a little sour: ¡°You¡¯ve been hanging out with Helen here? I really should have been paying more attention to where you were going with her. No matter what, I won¡¯t lose to you Adam!¡±


    Adam was surprised by Alfred¡¯s intensity. It was so easy for him to switch from friendliness to hostility when it came to Helen. Adam wasn¡¯t sure how to respond, but he felt he could only tell the truth: ¡°I won¡¯t lose either!¡±


    Alfred smirked as he held out his hand: ¡°May the best man win.¡±


    Adam nodded as he shook Alfred¡¯s hand. The two then waited in silence for Helen. She arrived a few minutes later, holding Silber in her arms. ¡°Hey you two, what¡¯s up?¡±


    Alfred spoke first: ¡°Watch our duel, first. We¡¯ll explain everything afterwards.¡±


    ¡°Duel!?¡±


    Adam added: ¡°Trust us, Helen. We aren¡¯t fighting to the death or anything. Just watch.¡±


    Before Helen could say anything, Adam and Alfred pulled wooden swords from their belts. They touched their swords together and stepped back, each posed for sudden action. A strange tension hung in the air compared to their normal spars. This time, Hansen wasn¡¯t watching over them, and neither of them were likely to pull their hits.


    Adam kept an eye on Alfred¡¯s Aura, but put most of his attention on Alfred¡¯s body movements. They had spared enough to learn each other''s habits, more useful than anything Alfred¡¯s Aura could tell Adam.


    Alfred moved first, as he lunged at Adam. Using his sword, Adam deflected Alfred¡¯s sword to the side while stepping into his range. Adam pulled his sword away from Alfred¡¯s and slashed at his exposed side. Alfred side-stepped, dodging the strike!


    Over and over they moved, their swords clanking together, each trying to out-maneuver the other. As grand as it sounded, their movements were rather rough and sloppy. Even though Adam and Alfred had been practicing the sword for a few months, they were still newbies with no real combat experience. As the duel wore on, they both became tired and sweat dripped down their face and backs.


    Adam and Alfred clashed their blades together. Just as Adam threw his weight into his swing, sweat fell into Alfred¡¯s eyes! With his vision suddenly blurring, Alfred quickly retreated! Adam stumbled because the expected clash didn¡¯t occur. Alfred saw Adam¡¯s vague form stumbling and lashed out with his sword! There was a small thwack, followed by Adam crying out, ¡°Ow!¡±


    Alfred rubbed the sweat out of his eyes, revealing a glaring Adam holding his side. ¡°You got me.¡±


    Before Alfred could celebrate, Helen ran over. ¡°Are you okay, Adam?¡±


    Adam nodded. ¡°Nothing¡¯s broken. I imagine I¡¯ll be getting a big bruise though.¡±


    Helen¡¯s concern transformed into anger. ¡°Good, now would the two of you tell me what the heck is going on!?¡±


    ¡°Alfred, you won. Shouldn¡¯t you start out?¡±


    Helen glared at Alfred, waiting for him to explain. Alfred wilted under the gaze, but he staunchly declared, ¡°Helen, I love you.¡±


    Helen looked bewildered, ¡°What?¡±


    Adam stammered, ¡°I-I also like you!¡±


    Helen didn¡¯t know how to respond to their confessions. She tried to form words, but nothing came out. In her silence, Adam and Alfred quickly explained the reason of the duel, ¡°Adam saw that you might like him in your Aura.¡±


    Adam added, ¡°I talked to Alfred, and we decided to duel for who would confess to you first!¡±


    Alfred nodded. ¡°I¡¯ve¡­ liked you for a long time. I couldn¡¯t just let this slide! So¡­ which of us do you like?¡±


    As she finally realized what they were saying, Helen¡¯s countenance grimmed. In a condescending tone, she said, ¡°So let me get this straight: the two of you thought I liked Adam, so you fought over who would confess to me first. Now that you¡¯ve done that, you expect me to accept one of you?¡±


    Adam and Alfred were frightened by Helen¡¯s tone. This was not going the way they expected at all.


    ¡°Uh, well-¡±


    ¡°I¡¯d rather choose Silber over either of you!¡± Helen exclaimed! She turned to Alfred. ¡°Idiot!¡± And then to Adam. ¡°Peeper!¡±


    Helen stormed out! As she did so, Silber perked up from her arms and gave her face one lick before settling back down. Helen stopped for a moment, surprised by this action. She then gave an affectionate smile and planted a kiss on top of his head: ¡°You¡¯re way better than those two!¡±

 Chapter 20 The Next Step

    The Next Step


    Music rang out in Adam¡¯s room, while he played his flute for Silber. He had holed up in his room in an attempt to avoid Helen after the embarrassing confession and subsequent rejection. As he progressed through the song, Adam paid attention to how each tone affected Silber. He was hoping to compose a song that Silber liked so much, he would do more than just wag his tail or lift his head!


    Silber seemed to respond more favorably to long tones, compared to short notes. As he continued experimenting, Adam thought back to the night he had spent out in the forest. The first night, the wolves had called out to one another with howls. In many ways, the howls resembled long tones. With sudden inspiration, Adam decided to emulate wolf howls as best as he could.


    When these ¡®howling¡¯ tones emanated from Adam¡¯s flute, Silber perked his head up. After a moment, he leaned his head back and gave a little howl in response! Adam stopped playing and looked at Silber with surprise. Silber just looked back, innocently wagging his tail. Adam couldn¡¯t help smiling as he once again began playing those howling tones, to which Silber joined in.


    As the two continued their little duet, Adam had a sudden revelation! For months, his Spiritualist studies had been at a standstill. He had tried every method he could think of to make the Spirit Formations Cathryn showed him work, none of which was met with success. Since the Formations weren¡¯t working for him, why use them? He would instead formulate a song that Spirit Essence would react to! He wouldn¡¯t command Spirit Essence with Spirit Formations, he would make it dance to his tune!


    -----------------------------------------


    Despite his revelation, Adam¡¯s hardly progressed on his Path. Even after two months, Adam hadn¡¯t been able to make a proper Formation. But, he knew he was headed in the right direction. If he played his songs in just the right way, Spirit Essence began to dance along! Unfortunately, this only transformed the song to suddenly become more alive to the listeners. He had yet to achieve anything more than that.


    In these last two months, Silber had grown quite a bit. Not only had he grown, but he had broken free of the depression that had held him since the night the Ghul killed his pack. When the military had tracked the Ghul down and killed it, Adam told the joyous news to Silber. The little wolf didn¡¯t seem to understand what he said, though.


    No longer depressed, Silber had become a very active puppy. Madame¡¯s was not a proper place to raise such a pup so Adam had to give him to Julienne. Luckily, Madame Janette was fine if Silber visited for a few hours, but he had to stay in the area behind the dorm. She didn¡¯t want Silber getting loose and disturbing any of Madame¡¯s patrons.


    While Adam was in the middle of playing a tug of war game with Silber, Helen came skipping along: ¡°Silber!¡±


    Silber immediately let go of the piece of rope they were playing with and trotted over to Helen with a bark. She picked him up to be greeted by tons of dog kisses.


    Adam sigh at this. Despite all he had done for the pup, Silber seemed to have taken more of a liking to Helen after the duel he had with Alfred. Despite the melancholy thought, Adam smiled. To see Helen¡¯s Aura radiate with joy while she was with Silber was worth it.


    It had taken Helen a while to finally forgive Adam and Alfred for pulling that duel stunt. Even now, Adam wasn¡¯t sure what he exactly needed to be ¡®forgiven¡¯ for, but he took it. Helen would hardly talk to them and Adam was willing to admit any fault so things could go back to normal between them.


    After Silber calmed down, Helen asked Adam: ¡°Are you excited for tomorrow? Kadara wouldn''t stop squealing to me about finally getting a real sword.¡±Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    Adam chuckled: ¡°I¡¯d forgotten until you mentioned it.¡±


    Hansen had finally thought it was time for them to move up from wooden swords to metal swords. This was the next step that would move them closer to their goals. Just thinking about it, Adam couldn¡¯t help excitement from bubbling in the pit of his stomach.


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam met up with everyone the next morning. Just as Helen said, Kadara was squealing: ¡°Eee, today¡¯s the day! Can you believe it!?¡±


    Franklin clutched his ears in pain: ¡°I don¡¯t think you need a sword to kill people, Kadara.¡±


    ¡°Oh Shut up.¡±


    They met up with Hansen at their usual spot. Hansen stood waiting for them with several small sheets of cloth on the ground. On top of each was a sword! When everyone stood before him, Hansen spoke: ¡°The swords have been prepared. I will teach you how to not cut yourself with your own sword and how to maintain it. Adam, this sword is yours.¡±


    Everyone looked at the sword Hansen gestured towards. All the other swords were plain, but this one was different. The crossguard had been molded to look like an eagle spreading its wings! Even the materials making the sheath and hilt seemed a step above the other swords.


    Derek yelled out what the rest were thinking: ¡°Why does Adam get the cool sword!?¡±


    Hansen gave Derek a dark glare as his response. Derek paled under the glare and didn¡¯t say anything more.


    Adam hadn¡¯t actually paid attention to what Derek said. His attention was on the sword. It was hard to tell with his Spirit Sight, but it looked rather familiar. Memories of a sword hung by the entrance to his house surfaced in his mind.


    Reaching out a hand to touch the sword, Adam asked: ¡°Is this¡­ my father¡¯s sword?¡±


    Hansen nodded: ¡°Just before he died, your father passed it to me. I promised to hand it to you when you were ready.¡±


    Adam picked up the sword and held it for a moment: ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Bruno and Clyde looked on with envy: ¡°I wish we had dad¡¯s sword.¡±


    ¡°Yeah, but how would we share it?¡±


    ¡°Break it in half?¡±


    Hansen gave a sharp rap to the boys¡¯ heads. ¡°Stop fooling around, get to a sword!¡±


    Once everyone sat by a sword, Hansen began his instruction. After a few safety rules, they picked up their swords as Hansen guided them through the process. As they lifted them, everyone came to realize something: real swords are heavy! They had all gotten used to the wooden swords they practiced with and hadn¡¯t even thought about the weight difference metal would bring.


    Following Hansen¡¯s instruction, Adam carefully pulled his sword from its scabbard. Adam felt no resistance as it smoothly pulled free. The sword glistened under the sun. It was clear of any blood or rust. Adam could only see the swords form in his Spirit Sight, so he carefully ran his fingers across the flat of the blade. The cool metal was smooth and free of blemishes. The sword had clearly been well maintained since his father had died. The only one who could have done this was Hansen. Adam was extremely grateful for this and decided he would have to find a way to properly thank him.


    When they were finally done with the day¡¯s lesson, Hansen told them: ¡°Leave your swords with me. I will bring them tomorrow when we start training in earnest.¡±


    ¡°What!? Why?¡± Derek exclaimed. He then immediately regretted it as Hansen once again cast him a death glare.


    Hansen curtly responded: ¡°Cuz you''re overconfident! You¡¯ll try to train on your own and will cut your arm off in the process! I¡¯ve seen it before.¡±


    Derek quickly put the sword back on the blanket before leaving like a frightened rabbit!


    Alfred couldn¡¯t help shaking his head: ¡°Why does that oaf always have to open his big mouth? It just gets him into more trouble.¡±

 Chapter 21 To Kill

    To Kill


    Adam quietly stalked after Silber through the forest. Silber himself was following a large dog that belonged to the Silver Saviors. Silber watched the large dog and imitated its actions as they tracked small game. Adam couldn¡¯t help smiling at Silber¡¯s imitations.


    Silber had recently contracted the rather serious disease known as wanderlust! Just getting out of Julienne¡¯s house to visit Madame¡¯s wasn¡¯t enough for the young wolf. With the Bear-Ghul having been dealt with by the military, Hansen had made plans to get Adam and the others out hunting with the Silver Saviors again.


    With the hunts going on, an idea came up: ¡°Why not take Silber along?¡±


    Silber¡¯s natural habitat was the forest. Maybe taking him out would curb his wanderlust. It would also allow him to interact with other dogs. Thus, Silber found himself on this wondrous expedition!


    As Adam watched, Silber and the large dog perked up. With a small bark, Silber quickly trotted down the trail. The large dog was well disciplined and quietly stalked forward, without barking. As they approached a bush, they found that a few of their small game traps had gone off! Silber had pounced on one rabbit and was in the process of chewing on it! Another rabbit was frantically trying to escape its own trap nearby.


    Watching Silber joyfully bite the rabbit, Adam heaved a heavy sigh. He hated to do it, but Silber needed to be taught proper discipline, like the dogs the Silver Saviors raise. Adam gave a sharp resounding clap near Silber and sternly said: ¡°Silber, no!¡±


    Silber quickly stopped what he was doing, surprised by the clap. He tried to go back to the rabbit when he saw it was only Adam, but Adam pushed him back once again saying: ¡°No!¡±


    Silber looked up at Adam with big puppy eyes. Luckily, Adam couldn¡¯t see them so he stayed firm. Still, Silber¡¯s Aura looked a little hurt. It was as though Silber was asking in a sad voice: ¡°Why?¡±


    Adam started petting him: ¡°It¡¯s okay. We¡¯ll be cooking them later and then they¡¯ll taste way better!¡±


    The large dog¡¯s handler came up behind Adam. He gestured toward the rabbit still trying to escape: ¡°You know what to do.¡±


    Adam sighed. After telling Silber to stay where he was, Adam readied himself to deal with the rabbit. Quickly grabbing the struggling rabbit, Adam wrapped his hand around its head and pushed it back until a small snap was heard. The rabbit went limp as Adam felt a wave of nausea wash over him.


    In his Spirit Sight, Adam could see a wave of death essence surge from beneath his hand, where the rabbit¡¯s neck had snapped. The handler said: ¡°You¡¯ve gotten better at that. I think you¡¯re getting used to it.¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°I¡¯ll never get used to it.¡±


    The handler shrugged: ¡°Well, let¡¯s head back.¡±


    Adam and the others had begun taking on more jobs during the hunt. They started out by taking active roles in skinning and butchering their quarry. After that, they began taking the lives of the animals they caught. Hansen had said: ¡°We¡¯re going to start out small before we get to humans.¡±


    Adam blanched whenever he thought about it. It was hard enough for him to even watch animals die. He couldn¡¯t quite fathom seeing another person die. Adam¡¯s thoughts drifted as they walked back to camp: ¡®I wonder if I should just give this up. I want to be strong enough to protect my family¡­ but this is a little too much.¡±


    Adam¡¯s thoughts were broken as Silber began yipping and bouncing around him. Adam smiled at the little wolf: ¡°I¡¯ll race you back!¡± he said before taking off with Silber at his heels.


    -----------------------------------------


    Everyone sat around a campfire while a rabbit stew boiled. They had each done a lot of foraging throughout the day and were tired.


    Kadara gave a rather loud sigh: ¡°Why¡¯d they have to give us all the boring jobs? Picking up rabbit traps is nowhere near as thrilling as boar hunting!¡±


    ¡°And, what would you do? Just watch from the side? You don¡¯t know how to use a spear! You¡¯d only get in their way.¡± Franklin retorted.


    Kadara stuck her tongue out at him: ¡°Spoilsport!¡±


    While the two were bickering, Adam pulled his flute out and began to play a song. They were done with the day¡¯s activities and he wanted to do something to move his mind away from the skinning and butchering they had been doing just minutes ago.


    The tune he played was somber yet nice to listen to. As he played, the embers flying off from the fire began to swirl in the air. Kadara was the first to catch the sudden change in the embers¡¯ movement.


    ¡°It¡¯s so pretty! It¡¯s almost like the embers are dancing!¡±


    Adam smirked inwardly. The embers really were dancing! The tune he was playing was just right for Fire Essence to dance along. The floating embers were so light that the pure Fire Essence inside them could move them around.


    It wasn¡¯t truly controlling fire with a Formation, but it was another step closer.


    After marveling at the embers for a moment, Alfred asked: ¡°Why do you think Hansen didn¡¯t come with us this time?¡±Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions.


    ¡°Doesn¡¯t matter. I¡¯m glad he didn¡¯t come!¡± Derek said.


    Clyde laughed: ¡°You¡¯re just scared of him!¡±


    ¡°Maybe he thought we could take care of ourselves now.¡± Bruno added.


    They could only guess as to why their ever faithful trainer didn¡¯t come with them on this trip.


    -----------------------------------------


    After returning from the hunt, Adam headed to the dorm room he shared with his mother. He was surprised to find his mother talking to an agitated person in the room. Slowing his steps, Adam listened to their morphed voices through his Spirit Sight:


    ¡°Can you believe that man!? They¡¯re just kids, why send them out on such a mission!?¡±


    ¡®Ah,¡¯ Adam thought: ¡®It¡¯s Madame Janette.¡¯


    Vivienne gave a dry chuckle: ¡°You won¡¯t hear any argument from me. You know that I don¡¯t really like him¡­¡±


    Janette heaved a sigh: ¡°Yea. He¡¯s straight and to the point, but he¡¯s normally a gentle and nice person. I don¡¯t understand why he suddenly brought this up.¡±


    Vivienne paused for a moment before saying: ¡°We¡¯re both talking about Hansen, right?¡±


    Janette flustered: ¡°A-anyway, do you think I was too fast in turning his proposal down? He¡¯s been very good in guiding the kids so far. I just think that mission is a little much.¡±


    Vivienne gave her own sigh: ¡°As a mother, I totally agree. Who would want their child to go through such a thing? However¡­ If this is the career they are thinking of pursuing, it¡¯s better that they learn more about it in a controlled manner. As much as I hate to admit it, Hansen does a good job of protecting the kids. I can¡¯t imagine a safer way for them to learn just what being a mercenary or a soldier means, other than preventing them from doing either in the first place.¡±


    Janette gave Vivienne a betrayed look: ¡®I thought you were supposed to be on my side.¡±


    Vivienne laughed: ¡°Well, I already told Adam he needs to start making his own decisions. He¡¯ll be an adult before too long and I can¡¯t watch over him forever. As much as it pains me to let him do it, it¡¯s his decision.¡±


    Janette groaned: ¡°Well, thanks for not being helpful and making me doubt myself, as always.¡±


    Vivienne patted Janette¡¯s should comfortingly. With a smile, she said: ¡°Anytime. Now, I¡¯m sure you want to go mull over Hansen¡¯s proposition again. We¡¯ll talk about you thinking he¡¯s a ¡®gentle and nice person¡¯ tomorrow.¡±


    Janette immediately bolted for the door: ¡°It¡¯s fine, I¡¯ll be thinking too much tomorrow to talk! Another time maybe!¡±


    Janette nearly bumped into Adam as she opened the door. She quickly apologized before continuing on. Adam could only stare, unsure of her behavior. She had a bit of a pinkish tinge to her Aura, but he didn¡¯t dare make any assumptions after what happened with Helen.


    Vivienne shook her head at her retreating friends back: ¡°Welcome back, Adam. Don¡¯t mind Janette, she¡¯s just being shy.¡±


    ¡°I heard a little of your conversation. What¡¯s going on?¡±


    Vivienne eyed Adam: ¡°I thought you said you wouldn¡¯t peep on others anymore.¡±


    ¡°What? No, I was just curious who was talking with you in our room while I was walking over.¡±


    Vivienne gently knocked his head: ¡°Curiosity can be dangerous. Didn¡¯t you already learn this lesson? Anyway, you¡¯ll probably find out before too long. Hansen has asked to take you and the others out to watch one of the Silver Savior¡¯s bandit subjugations.¡±


    ¡°Really!?¡±


    Vivienne nodded: ¡°What do you think? Do you want to go?¡±


    Adam was silent for a moment before saying: ¡°Actually, I¡¯m not sure. I want the strength to protect my family and friends, I don¡¯t plan on becoming a mercenary. I also really don¡¯t want to see a bunch of people fight and die.¡±


    Vivienne gave Adam a hug: ¡°Well, I¡¯m still not sure if Janette will let Hansen take you and the others. If she does, you¡¯ll have my support no matter your decision.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Hansen seemed to be in a dour mood the next morning. He was more curt than normal as he directed their morning training. It wasn¡¯t until late in the afternoon that Janette finally rescinded her decision about the bandit subjugation mission. Hansen was so happy when she told him, he almost smiled!


    The next morning, Hansen announced his plans: ¡°You have the opportunity to see an actual battle! The Silver Saviors will be going on a bandit subjugation mission in a week. We are joining them as observers!¡±


    Hansen¡¯s words were both exciting and ominous. Adam was still wracked with indecision. Everyone else could only feel anticipation for what was to come. Except for Franklin. He was scared at the thought of witnessing the battle. However, he had long ago decided to assume the role of watching his friends¡¯ backs. He wasn¡¯t about to leave them now.


    Kadara was the first to notice Adam¡¯s conflicted look. With a devilish smile, she asked: ¡°What, gotta poop?¡±


    Adam gave her a bewildered look, while Franklin gave Kadara a disgusted look. He couldn¡¯t even figure out how to retort her!


    Despite her joking demeanor, Adam saw the mild concern in her Aura. He realized she was just asking if he was alright, in her own way. He shook his head and said: ¡°I just don¡¯t know if I should really go on this mission. I don¡¯t have any interest in killing others, I just want to protect my friends and family¡­¡±


    Hansen spoke: ¡°Even if you avoid battles, one will find you. Just like it did at Fort Erich. You can decide what to do after, but you must see what a battle looks like or you will die when one catches you!¡±


    Adam thought back to his home that was ravaged by Ghuls. None of them had sought that battle, yet it had come to them. Adam slowly nodded his head: ¡°Okay.¡±


    Hansen turned to face the others: ¡°And you lot, why are you so excited!? People are going to die on this mission, both bandits and Silver Saviors!¡±


    Hansen¡¯s sudden words struck their hearts. They¡¯d only been thinking of the glorious side of a battle; righteously winning over an evil enemy. They hadn¡¯t thought of the death it would bring.


    ¡°You should prepare yourselves. You will see what it¡¯s like to kill in cold blood!¡±

 Chapter 22 Ember

    Ember


    With trepidation, Adam and the others arrived at the Silver Saviors Headquarters. It was abuzz with activity as they prepared to leave. Several wagons were lined up on the streets with horses harnessed to them. The wagons were each loaded down with supplies and weapons too heavy to carry over long distances. Milling around the wagons were dozens of Silver Saviors, each wearing their own pack of supplies and assorted weapons.


    Isley spotted them as they approached and walked over: ¡°Don¡¯t look so tense. It¡¯ll be a few days march before we even reach the bandits¡¯ territory. We have packs readied for you full of supplies over there. There are also a few pieces of leather armor for protection. Grab them and I¡¯ll join you again when we¡¯re about to leave.¡±


    Isley left them to their own devices as he went to continue preparing for departure. Adam turned to his mother and Helen, who was holding Silber.


    ¡°Well, we¡¯re not leaving yet but I¡¯ve got to go prepare.¡±


    Vivienne gave Adam a hug and said: ¡°Be safe, okay?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°I¡¯ll stay safe.¡±


    Helen said: ¡°You and Alfred are stupid all the time, don¡¯t do anything stupid this time!¡±


    Adam stifled a laugh, as Helen¡¯s serious look meant she wasn¡¯t joking. ¡°Uh, sure.¡± Was the only thing he could come up with as a response.


    In Helen¡¯s arms, Silber gave off a bark. Adam smiled and gave him a pat on the head: ¡°Sorry you can¡¯t come with me. It¡¯s a little too rough of a journey for you right now. I¡¯ll be back soon enough.¡±


    After saying his goodbyes to them, Adam went to retrieve his pack and the leather armor the Silver Saviors had prepared. The armor that had been prepared for them were stiff pieces of boiled leather armor. They looked rather plain, compared to the dyed armor that was standard issue for the Silver Saviors. Each of the pieces was secured by leather strings, so they could rather easily be worn over their normal clothes. This didn¡¯t allow for the best of protection, but none of them were going to enter the battle anyway.


    Hansen helped them to tightly secure the leather pieces. By the time they were all done, an hour had already passed them by! While they waited for Isley, Derek lamented: ¡°I was hoping they prepared us the same cool armor the rest of them use.¡±


    Isley chuckled as he walked up behind Derek: ¡°You¡¯re going to be chafing enough as it is. Let¡¯s go, it¡¯s time to move out!¡±


    None of them had time to ask Isley what he meant about ¡®chafing¡¯. They fell in line with the rest of the convoy as the wagons lurched forward, heading out of the city.


    ----------------------------------------


    After just a few hours, they found out what Isley meant about chafing the hard way! While the leather armor held fast to their body, it would still move around as they walked with the convoy. Before long, the armor began to rub their skin raw!


    When they finally stopped for a break, their little group was exhausted and sore in a way they weren¡¯t expecting to be. Isley chuckled: ¡°It¡¯d be even worse if we fully armored you up with our standard issue! Look in your packs, there should be a salve in there. Take your armor off, wash the raw spots and then apply the salve. It¡¯ll feel sticky, but loads better than if you just left it as is.¡±


    Each groaning in pain, they gingerly took off their armor. After carefully washing and applying the salve on the raw spots, they relaxed their muscles to try and rest. It was at this time that Isley came back to them: ¡°Put your armor back on, we¡¯ll be moving on.¡±


    They all groaned like a bunch of Ghuls. Franklin cried out: ¡°But we haven¡¯t even rested yet!¡±


    Isley sighed: ¡°I know, that¡¯s why you lot get to ride in the wagons for a while.¡±


    ¡°Really!?¡±


    Isley nodded: ¡°You still have to put the armor back on, though. You need to get used to it.¡±


    Putting the armor back on was more painful than it was to take off. They could feel it as the armor pressed down on their raw skin. Stinging with pain, they mounted into the wagons in pairs.


    As Adam and Alfred settled down next to each other, Alfred said: ¡°If we have to feel this sore for the rest of our lives, I may second guess all of this too!¡±


    Adam could only manage a dry chuckle as sore pain pressed in on him from all over. The wagon driver gave a jovial laugh, though: ¡°You¡¯re bound to get sore no matter what you chose to do in life. Give it time. You¡¯ll grow used to it and develop some callouses to help against the chafing.¡±


    With a grin, he clapped both the boys on their shoulder. They each flinched from the pain of the armor digging into their skin. With another laugh, the driver whipped his reins causing the wagon to lurch forward.


    ----------------------------------------


    By the end of the day, they were all slumping in exhaustion. They were glad to be rid of their armor for a while, as they once again applied the salve to their raw skin. Isley and Hansen had taken pity on them and had set up their part of camp for them.


    As they slowly ate their evening meal, careful to not let their clothes rub them the wrong way, a big burly man made his way to their camp: ¡°How¡¯re they fairing, Isley?¡±


    Isley laughed: ¡°The lot of them are full of sores, Boss. They might be too distracted to pay attention when we finally go to battle!¡±


    It was only then that they came out of their stupor caused by constant stinging pain. The man who had just walked into their camp was none other than Heinrich himself!


    Kadara instantly stood up and stuttered: ¡°B-boss!¡±


    She then instantly regretted it as her clothes rubbed across her skin. Heinrich laughed as she grimaced in pain: ¡°It¡¯s fine to be enthusiastic, but learn your limits. I¡¯m sure you¡¯d all like to rest, so I¡¯ll leave you to it.¡±


    As Heinrich left, Kadara sank back down with a groan. Franklin shook his head: ¡°Why are these guys always laughing at us? Is it that fun to pick on us.¡±


    Isley shyly scratched his cheek: ¡°It¡¯s not that. A lot of us out here either don¡¯t have kids or can¡¯t spend much time with them. That¡¯s just the way mercenary life is. Having you around and teaching you is like teaching our own kids. It¡¯s a joy watching you grow.¡±


    Franklin didn¡¯t know how to respond to that. He had just assumed they liked to pick on them. Bruno then spoke up: ¡°Me and Clyde were thinking earlier, why isn¡¯t the army doing this? Aren¡¯t they the ones charged with the kingdom¡¯s protection? Shouldn¡¯t they be taking care of bandits?¡±


    Now that it was out there, the question seemed kind of obvious. Derek piped in: ¡°Yeah, why is that?¡±


    Isley gave a sigh: ¡°Well, you know how Heider and Luxom are always at each other''s throats? If there isn¡¯t a war going on, it¡¯s always on the verge of happening. Neither side wants to move any soldiers from their main towns or borders, as that would leave them open to enemy attack. So, they put out commissions for mercenaries to take care of things like this instead.¡±


    The kingdom was too busy protecting them from the big enemy, so they hire out others to take care of the small ones running amok. It sounded great, but: ¡°I just thought the kingdom would do something more to protect its citizens. I mean, the army took care of that Ghul-Bear. I would¡¯ve thought they could do this too¡­¡±A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation.


    Isley nodded: ¡°Yes, but remember the Ghul-Bear appeared near Hessler, a major city. The soldiers stationed to protect the city were close enough to deal with the threat without leaving the city¡¯s vicinity. Get a few days away from the city, though, and they¡¯ll leave any problems that arise to take care of themselves. That, or hire some mercenaries to take care of the problem.


    It¡¯s actually why Heinrich formed the Silver Saviors in the first place! The school where he trained his Martial Arts actually sends its members out to protect those who can¡¯t protect themselves. Heinrich decided to build our mercenary company to fulfill that goal!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s so cool!¡±


    As they started to chat about this new information, Isley stood up: ¡°Don¡¯t forget to go to bed. We¡¯ll be leaving early in the morning and you¡¯ll still be sore. You¡¯d better get all the rest you can!¡±


    Despite Isley¡¯s words, they couldn¡¯t help continuing to talk for a while longer. It wasn¡¯t until Hanse barked at them: ¡°To bed with the lot of you!¡± That they finally turned in.


    ----------------------------------------


    As promised, they woke up sore the next morning and the morning after that! The chafing didn¡¯t get any better. They either had to get used to it or exist in a constant state of agony, so they decided to get used to it. On the third day, after departing Hessler, they finally arrived at their target area. They didn¡¯t know exactly where the bandit¡¯s stronghold was, yet, but they did know which villages they were targeting.


    In the distance was Hagden Village. It was already late in the afternoon and the plan was to get there by Evening. However, something was wrong! Plumes of black smoke curled up into the sky. Orders were quickly yelled out: ¡°Eyes to the roadsides! Check for scouts and ambushes! Ready your weapons, we¡¯re force marching to Hagden!¡±


    Adam and the others were quickly spooked: ¡°What¡¯s going on!?¡±


    ¡°Hagden is being attacked!¡± Isley provided. ¡°You lot are mounting up into the wagons. They¡¯re the safest place.¡±


    After Adam and the others were packed in, the convoy moved at a faster pace than before. The Silver Saviors moved at a measured jog. Seeing this, Adam couldn¡¯t help but ask: ¡°Why aren¡¯t we running?¡±


    The wagon driver countered his question: ¡°Have you tried running with your pack, armor, and sword yet? It¡¯s right tiring I tell ya! We still have, what five or six kilometers until we actually get to Hagden? If we ran that distance, we¡¯d be so exhausted that the bandits could plow through us like weeds!¡±


    Adam could only sigh in response: ¡°I get that but¡­ I hope Hagden will be alright.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure Heinrich ran ahead as soon as he issued the orders for the march. If the bandits are still around when he gets there, they¡¯ll wish they¡¯d never been born!¡±


    When they finally made it to Hagden, the bandits were long gone. However, a fire was still raging in part of the village! The village was in chaos as the villagers did everything they could to contain the fire and not let it spread. Heinrich could be seen in the thick of it. When he saw them arrive, he barked out: ¡°Help contain the fire!¡±


    The Silver Saviors were already moving into action before Heinrich even spoke! Forming up in their squads, they drew water from the village well into buckets and splashed them over the walls and roofs of the houses closest to the fire. Hopefully, it would be enough to keep the fire from spreading over to them.


    True to their word, the Silver Saviors kept Adam and the others in the safest spot: at the well drawing water. It was tiring work, but they didn¡¯t complain. They didn¡¯t even feel the pain of their armor rubbing against their skin as they worked.


    A half-hour into their task and the fire continued unabated. It constantly sputtered out embers left and right into the air. Each of these tiny specks could help the fire spread further out of control.


    Isley sighed as he watched: ¡°This isn¡¯t going to work.¡±


    Adam caught this: ¡°What did you say?¡±


    Isley hesitated for a moment before saying: ¡°It¡¯s going to be next to impossible to keep this fire from spreading. All those embers could each cause a fire! There¡¯s no way we can truly control this.¡±


    Even as he spoke, smoke began to rise from another house. Isley shook his head in disappointment while Hansen grunted in agreement. Alfred and the others, though, were looking at Adam. Adam had entertained them for a few nights by making embers dance in the air above their campfire. Maybe¡­


    Adam knew what they were going to ask, but he shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t think I can control that many embers! Can you see that raging fire? I can only see a part of it from here, but it¡¯s already huge!¡±


    ¡°You said: ¡®you don¡¯t think¡¯ which means you still might be able to!¡± Kadara encouraged.


    Alfred nodded: ¡°Just give it a try. We¡¯ll work double time to cover your load. If it doesn¡¯t work¡­ at least you tried.¡±


    Isley and Hansen were lost. Hansen asked: ¡°What are you lot saying?¡±


    Franklin clued them in: ¡°Adam¡¯s a Spiritualist, right? He controls things with music! Have you been watching the embers over our campfire for the past couple night? He¡¯s been controlling the embers to make them dance! He might be able to control these embers too!¡±


    ¡°Can you do it?¡± Hansen immediately asked.


    Adam shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t know, but I can try.¡±


    ¡°Get to it then.¡±


    Adam quickly ran to the pack he had left in the wagon and got his flute before running back to the well. Finding a spot where he would be out of everyone¡¯s way, he sat down. Taking a few deep breaths to calm himself, Adam thought through what he wanted and the song he needed to play to achieve it. He already knew how to make embers dance, he just needed to do it at a grander scale! And, hopefully, in a way that would help their situation.


    With a calm breath, Adam started with a clear note. Even though it wasn¡¯t loud, it could somehow be heard over the raging fire! After holding the note for a moment, Adam¡¯s song began to slowly unfold across the village. Each note seemed to strike a chord with the fire! And then, ever so slowly, the embers began to drift upward in an undulating dance!


    Rather than the natural chaos of the fire where embers were sent left and right, the embers¡¯ movement became ordered as they danced straight up into the air. Watching the ember move and twirl around each other was almost like watching dancers at a giant ball! Seeing embers dancing above the campfire had been amusing. Seeing the embers dance over the raging fire was majestic and awe-inspiring!


    Everyone had momentarily stopped when Adam¡¯s song started. No one was sure why someone would be playing a flute at this time. Then they saw the embers surge to dance upward into the sky, only to eventually wink out harmlessly in the air. The desperation that clung to them as they fought the fire began to transform. They quickly began to move with a new vigor as hope surged within them!


    Adam felt pride swell in his chest: ¡®It¡¯s working! It¡¯s¡­ like I¡¯m actually a Spiritualist!¡¯


    It was the first time Adam¡¯s ability as a Spiritualist was actually of some practical use. And it was being used to help stop a raging fire from claiming a village!


    With Adam¡¯s help, it was harder for the fire to spread. Within a few hours, they had finally contained the fire and let it burn down. Now, they just needed to keep an eye on the ashen timber that was all that remained of the burned homes and barns. It was possible that coals buried under the ash could ignite a new fire.


    Having done all they could, Adam and the others collapsed in exhaustion around the well. Not only was Adam physically tired, he was also mentally drained from playing the song for so long.


    Franklin asked: ¡°Why would bandits do this?¡±


    ¡°They were just setting fire to a barn as a show of force. When is it spread out of control, the bandits fled.¡±


    Everyone turned to Heinrich, who had just appeared.


    ¡°Good job tonight. Especially you, Adam. The entire village might have been burned down if we hadn¡¯t been able to contain the fire.¡±


    Everyone wore a smile, feeling pride in the work they had done. Isley noticed a few Silver Saviors running back from where they parked the convoy with bandages in hand. Frowning, he asked: ¡°Did someone get hurt?¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°A few villagers got burned¡­ one of them might not make it.¡±


    That dampened the pride Adam was feeling. Concerned, he pushed his Spirit Sight to follow the Silver Saviors that were taking the bandages to the villagers. Adam was surprised to find he could actually tell which villagers were burned! The burns appeared like sores of Death Essence on their bodies! Considering that burned skin was dead skin, it made sense. Adam looked over the villagers one by one. When he found the dying villager, he gasped! The villager¡¯s body was almost entirely covered in burn marks, encasing his body in sores of Death Essence! The Death Essence from the burns was seeping deep into his body.


    Alfred asked: ¡°Are you okay Adam? You look pale.¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°He¡¯s going to die!¡±


    Even as Adam spoke, the man¡¯s ragged breathing stilled. A wail escaped from someone next to the man. Adam could only watch as the Death Essence pervading the man¡¯s body claimed it as he died.


    Adam¡¯s own breath caught in his throat! Somehow, watching a person die was totally different from when they killed game while hunting. Adam faintly heard someone yelling at him, but he didn¡¯t pay attention. His mind was totally caught in the scene of the man¡¯s death.


    Then, he saw it! A tiny wisp that could easily be overlooked fled the man¡¯s Aura! The tiny speck was almost like an ember escaping the confines of its fire. It flitted up, zigging and zagging lazily in the air. After a moment of flitting about, the ember winked out.


    Adam stared blankly at where that small ember from the man¡¯s Aura, his soul, disappeared: ¡®What was that?¡¯

 Chapter 23 Felling Bandits

    Felling Bandits!


    Adam was broken out of his thoughts by the shouting of his concerned friends. It was only then that he realized he had been holding his breath since he watched the villager die! With a gasp, Adam resumed his breathing.


    Being assaulted with a series of ¡®are you alright!?¡¯ questions, Adam waived them off with by saying: ¡°I¡¯m fine. It was just¡­ seeing someone die like that is different from killing game.¡±


    Hansen nodded: ¡°That¡¯s why we¡¯re here. Seeing death on the battlefield will be worse!¡±


    Hansen¡¯s chilling words quieted everyone. As they were in their own thoughts, a few Silver Saviors came around with dry rations. Due to the fire, they had all skipped out on dinner. No one was energetic enough to actually prepare a decent meal, so this was all anyone was getting that night. After eating, everyone started preparing to sleep. A few Silver Saviors were given watch duty to look out for any bandits that might come back as well as ensuring the fire didn¡¯t restart.


    Adam lied down to sleep but found that he couldn¡¯t. His mind was full of questions on the mote of light that escaped the villager¡¯s soul when he died. He also couldn¡¯t shake how disturbing it was to watch someone die. The way Death Essence seemed to snuff out a person¡¯s life. Adam was only able to get a few hours of sleep in the early morning as exhaustion forced his mind to rest.


    Adam awoke the next morning absolutely sore! Not only from the chafing of his armor, but from the physical labor of pulling water from the well for a few hours! Groaning as he got up, Adam found the Silver Saviors already abuzz with activity. Alfred seemed to be eating breakfast nearby. Adam asked: ¡°What time is it?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s already mid-morning. Isley and Hansen let us sleep in. I¡¯ve got some extra food, come eat.¡±


    As Adam joined Alfred, he looked around for the others. It looked like he was one of the last to wake up! Only Kadara was still sound asleep. When she woke up and found out she was the last one awake, she was bound to be devastated! She always hated being last place.


    Around noon, the Silver Saviors marched out of Hagden Village. They all needed a rest, but the longer they waited the more likely it was for the bandits to find out they were in the area.


    As they marched, everyone stayed quiet as they kept an eye and an ear out for bandits. They were in enemy territory now and while it was unlikely the bandits would have any patrols, they likely would have scouts. How else would they know if a trade caravan found itself on their roads?


    Adam quietly asked: ¡°I didn¡¯t hear before we left, where are we headed?¡±


    Isley responded: ¡°We picked up a lead from Hagden. They had abducted local carpenters from all of the villagers around here to build themselves a defensible compound off the road. It¡¯s not on any map. All we know is about a day¡¯s travel along the road. We¡¯re going to stop a few hours from where we believe they are and camp off the road for the night. Tomorrow morning, we will attack just as they¡¯re waking up!¡±


    Alfred and the others had been listening intently as Isley talked. When he said the battle was going to be tomorrow morning, all their stomach¡¯s flopped in anxiety. They all shared the same thought: ¡®Isn¡¯t that a little soon?¡¯


    -----------------------------------------


    The sun hadn¡¯t even risen yet and the Silver Saviors found themselves stalking through the wilderness alongside the road. The trees and bushes helped to hide them as they approached the bandits compound.


    They were all astounded that they had yet to meet any scouts! Either the bandits were severely incompetent or their scouts were so good they had already seen the Silver Saviors coming and left to prepare for them. If the scouts were that good, though, they could have easily found employment in a mercenary band or the army.


    The sun was just about ready to peak over the horizon when the Silver Saviors finally located the bandit compound. it was a series of houses that had a wooden palisade wall made of tree logs that were staked in the ground built around it. They also finally saw the first bandit scouts located atop a few lookout towers. However, they were merely looking at the road and not paying attention to the forest at all! These bandits were clearly amateurs.


    Isley and Hansen held Adam and the others at the back of the group. Orders where quickly whispered around as a quick battle plan was made: Heinrich would first give the bandits a chance to surrender. If they didn¡¯t, he would open up a hole in the palisade that they could then take advantage of.


    As everyone began moving into position, Adam¡¯s anxiety began to peak. Hansen pulled a few leaves of a green plant on the ground. He passed a leaf around to everyone: ¡°Chew on these. It¡¯ll help.¡±


    Adam didn¡¯t question it as he put the leaf in his mouth and began to chew. He was surprised as a strong spicy cool taste suffused his mouth!


    Hansen said: ¡°It¡¯s mint. I¡¯ve found it to help me calm my nerves before battle.¡±


    He then put a leaf in his own mouth and began chewing. And, he was right! The spicy mint in their mouth managed to distract them from what was to come.


    Then, Heinrich¡¯s boom voice could be heard: ¡°We have your compound surrounded! Surrender and you will be spared!¡±


    The scouts atop the tower looked spooked as they scrambled to blow on their warning horns. As they trumpeted out, the compound was already abuzz as the lazy bandits were woken from their sleep. Out of the largest house, a big man strode confidently out: ¡°Everyone get yer asses ready! Even if they got ladders, they¡¯ll have to drop off the top of the wall to the ground! Let¡¯s show ''em that we¡¯re not to be tussled with!¡±


    Adam tensed as he heard the bandit¡¯s shout. Hansen spoke: ¡°Eyes forward! Make sure you watch the battle. Keep an eye out for any archers. Learn the flow of battle. If you get swept up by it, your as good as dead!¡±


    They all looked ahead, surprised by how quickly things were developing. With his Spirit Sight, Adam spared a glance at Heinrich. As he watched, Heinrich pulled a humongous ax free from his back. After he readied his weapon, a large amount of Earth Essence swelled from the very ground into Heinrich¡¯s body! The ground beneath his feet crumbled as he suddenly exploded with a burst of speed! In but a moment, Heinrich was next to the palisade, swinging his giant ax! With a simple swing, the logs were sent flying back into the compound they were protecting! Heinrich quickly moved, swinging over and over with his ax sending these logs as giant projectiles into the compound before they could even prepare!


    The sound of splintering wood, followed by screams of pain and fright, drifted out from the compound. The screams were met with the Silver Saviors¡¯ war cries as they charged into the gap Heinrich had opened into the defenses!


    The compound quickly fell into chaos! The bandits were an unorganized mess and they were felled left and right by the Silver Saviors. The bandit''s screams changed. They became agonized and desperate. Above them all, the screams of those dying were the worst!


    Under his Spirit Sight, Adam watched the Silver Savors¡¯ weapons slice and hack their way through the bandits. As they fell, Death Essence claimed the bodies of the fallen. Between the sight of humans being hacked apart and all the accumulated Death Essence, Adam became nauseous. Hansen clapped Adam on the shoulder: ¡°Don¡¯t concentrate on their deaths. Pay attention to the battle itself.¡±


    Adam gave a small nod and tried to ignore the dead and dying. Taking a deep minty breath, Adam tried to calm. It helped, if only a little.


    The flow of battle was definitely in the Silver Saviors¡¯ favor. They had caught the bandits unaware and were far more disciplined in their fighting. It wasn¡¯t long before bandits started throwing their weapons down and begged for mercy.Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings.


    Hansen nodded: ¡°Once they¡¯ve secured the bandits, we¡¯ll move in to help clean up the battlefield.¡±


    As they watched, a few of the Silver Saviors pulled out lengths of leather cord and bound the bandits¡¯ hands and feet. Other¡¯s kept a strict eye on the bandits while they were being tied, watching out for anyone trying to pull a fast move.


    After the bandits had been either restrained or dispatched, Hansen and Isley led Adam and the others forward. Adam had already seen the carnage up close with his Spirit Sight. As for Alfred, Bruno, Clyde, Derek, Kadara, and Franklin, they hadn¡¯t been able to get a good look at what was actually happening within the battle. Now that they were up close, hacked limbs and bloody bodies could be seen strewn across the ground. The heavy scent of blood permeated the air. Somehow, the knowledge of it being human blood made it smell worse than when they butchered game. It became so dense, that every one of them became sick and threw up on the ground!


    Isley and Hansen watched over them as they kept a constant vigil. Neither of them let their hands leave the hilt of their sheathed swords as there was no telling if a loose bandit was hiding somewhere among the dead bodies.


    When Adam and the others finally collected themselves, Hansen spoke: ¡°This is one battle! War is even worse than this!¡±


    Isley nodded: ¡°Compared to a war, this is nothing but a small skirmish. Can you now see why the Silver Saviors don¡¯t participate in the war between Heider and Luxom?¡±


    They solemnly nodded their heads. Hansen gave a nod of his head: ¡°Good. Now, you¡¯re going to help clean the battlefield up!¡±


    Everyone paled as they heard this. Isley spoke: ¡°We¡¯re not going to make you pick up the bodies. You will be helping to dig a mass grave, though. We don¡¯t want to leave their bodies alone. They could attract predators or cause pestilence and disease.¡±


    It took a good many hours and more than a few Silver Saviors to dig the grave. Adam and the others then had the pleasure of watching the Silver Saviors dump the bodies of the dead bandits into the grave. The lifeless flopping of the limbs and the sickening smacking as the bodies were stacked atop one another was altogether¡­ disturbing. Adam was certain he wouldn¡¯t be able to sleep well that night, if at all.


    -----------------------------------------


    With the bandits strung up into marching lines, the Silver Saviors started the journey back to Hessler. There, they would turn in the bandits to the kingdom and let them decide their punishment. Everyone was tasked with keeping an eye on them so that none of the bandits would have a chance to escape.


    Adam found it a little interesting to watch the bandits. When comparing their Auras to those of the Silver Saviors, he could tell many differences. Many of their Auras appeared dim. These bandits were facing varying degrees of despair and depression, having given up any hope of escaping the Silver Saviors and the punishment they would receive from the kingdom.


    Among them, though, were the rare few who were defiant! They were constantly looking for ways to escape. While brighter than the others, these bandits¡¯ Aura had a weird dirty feeling to it. As though the crimes they had committed had mired their soul.


    With Adam pointing these bandits out to the Silver Saviors, it was rather easy for them to prevent any escape attempts. This made the journey back to Hessler rather uneventful.


    The night before they would finally make it back, Adam stayed up with the others. Derek said: ¡°We¡¯re finally going to be home again! All this travel is kinda boring.¡±


    ¡°I just want to relax and forget about everything for a while.¡± Adam said.


    After continuing to talk for a few minutes, Adam decided to stretch his legs before heading to bed. As he walked to the edge of their little camp, he noticed something odd: a pair of men were walking between their camp and the next one over. That itself wasn¡¯t odd, but was odd was that they were crouched in a way as though they were trying to sneak past them!


    Adam called out: ¡°Who''s there?¡± It was then that he noticed the men¡¯s dingy Aura! They were escaping bandits!


    -----------------------------------------


    Jarrick was seriously pissed! All the other fuckers in his gang had just given up! He had no choice but to surrender with the others! He tried playing the timid game to get those Silver Savior cunts to lower their guard, but no they had to listen to that blindfolded punk kid and pay special attention to him! It was only now, when they were so close to Hessler, that the Silver Saviors finally lowered their guard against him! He managed to steal a fork while they weren¡¯t looking! ¡®A fork?¡¯ You might say? Well, those stupid cunts were on the lookout for missing knives. They didn¡¯t think much about a missing fork! Using the prongs, he had slowly and carefully untied his bindings!


    Unfortunately, another one of his bandit ¡®buddies¡¯ saw him working at it. The damned fellow made Jarrick help him break out too! It was either that, or his ¡®buddy¡¯ would spill the beans to the Silver fucking Saviors!


    After night had settled, they escaped into the dark! Now, they were making his way between camps to complete their getaway! Along the way, Jarrick had even managed to score a dagger that had been left out!


    As he was getting to the outer edge of the dotted campfires the Silver Saviors were using, Jarrick couldn¡¯t help gloating to himself: ¡®Just you wait. When I finally make a name for myself, I¡¯ll take my gang and make sure your band can¡¯t save anyone again! Hehehe.¡±


    Just as they were going to move past two more campfires, someone stood up and started walking their way! Jarrick immediately stopped, hoping he wouldn¡¯t be spotted. Mentally, he started shouting: ¡®Oh fuck, oh fuck, oh fuck!¡¯


    The person stopped at the edge of their camped and looked his way! That was when he noticed it: ¡®It¡¯s that damned punk kid!¡¯


    Jarrick didn¡¯t know how he could see with the blindfold on, but he somehow could. Proving his point, the kid asked: ¡°Who¡¯s there?¡±


    That was when Jarrick quickly formed a new plan: ¡®Capture the kid and use him as a hostage to get away! Then I¡¯ll kill the little fucker for giving me a hard time!¡¯


    His decision quickly made, Jarrick drew his stolen dagger and lunged for the kid!


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam saw one of the bandits¡¯ Aura intensify with anger. Before he could warn the others, the bandit began to lunge with a dagger! Adam¡¯s heart plummeted. The bandit was attacking him! He did the only thing he could think of at the time: drawing his sword in an attack! It was so dark, the bandit didn¡¯t even seem to realize the danger as he continued his advance! Adam had just meant to scare the bandit off, but his sword¡¯s angle was just right to sweep across the front of the bandit¡¯s throat!


    Disbelief suffused the bandit¡¯s soul as he gripped his throat! With a gurgling noise, he fell while choking on his own blood! The other bandit stood stock still, shock and uncertainty pouring through his Aura. Adam fell backward in his own disbelief. He shouted: ¡°B¡­ Bandits!¡±


    The camps quickly stirred at the shout. Hansen had already started moving toward Adam when he heard him call out ¡®Who¡¯s there?¡¯ Even as Adam yelled, Hansen was barreling to his side with a drawn sword! Seeing the dark silhouette of the other bandit, Hansen gave out a vicious war cry


    As Hansen lunged, the bandit put his hands up saying: ¡°I surrender!¡±


    It was too late! Hansen skewered the man¡¯s chest with his sword. The man gave out a pained cry as Hansen shoulder rammed the man off his sword. Standing over the fallen dying man, Hansen gave a swift stab down at the man¡¯s throat. The sword tip went all the way through and severed the man¡¯s spine!


    Hansen didn¡¯t even bat an eye as he did this. He merely scanned the darkness, waiting for the next foe to appear. Luckily, there were none.


    Adam could only blankly look on. Hansen had quickly and coldly dispatched the other bandit before his Sight. Hansen¡¯s Aura hardly fluctuated beyond the seething anger that exploded the moment he realized what was happening.


    It was at this point that the other bandit stopped gurgling as he died. Adam watched in horror as Death Essence claimed the man¡¯s body. His mind was consumed by one thought: ¡®I killed him!¡¯


    While Adam watched on in horror, he saw a similar scene as when the villager had died in Hagden. A mote of light seemed to slip away from the man¡¯s soul and quickly disappeared after flitting about for just a moment. Despite Adam¡¯s initial interest in the phenomenon when he saw it in Hagden, he currently did not have the mental capacity to question just what the mote of light was.


    Alfred and the others quickly came to Adam¡¯s side, asking if he was okay. Once he knew there were no more bandits around, Hansen quickly turned to Adam and began inspecting him as well: ¡°You¡¯re not wounded, are you?¡±


    Adam flinched at Hansen¡¯s touch. Hansen sighed: ¡°I didn¡¯t want you to go through this so soon. But, now you know what may be required of you to defend yourself, your family, and your friends! Don¡¯t let his life burden you. He would have killed you!¡±


    That was all Hansen could muster in the way of inspiring words. Inwardly, he cursed himself for being unable to properly protect Adam like he was supposed to. He turned to the others: ¡°Help Adam back and try to get some rest. I will stand watch tonight.¡±


    If nothing else, he would make sure no other escaped bandits would approach that night.

 Chapter 24 Looking Forward

    Looking Forward


    The Silver Saviors stayed vigilant throughout the rest of the night and no more bandits managed to escape. As Adam tried to sleep, the scene where the bandit attacked him kept replaying itself over and over in his head. No matter how he tried, he couldn¡¯t still his mind and fall asleep.


    Early in the morning, the Silver Saviors departed to finally arrive at Hessler around noon. Adam walked into the city, groggy from his lack of sleep. Isley showed him a concerned look as he spoke to them all: ¡°It¡¯ll take a while for the military to help us process the bandits. Why don¡¯t you all drop off your packs at a wagon so you can go home? Feel free to take the leather armor, though. Those were ordered specifically for you lot.¡±


    Nobody argued as they quickly dropped their packs off and headed to Madame¡¯s to get some proper rest. When they finally arrived, there was no fanfare welcome back party since no one knew when they were going to be back from their trip. Adam went to his room to drop off the rest of his gear and try to relax.


    As Adam was stripping off his leather armor, Vivienne came in: ¡°Adam, someone told me they saw you come back! How are you? You¡­ don¡¯t look that good. Are you okay?¡±


    Vivienne became quite concerned with how haggard Adam looked. Adam sighed as he said: ¡°I¡¯m fine mom. It¡¯s just that I was attacked last night and-¡±


    Vivienne stopped him right there: ¡°What, you were attacked!?¡±


    Adam realized he had just said the wrong thing. He was too tired to tactfully talk about the previous night without setting Vivienne off. With concern and rage fueling her, she made Adam tell her all the details of what happened. She seethed with anger as she shouted: ¡°I thought that man said he was going to protect you all!¡±


    She gave Adam a fierce protective hug as she continued spewing a variety of curses at Hansen in her mind. She then began to carefully examine Adam, to make sure he wasn¡¯t hurt.


    Adam tried to stop her: ¡°I¡¯m fine mom, really. I just¡­ I just need to relax and forget about everything for a bit.¡±


    Vivienne was a little taken aback. She then nodded and said: ¡°Okay. You¡¯re right. Just let me know if you feel like talking.¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°I think¡­ I¡¯m going to head to the Hill Garden and play some music.¡±


    ¡°Take a bath first, you kinda stink!¡±


    Washing off the grime of his long journey felt rather nice to Adam. Freshly bathed and clothed, Adam felt his spirit starting to rise. His steps lighter than when he arrived, Adam left Madame¡¯s for the Hill Garden.


    Compared to when he had left¡­ the Hill Garden hadn¡¯t changed at all! Even as the rest of the world changed and experienced life-altering events, the Hill Garden would always be the same. Thinking of this, Adam smiled a little as he sat down: ¡®This will always be a place of peace for me.¡±


    Adam began to play a few songs. None of them had any meaning, he just played what came to mind. Somewhere along the way, Adam fell asleep while playing a song.


    Sometime later, Adam began to stir. As he woke, he heard the sound of humming. Opening up his Spirit Sight, he saw Helen sitting next to him. Noticing that he was stirring, Helen flashed him a smile: ¡°Morning sleepy head. Are you hungry? I brought some berries and an apple if you want some.¡±


    Adam¡¯s stomach rumbled at the thought of food: ¡°Yes, please!¡±You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story.


    After Adam had eaten a little, Helen said: ¡°I heard what happened. Are you okay?¡±


    Adam stopped eating for a moment before responding: ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s just¡­ scary Thinking about. I could have died! And¡­ I killed a person. I never knew how easy it actually is to kill someone...¡±


    As Adam seemed to sink into darker thoughts, Helen tapped him on the head: ¡°I told you not to do anything stupid, didn¡¯t I? And would you look at what you did? You¡¯ve made us all worry!¡±


    Pulled out if his thoughts, Adam flustered: ¡°Wha- it¡¯s not like I meant to or anything!¡±


    Helen gave him a gentle smile: ¡°Well, I¡¯m glad your safe. I¡¯m not entirely sure what you''re going through after that, but try not to dwell on it too much okay?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°I know.¡±


    Adam sighed as he continued to eat: ¡®But it¡¯s hard not to when everyone keeps bringing it up!¡¯


    There was one thing Adam lingered on. Those motes of light he had seen.


    ¡®I¡¯ll have to ask Catherine about them.¡¯


    When Adam and Helen finally got back to Madame¡¯s, word had already spread about how Adam was attacked by a bandit! Harassed by a series of curious and concerned questions, Adam escaped to his room. Vivienne was no longer there. With a quick look from his Spirit Sight, Adam found his mother in Janette¡¯s office. Hansen was there with the two of them and it looked like Vivienne was giving Hansen a stern talking to. Hansen was agreeing with everything she was saying, making Vivienne even angrier!


    Adam sighed as he laid down on his bed. He had managed to forget everything for a while in the Hill Garden, but everyone kept making him remember it! Thinking back on his trip again, he wondered aloud: ¡°So is that what it means to be a mercenary?¡±


    Adam didn¡¯t think he could handle all the death and killing. However, he liked the feeling when he managed to help those villagers with the fire. He didn¡¯t have to take bandit subjugation missions. Maybe there were more missions out there to help others. The first thing he needed to do, though: sort out his abilities as a Spiritualist!


    -----------------------------------------


    The next day, Adam made a run over to SIH. Meeting up with Catherine in her office, he talked to her about what he had managed to accomplish and about the motes of light he had seen. Catherine was positively thrilled in his ability to manipulate Fire Essence at the village. Even though other Spiritualists would have been more efficient at the task, he had still managed to accomplish something marvelous. As for the motes of light¡­ they left Catherine stumped!


    She excitedly spoke: ¡°I¡¯ve never heard of this before! Based on what you¡¯ve said, it¡¯s obviously something to do with the soul! There have been more than a few debates on what happens to a soul after someone dies. There are two prevailing theories that oppose one another. It is believed that either the soul completely disperses back into Spirit Essence and nothing remains of who you once were, or some part of your soul that houses your memories passes on to some afterlife. No one has ever been able to actually see the process of someone¡¯s death before, so no one knows for sure what exactly happens!¡±


    Her excitement bubbled over to Adam. He said: ¡°What do you think this means then?¡±


    Catherine¡¯s excitement started to die as she shook her head: ¡°I¡¯m not sure and I¡¯m honestly not certain we should continue investigating this.¡±


    Adam was shocked: ¡°Why!?¡±


    Catherine sighed: ¡°The Church of Spirits is rather partial to the theory where some part of the soul passes on to the afterlife. The Church can be rather¡­ fanatical when it comes to their beliefs. If these motes of light somehow oppose what their belief¡­ they may try to silence you!¡±


    That startled Adam: ¡°You¡¯re not serious, are you?¡±


    Catherine shook her head: ¡°I¡¯m afraid not. It is rare for someone to evoke the wrath of the Church, but it has happened before. Those people tend to simply disappear. While there is no evidence that the Church was involved¡­ It¡¯s best not to agitate them regardless.¡±


    Adam ended up leaving with more questions than answers. With Catherine stressing the need for secrecy on the matter, Adam even began to feel scared.


    Despite her Adamant assertions, Adam desperately thought: ¡®She¡¯s surely overreacting.¡¯


    Still, he wouldn¡¯t tempt fate and start blabbing to everyone about these motes of light he had seen. All he could do was continue pushing forward, hoping that answers would come.

 Chapter 25 Festival

    Festival


    Adam observed the packed tavern of Madame¡¯s while performing with his flute. Over the last two years, Adam had worked hard to better control Spirit Essence. It was now almost effortless for him to weave Spirit Essence into his songs, but the strength of his control hadn¡¯t improved much. The result was any music he played was imbued with a mystical feeling that evoked strong emotions in listeners. Adam¡¯s performance was considered sublime by everyone who heard it! It also made it a little difficult to play with others. He had to intentionally suppress his music from being imbued with Spirit Essence so he didn¡¯t stand out in parts where he was performing a supporting role.


    Tomorrow would be the Festival. The already bustling tavern was likely to be even busier then as everyone feasted. The kitchen had a few boars already on a slow cook to be served for their Festival feast. Adam silently wondered if they were the boars he had helped the Silver Saviors hunt a few days prior.


    Thinking about his recent hunt, Adam once again sent a silent prayer to souls of the boars. He had discovered that animals also released tiny motes of light when they died! They were smaller than humans and he would never have noticed them if he hadn¡¯t seen someone die before. Adam still wasn¡¯t sure what the motes represented, but he always sent a silent prayer to go with them.


    Adam swept his gaze over the dancers. Spotting Helen among them, his heart did a small flop. Her Aura was always the most beautiful when she danced. He had to quickly look away before he became too distracted that he messed up the song.


    Adam couldn¡¯t wait for tomorrow to come. There were a few fun things to do during the Festival that he looked forward to. Mostly, though, he was looking forward to business going back to normal at Madame¡¯s.


    -----------------------------------------


    The next evening, Adam prepared himself before heading out to enjoy the festival. His sword was too long making the sheath likely to hit others as they walked through dense crowds, so Adam choose a sheathed dagger to place in his belt. Always being prepared had long ago been ingrained into Adam and his friends would likely be taking daggers with them as well. In addition, Adam also took his flute. He never knew when inspiration would hit him!


    After gearing up, Adam met with Alfred, Bruno, Clyde, Derek, Franklin, Helen, and Kadara. At Helen¡¯s feet was a rather large wolf acting like a puppy! Silber had grown a lot and had even been trained to support Adam in a fight! Regardless, Silber would listen to Helen before anyone else and always acted like he was still a puppy around her!


    Out of them all, only Derek had a night shift and he was doing everything he could to weasel his way out of it.


    ¡°They¡¯re so busy, they won¡¯t notice one missing person will they?¡±


    A siren¡¯s voice called out to them: ¡°You wouldn¡¯t be doing something like skipping out of your shift, would you Derek?¡±


    Derek froze in fright before rigidly turning around: ¡°N-no Susan, why would you think such a thing?¡±


    Susan flashed a charming and innocent smile that secretly held a demon behind it!


    ¡°Oh, well I was tasked by Madame Janette to make sure no one was skipping their shifts. I was going to head over to the Tavern next, why don¡¯t we go together?¡±


    Without waiting for Derek¡¯s reply, Susan firmly wrapped her arm around his and started dragging him away. Derek cast a last desperate look to his friends, none of which could look him in the eye. He mouthed to them: ¡°I¡¯ll remember this!¡±


    Ignoring the fact that they were now a man down, Adam and the others walked out onto the brightly lit roads of Hessler that were full of bustling people. Temporary stalls were erected all over the place. Some of these stalls sold food while others held games where you could win a prize if you beat the game! There were also performers dotted around. The performers ranged from jugglers to musicians and everything in between! Despite the noisy racket caused by the chaos of the streets, everyone was in a festive mood! One couldn¡¯t help feeling good with a belly full of food while excitement hung in the air.


    Everyone had fun as they went from stall to stall, sampling food and games. Well, everyone except for Helen. Despite joining them, she couldn¡¯t shake the melancholy that this day meant for her: the anniversary of her parent¡¯s death. Everyone could see it, but there wasn¡¯t much they could do. None of them were going to say: ¡°Forget about your parents for a bit and have fun!¡± They could only keep on inviting her to join them and hope they could keep her away from thoughts about her parents.


    Silber was rather excellent in this regard. With him constantly fawning for attention from her, she didn¡¯t have much time to let her thoughts wander. Still, she just couldn¡¯t get cheery.


    Alfred had been taking a while on a particular game. He had to throw darts at a target and rack up enough points to get a prize. No matter how hard he tried, he couldn¡¯t get enough points! Eventually, he started to run out of money. He asked the rest of them: ¡°Hey, uh, can I borrow some money from someone?¡±


    Bruno and Clyde immediately guarded their coin purses: ¡°This is our hard earned money, you ain''t getting any of it!¡±


    ¡°C¡¯mon, I¡¯ll be turning sixteen soon. Consider it an early birthday present.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯ve been using that excuse for the last couple months! Just because you¡¯ll be leaving Madame¡¯s doesn¡¯t mean you can take our money! We¡¯ll have no more of it!¡±


    Giving up on the twins Alfred managed to wrangle a little off Franklin, but his abysmal skill at the game meant he still couldn¡¯t get a prize! Adam couldn¡¯t help but sigh and shake his head. Alfred was clearly going for a particular stuffed wolf animal Helen had been eying. Even though Helen still refused either of them, neither Adam nor Alfred had given up on trying to win her heart.


    Alfred dejectedly threw his last dart. He turned around as the dart hit the target, already knowing there was no way he had enough points to win the prize: ¡°Winner!¡±


    Alfred froze and quickly turned around! The center target of the dartboard was only 1 centimeter across and he had somehow hit it! It meant he got an instant win! Alfred immediately claimed the stuffed wolf animal and presented it to Helen.


    Helen brightened up a little: ¡°Thank you, Alfred.¡±


    Alfred did his best to hide the smug pride he felt inside for this small victory in winning her heart. He couldn¡¯t hide it from Adam though, as he could clearly see his Aura. But then Helen turned to Silber: ¡°Look, we got you a little friend!¡±


    Silber gleefully bit the stuffed wolf and shook it left and right! Helen laughed as she fought for a leg of the stuffed wolf to play tug of war with Silber. Seeing this, Alfred¡¯s face immediately cramped up. With a sigh, Adam clapped him on the shoulder.


    ¡°Once again, Silber has outplayed us.¡±


    After Helen had her fill of playing with Silber, they moved on. They didn¡¯t have too much trouble sticking together until they hit one of the major city roads. Their little group got milled apart by the dense crowd moving through the road to get to one of the five big event stages that held acting performances around the city.Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more.


    Separated apart in groups of ones and twos, they tried to fight against the crowd to group back up. Adam found himself on his own. Normally his Spirit Sight would help him find the others quickly, but the dense amount of Auras from the crowd was proving difficult to sort through and was a little overwhelming.


    Adam found Silber with Helen and started making his way over to them. As he was moving towards her, Helen started moving away from him and the others. Adam tried to increase his speed so he could catch up to her, but the crowd prevented him from moving very fast. Before long, they had left the others behind. When Helen turned onto another street, Adam began to figure out where she was headed.


    ¡®She¡¯s going to the Hill Garden¡­¡¯


    Despite the fun she was having with Silber earlier, it seemed Helen was unable to shake the melancholy this day gave her.


    Adam followed her at a respectable distance. There was nothing he could really do to help her. He had found it easier to cope with Alric and Emilia¡¯s death. Part of it was that it occurred on a regular day. The Festival would always act as a reminder for her. He also didn¡¯t witness his father and sister¡¯s death. No matter how she was throughout the rest of the year, this day would always weigh on Helen.


    Reaching her secret spot at the Hill Garden, Helen sat down at the base of a tree. Silber sat down next to her, putting his head in her lap. With a gentle smile, Helen lightly pet Silber. Adam leaned against a tree out of sight as he watched over Helen.


    Adam noticed that petting Silber helped calm her Aura a little, but she was still depressed. After debating for a moment, Adam pulled out his flute to play a song for her. He wasn¡¯t going to play a fast-paced song nor an elegant song. Instead, he drew upon what he knew to try and play a song of remembrance that was also full of longing and love.


    The notes of the song were quiet and barely reached Helen. She found the song soothing. Adam watched her Aura gently tremble and relax under the song.


    As the last notes faded away, Helen sighed.


    ¡°You might as well come out.¡±


    Adam shyly smiled as he stepped out from the shadows.


    ¡°Sorry for following you.¡±


    Helen shook her head.


    ¡°It¡­ helps to be with someone else. I just couldn¡¯t stay at the Festival for much longer¡­¡±


    Adam nodded as he sat down on the other side of Silber to pet his back. They shared a long quiet moment like this: two people petting one dog. The quiet was suddenly pierced by a whistling sound ascending the sky! Then a cracking Boom! Echoed followed by a shower of sparks! It was the Festival fireworks!


    They were initially startled by the sounds, but Helen quickly became enamored by the fireworks that were continuously rising into the night sky. Adam couldn¡¯t see the fireworks, but he could see them reflected in Helen¡¯s Aura. Each time a boom echoed, her Aura rippled with wonder and glee. It was a beautiful sight to behold.


    After the fireworks were done, Silence once again reigned. Adam stood up first and offered his hand to Helen: ¡°Shall we go back?¡±


    Helen gratefully took his hand to help her up. Together, they set off to Madame¡¯s with Silber at their heels.


    The fireworks marked the end of most of the festivities for the night so the streets had started clearing up by the time Adam and Helen exited the Hill Garden.


    On their way, they took their normal shortcut through an alley. While they were entering the alley, Adam saw a man watching them. His Aura was¡­ dingy. After they entered the alley, the man gave off an odd whistle before making his way into the alley.


    Putting a hand behind Helen¡¯s elbow, he started walking faster while pulling her along. When Helen gave him a questioning look he said: ¡°We need to mo-¡±


    From the other end of the alley, another man with a similar Aura entered.


    ¡®Damn, that¡¯s what the whistle was for!¡¯


    Adam quickly whispered: ¡°When I charge, follow after me and try to escape!¡±


    Helen¡¯s eyes widened in fright as she looked between the men on either end of the alley and Adam. Adam turned to Silber and gave a series of sharp whistles. Silber dropped the stuffed wolf toy from his mouth and looked at Adam questioningly. He had never been commanded into attack mode in the city before. Adam then pointed at the two men and gave another sharp whistle for each. Silber looked at the two with understanding. His head lowered as he gave a low growl.


    The men approaching had yet to understand what Adam¡¯s movements meant. They continued at their own pace as they showily drew some daggers. One of the men said to them: ¡°Hey there pretty little missy. Why don¡¯t you come with us and we won¡¯t hurt the lad with you.¡±


    Helen froze at these words. Adam noticed this and dread seeped in. This was an attempt at kidnapping! Her memories of that terrible Festival night resurged with renewed vigor bringing a fresh wave of traumatic emotions.


    Not trusting her to move on her own now, Adam commanded Silber to attack the man behind them with a point and a whistle. He then charged forward and drew his dagger to attack the man before them!


    The two men were startled by this sudden move. They were more used to subdued targets that would either cower or beg with the rare one that would shout. They almost never actually encountered resistance!


    Caught off guard, Silber was able to bit the man¡¯s ankle and pull him to the ground! He then quickly jumped away as the man shrieked and swiped at Silber with his dagger: ¡°Away you mutt!¡±


    The man Adam was attacking tried to defend with his dagger. His hand was loose, though, and the dagger went flying as Adam struck it! The man looked at his empty hand aghast! Not leaving anything to chance, Adam struck the man once more. This strike sliced across his throat! Blood spurting, the man grasped his wound as Adam turned around and raced to the other man.


    The last man was clearly frightened. He had barely been able to get up under Silber¡¯s harassment. Seeing the state of his comrade, he turned around and quickly stumbled away. Silber growled and was about to give chase when Adam issued another few sharp whistles. Silber stopped growling and raised his head while wagging his tail while looking at Adam.


    Adam gave him a pet: ¡°Good boy.¡±


    Both Adam and Silber then turned their attention to Helen. During the fight, she had fallen to her bottom as her legs had turned to jelly. She was visibly shaking from the shock of the event.


    Adam turned her to look at him: ¡°It¡¯s okay Helen. It¡¯s over, we¡¯re okay.¡±


    Helen suddenly gave Adam a fierce hug as she began crying. He could only pat her back and murmur: ¡°It¡¯s okay.¡±


    Adam tried to not pay much attention to the dead man with the slit throat close by. His stomach knotted at the thought that the man was the second person he had killed in his life. He then started second-guessing his decision with the last attack he had done.


    Forcing himself to calm down, he mentally reprimanded himself: ¡®No! If you had let him live, he might have gone for his dagger and attack from behind! He might have even tried to hold Helen hostage!... Killing him was for the best.¡¯


    After a long moment, Helen took a deep breath and released Adam.


    ¡°I¡­ I¡¯m fine.¡±


    Adam helped Helen to get on her shaky feet. It was at this point that a guard showed up: ¡°What¡¯s this going on?¡±


    It took around an hour before the guard finally released Adam and Helen. Considering how authentic Helen¡¯s shock was and how their stories corroborated one another, the dead man was clearly the instigator and he had on charges with which to hold them.


    The rest of the way to Madame¡¯s, Helen leaned on Adam for support. Suffice it to say, they stuck to the brightly lit main roads this time. The whole way, Helen¡¯s Aura was in a constant state of turmoil. It was slowly calming down, but Adam was still concerned.


    Adam led the silent Helen all the way to her room in the dormitories. Unsure of what else he could do, he asked: ¡°Will you be okay?¡±


    Helen nodded. She stopped with her hand on the knob of her door for a moment as she seemed to think on something. She then turned to him and gave him a quick peck on the cheek: ¡°Thanks, Adam.¡±


    She then quickly entered her room and closed the door in Adam¡¯s reddening face. Adam turned to Silber who somehow seemed to be amused.


    ¡°C¡¯mon. Let¡¯s get you back to Julianne¡¯s house.¡±

 Chapter 26 Rumors

    Rumors


    Arriving at the cafeteria for breakfast, Adam could already hear Alfred and the others in some sort of heated discussion. Nearby, Helen was ladling some porridge into a bowl. Adam gave a slightly awkward wave: ¡°H-hey Helen.¡±


    Adam still wasn¡¯t entirely sure what that kiss on his cheek last night meant. Based on how Helen also gave him a similarly awkward wave before sitting down with some other girls, Adam thought that she wasn¡¯t sure what it meant either! Her Aura also seemed a little disturbed, but that could mean anything considering what had happened the previous night. He was also very bad when it came to reading a girl¡¯s emotions.


    ¡®Well, it¡¯s better than saying it was just a thank you. I¡¯ll take my small wins where I can!¡¯


    With the events of the previous night flashing through his mind, Adam thought of the man he killed. He quickly shook his heads to cast those thoughts aside. Dwelling on it wouldn¡¯t do him any good. Instead, Adam joined Alfred and the others for breakfast.


    As he sat down, Alfred accosted him: ¡°You and Helen went missing last night! You didn¡¯t steal a march on me, did you!?¡±


    Adam decided to give Alfred a smug look as he said: ¡°Maybe a little.¡±


    Alfred was aghast: ¡°What!? After I worked so hard on that stuffed wolf, you came out winning? Totally unfair!¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t help laughing. Alfred continued with: ¡°Don¡¯t think this means I¡¯ll be relenting! Sure I¡¯ll be leaving next month when I turn sixteen, but that distance will create a sense of mystery that Helen will have to explore! That is when I¡¯ll steal her heart!¡±


    Kadara couldn¡¯t help a vehement laugh: ¡°Sure, keep daydreaming there.¡±


    Alfred gave her an indignant look before turning back to Adam: ¡°So, what happened last night?¡±


    With a sigh, Adam recounted the previous nights¡¯ events. By the end of it, Alfred was speechless. Putting aside the lovely moments the two of them shared, Helen had been in danger! Actual danger where she could have disappeared forever! It could happen again at any time!


    Seeming to have made up his mind about something, Alfred stood up and walked over to Helen. Interrupting her conversation with her friends, he grabbed her shoulders and turned her toward him saying: ¡°Helen, marry me!¡±


    Out of reflex from him suddenly getting so close, Helen responded with a slap! After everyone was momentarily startled by the suddenness of everything, Helen continued with a glare: ¡°What¡¯s with you, Alfred?¡±


    ¡°Ah, well, I heard what happened last night. I kinda¡­ felt like I had to say it before it was too late and uh¡­. yeah, I guess not.¡±


    As he was talking, Alfred shrunk under everyone¡¯s scrutinizing gaze. He only now realized how stupid and foolish it was to expect Helen to react positively to his sudden confession. With embarrassment etched all over his face, Alfred fled from the cafeteria.


    Kadara was giggling with delight: ¡°Best breakfast entertainment ever!¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam was surprised when he was summoned to Madame Janette¡¯s office later in the day. As he approached, Adam could see Isley was also in the office with his Spirit Sight.


    ¡®Something with the Silver Saviors?¡¯ Adam thought.


    Adam gave a quick knock before entering the office. Isley stood up and was the first to greet him: ¡°Good to see you, Adam. Sorry to call on you like this.¡±


    ¡°Good to see you too, Isley. What¡¯s going on?¡±


    ¡°As I was telling Janette, we¡¯ve received a request to track down a possible Ghul up in the Hayden Mountains to the east. We need every tracker we can get to comb through those mountains, so Boss was hoping to recruit you and Silber for the mission.¡±


    Janette interrupted: ¡°And as I was asking Isley, isn¡¯t it a little dangerous to send you after a Ghul? I don¡¯t mean to sound abrasive Isley but the last time your band went against a Ghul you lost a few of your own.¡±


    Isley nodded: ¡°When that happened, we were only equipped for hunting boars, not fighting a Ghul Bear. Not only will we be prepared this time, Boss will be coming along. If you don¡¯t know what a Spirit Martial Artist is, I can try to explain it to you. Suffice it to say, Boss is strong enough to tank a Ghul on his own! Even a handful wouldn¡¯t be a match for him! That aside, we don¡¯t even know for sure that we¡¯re going up against a Ghul. All we¡¯ve got are rumors of one.¡±


    Janette cast a questioning gaze over to Adam. Adam nodded to her unspoken question. He also added: ¡°I know it¡¯s hard to believe, but Heinrich can launch multiple logs tens of meters with a single swing of his ax! If he¡¯s coming along to be the front line fighter, I have little to worry about.¡±


    Janette sighed: ¡°Well, Vivi has been letting you make your own decisions. Just make sure to talk to her about this before the day is out!¡±This novel''s true home is a different platform. Support the author by finding it there.


    Adam nodded with a smile: ¡°Of course!¡±


    Isley spoke: ¡°Good. I¡¯ll be your partner during the mission.¡±


    ¡°Partner?¡±


    Isley nodded: ¡°Each tracker will have a partner equipped for combat with them. That being said, if Alfred or the others ask, they aren¡¯t allowed to participate in the mission! They¡¯re good, but we have plenty of members with more experience in combat.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    A few days later, Adam prepared to leave with the Silver Saviors with Silber. His friends gathered to see them off.


    Alfred spoke first: ¡°I¡¯m the one that¡¯s going to be joining them as a full-fledged member soon, so why are you the one that gets to go on this mission!?¡±


    Adam could only helplessly shrug. Alfred had been constantly bringing this up the last few days and nothing anybody said could pacify him. After what happened during the Festival night, Alfred seemed determined to not let Adam outdo him in anything else. Adam had learned to just shrug and let Alfred do what he wanted. It was easier that way.


    To a far lesser degree, the others were also taken aback that only Adam was going on this mission. Derek spoke next: ¡°Just cuz you¡¯re leaving us in the dust on this one doesn¡¯t mean that you¡¯re better than the rest of us! I¡¯ll show you when you return!¡±


    With that, Derek ran off without waiting for a reply. Kadara shook her head: ¡°I¡¯ll be more straightforward than these idiots; comeback safe and tell us all the details of your mission!¡±


    Bruno, Clyde, and Franklin shared Kadara¡¯s sentiments. Vivienne gave Adam a big hug goodbye, making him a little embarrassed as she gushed over him in front of the others. Then finally, it was Helen. They stood awkwardly for a moment before Helen started fixing a fold on his collar that stuck out from his leather armor.


    ¡°You always get into trouble. Make sure you stay safe, okay?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°I¡¯ll be back before too long.¡±


    ¡°Good, I¡¯ll see you when you get back.¡±


    Next, she knelt down to Silber and gave him a big hug before ruffling his fur: ¡°Take care of Adam, kay?¡±


    Silber responded with a happy bark. Helen chuckled at this before considering something for a moment. Suddenly, she gave Adam a quick peck on the cheek before scurrying away with a flushed face! A few of the Silver Saviors who saw this started whooping for Adam who stood with a shocked expression. Similarly, Alfred stood stock still. After a moment, he shouted at Adam: ¡°You may be winning now, but it won¡¯t be forever!¡±


    Alfred then ran off on his own. Isley took this moment to bring Adam out of his stupor. Putting an arm around his shoulder, Isley leaned in and said: ¡°You can¡¯t lock up every time a girl kisses you. You won¡¯t get anywhere in life like that!¡±


    ¡°Y-yeah.¡± Was all that Adam managed to respond with. Slowly, a grin began to creep across his face as the implications of the two pecks Helen had given him started to become clear. Kadara took this chance to say one final farewell before leaving: ¡°Well, that¡¯s a creepy smile. C¡¯ya around Adam! Later Silber!¡±


    Bruno, Clyde, and Franklin left with Kadara. Slapping his cheeks, Adam tried to get his mind back on task. There was a long road ahead of him and distractions could be deadly!


    -----------------------------------------


    Ambling along the road, Adam spoke to Isley: ¡°I never got the chance to ask, but what are the rumors we are following?¡±


    ¡°Oh, I guess I didn¡¯t fully explain. Well, loud roars are being heard in the Hayden Mountains. Roars on their own would arouse suspicion, but these roars can be heard by a stretch of villages and towns spanning fifty kilometers around the mountains!¡±


    Adam¡¯s eyes widened: ¡°Are we dealing with a horde!?¡±


    Isley shook his head: ¡°The roars happen at regular intervals. Based on that it seems they are all hearing the same creature!¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°That doesn¡¯t sound like a regular Ghul.¡±


    Isley nodded: ¡°The other strange thing is that no one has gone missing during this time! Besides the wildlife being obviously agitated by the roars, nothing else has happened. No predators have gotten territorial and no mysterious disappearances from any of the villages or towns. At least, none that we know of. Nothing that would normally happen if there was a Ghul incursion have been noticed¡­ Frankly, we don¡¯t know what it is!¡±


    A few possibilities crept into Adam¡¯s mind. The creature could be a dragon, which was unlikely. Not only were dragons incredibly rare, someone would have seen it flying in the skies. Another possibility was a Guardian. Guardians are similar to Ghuls yet their complete opposite! Where Ghuls were vengeful and unstable, Guardians were calm protectors. However, Guardian¡¯s were rare. Not as rare as a dragon, but still¡­


    Putting those thoughts aside, Adam spoke: ¡°Dare I ask why we are investigating and not the army?¡±


    Isley sighed: ¡°Same old thing. It¡¯s hard to get through the Hayden Mountains so they act as a natural border defense. Very few soldiers are posted along it. Heider won¡¯t redirect anyone out there just based on these odd rumors.¡±


    ¡°But there¡¯s something out there! Regardless of what it is, there¡¯s definitely something!¡± Adam responded.


    Isley shrugged: ¡°I agree, but it doesn¡¯t seem to be something malevolent. Since that¡¯s the case, Heider won¡¯t spend much effort on it.¡±


    Adam was truly exasperated. ¡°I can¡¯t believe our kingdom is like this!¡±


    Isley laughed: ¡°Heider is hardly unique, Adam. Some kingdoms might be better or worse, but Heider is pretty average in the way it handles disputes within its borders. In fact, Luxom handles things the exact same way!¡±


    The more Isley spoke about the subject, the more frustrated Adam got! Isley even compared Heider to Luxom! They were hardly the same! Adam grumbled: ¡°Let¡¯s stop talking about this.¡±


    Isley shrugged: ¡°Okay.¡±


    Adam sighed. ¡®Let¡¯s not bring that up again. This trip is long enough without talking about something so frustrating! I can¡¯t believe Isley even compared us to Luxom! They¡¯re just a bunch of cruel despots!¡¯


    Silber gave Adam a worried nudge. With a small smile beginning to form, Adam scratched behind Silber¡¯s ears.


    ¡°I¡¯ll be fine.¡±


    Adam put his mind back to the task at hand. Now that he had been training with them for a few years, the Silver Saviors wouldn¡¯t be so forgiving as when he traveled with them on the bandit subjugation mission. He wouldn¡¯t be able to rest on the wagon. He was going to have to march the whole way with everyone else.


    That alone would be tiring. After they finally reached their destination, though, the real work would begin! Adam couldn¡¯t afford to let his mind drift or let himself get frustrated at something he had no control over. He could only march forward and prepare for the worst while hoping for the best!

 Chapter 27 Hayden Mountains

    Hayden Mountains


    After close to a week of steady marching, the Silver Saviors finally arrived at the area of the Hayden Mountains where the roars could be heard. Here, they encountered a group of people traveling down the opposite side of the road. The group seemed distressed but relieved to see the Silver Saviors.


    A halt order was given as Heinrich moved forward to talk to the group. A man stepped to the front of the group and asked: ¡°Are you here to take care of the creature that has been roaring?¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°We have taken on a request to investigate and deal with it if we can. Can you tell us anything about it?¡±


    Shaking his head, the man said: ¡°Not much more than what you¡¯ve already heard. The roars can be heard a couple of times a day. Just simple roars wouldn¡¯t be so bad but the roars have become¡­ oppressive.¡±


    ¡°Oppressive?¡±


    The man nodded: ¡°It¡¯s hard to describe. I guess you could say it feels like something large is towering over you and ready to crush you! Many animals have started migrating away. Even we are leaving because we can¡¯t stand it! Please, take care of this soon so that we can return home!¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°We¡¯ll do what we ca-¡±


    ¡°-Ah, it¡¯s faint but can you hear it? It¡¯s roaring again!¡±


    All the Silver Saviors had been intently listening to the conversation. Now, they tried to hear what the man was trying to point out. There was a very faint sound that was barely audible that a few could point out. As Adam listened, he found the Spirit Essence floating in the air began to gently hum with an ominous tune!


    Adam spoke: ¡°I heard it, Boss. It¡¯s transmitting through Spirit Essence!¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°I can feel a faint prickle on my skin, too. Let¡¯s see what¡¯s causing this!¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    As they continued along the road, the world seemed to quiet down. Wildlife became sparse and the villages and towns they moved through felt like ghost towns. Many residents had vacated the area until the situation could be dealt with. All of this made the intermittent roars seem to be louder than they were.


    They also began to feel the oppressive nature of the roars. It felt like a great weight was pressing down upon their souls! The closer they got to the epicenter of the roars, the worse it got! All the dogs they brought along, Silber included, cowed under the roars. They wanted nothing more than to escape and return home.


    Adam had been trying to comfort and encourage the dispirited Silber: ¡°Hang in there, boy. We¡¯re close to the source of whatever is roaring. We¡¯ll take care of it soon enough and everything can go back to normal!¡±


    Silber¡¯s only response was to give Adam¡¯s hand a lick before settling back into his dispirited posture. Adam sighed as he watched this. It reminded him too much of when he first picked Silber up.


    ¡®I hope we can take care of this fast.¡¯


    As that thought went through Adam¡¯s head, another massive roar echoed out! Every member of the Silver Saviors, besides Heinrich, flinched at the sound while the dogs whimpered under the sound. The roar lasted for almost a full minute before it died out! Many Silver Saviors found themselves on their knees, unable to take the massive weight that the roar pressed on them.


    After the roar had died out, Heinrich issued orders: ¡°We¡¯re stopping here! I can¡¯t imagine that thing being too far from where we are at. Let¡¯s set up a base camp before starting our search. We only have a few hours before that thing roars again. Let¡¯s get moving!¡±


    Adam faired better than most under the weight of the roar. Still, he was staggered by the overwhelming hum of the affected Spirit Essence in the air. He petted Silber, who was still spooked by the roar: ¡°See, it¡¯ll all be over soon if we work fast!¡±If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    They were able to quickly set up a small base beside the mountain path in under an hour. After that, they all spent a good two hours ardently searching for the source of the roaring. They were hoping to find it before the roar once again echoed across the mountains. Unfortunately, they just weren¡¯t fast enough.


    As another roar echoed through the mountains, Adam held onto Silber who was just about to fail to resist the urge to run away. Adam himself was just about to fall over under the pressure of the roar!


    ¡®Is it getting worse!? We have to find this thing fast!¡¯


    Isley had the worst of it! By the time the roar passed, he was on his hands and knees! Panting, he barely managed to get up: ¡°Huff, let¡¯s return to camp. I¡¯m not sure I can continue like this.¡±


    Adam nodded. Due to his stress, Silber hadn¡¯t been helping very much in locating tracks. With the recent roar, he was too spooked to do any proper work.


    ¡°Come on, boy. Let¡¯s go rest back at camp.¡±


    Many had come to the same decision as Isley. Most felt some level of exhaustion after the last roar had echoed out. Someone had even fallen unconscious and had to be dragged back by their partner!


    Heinrich immediately showed interest: ¡°Where were they when this happened!?¡±


    The person reporting the situation to Heinrich shook his head: ¡°I¡¯m not certain.¡±


    ¡°Go find out. It has to be in the area where they were!¡±


    After finding the location where the man had fallen unconscious, Heinrich mustered a group of trackers who had been affected the least by the roars. Adam was included in this group.


    Adam gave Silber a fierce hug and a good pet. With how limited the use of the dogs had become, Heinrich decided to just have them stay at camp where the rest of the Silver Saviors could watch over them.


    ¡°Stay here with Isley. I¡¯ve still got my elemental sight and I¡¯m sure you don¡¯t want to get any closer to that roar than we already are.¡±


    Silber whimpered as he licked Adam¡¯s hand. Adam gave a small smile as he petted Silber again: ¡°It¡¯ll be alright. Everything will be over soon, just wait for me.¡±


    Adam then left with Heinrich¡¯s group. Before long, they found themselves in the area where the man had fallen unconscious. Heinrich gave them orders: ¡°Fan out but stick close to each other. Keep an eye out for caves or burrows. I¡¯m sure this thing is holed up somewhere.¡±


    As they searched, Adam could tell they were on the right track. The Spirit Essence hanging in the air had begun to faintly hum. The longer they stayed in the area, the worse it got.


    Adam spoke up: ¡°Boss?¡±


    Heinrich turned to him: ¡°Can you feel it too? I can feel Spirit Essence thrumming in the ground.¡±


    Now that Heinrich mentioned it, Adam could see the ground was faintly pulsating. Adam shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t know that it¡¯s a good idea to continue. Whatever is causing this is more than a Ghul. I don¡¯t know what it is!¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°Which unfortunately means we need to find it to figure out what it is. Depending on the situation, we¡¯ll retreat to get some backup. My hope is that a bunch of Spirit Essence has accumulated somewhere here and that whatever is drawing its power isn¡¯t strong enough to control it.¡±


    ¡°I hope you¡¯re right.¡± Adam said as his gaze slid along the ground, following the thrum of the Earth Essence. It was then that Adam noticed something odd along a large jut of rock sticking out from the ground; a portion of it wasn¡¯t solid! Behind a sheet of stone was a cave!


    ¡°Boss, there¡¯s rock covering a cave under that jut!¡±


    Everyone stopped to look where Adam pointed. Heinrich squinted as he looked at the rock face of the jut. ¡°Would you look at that.¡±


    Now that Adam had pointed it out, Heinrich could see an unnatural difference in the stone. Heinrich walked up to the stone face, cocked a fist back, and then punched straight into the face of the stone! With a crack, the stone collapsed under his fist as a hole formed. After another series of punches and kicks, an opening was made.


    Heinrich turned to those around him: ¡°Something made that with Earth Essence! This is definitely worth checking out. Adam, I¡¯ll need your eyes in there.¡±


    ¡°Yes, sir.¡±


    ¡°Stay behind me at all times. George, Jenn, I want you protecting Adam¡¯s flanks!


    ¡°Sir.¡± ¡°Sir.¡±


    A man and woman both spoke and moved to Adam¡¯s side.


    ¡°Scott, go back and inform camp of what¡¯s going on. The rest of you, form a perimeter here.¡±


    Someone spoke: ¡°You sure you don¡¯t want to take more of us in?¡±


    Heinrich shook his head: ¡°This is more of a scouting run. A smaller group is better.¡±


    Heinrich then turned to Adam, George, and Jenn. ¡°Now, let¡¯s go see if anybody is home.¡±

 Chapter 28 Cavern

    Cavern


    As they marched deeper into the cave, it quickly became dark. Darker than even a moonless night! Heinrich hesitated to light a torch. It could help them see, but it was also an extremely bright beacon to tell whatever was dwelling within the cave that they were there.


    Heinrich whispered back: ¡°Adam, how well can you see?¡±


    The darkness did not affect Adam very much. His Spirit Sight did not rely on light, but the presence of Spirit Essence itself. He did notice the sudden drop in light essence, though. He had never realized just how much light saturated the world until now.


    Whispering back, Adam said: ¡°I can easily see thirty or so meters around us. If I narrow my vision, a hundred meters should be no problem.¡±


    Under Heinrich''s direction, everyone continued forward with their hands on the walls of the cave while Adam looked out for anything in their way or branching paths in the cave.


    After continuing down the cave in silence for about ten minutes, a light green hue began to light up the cave! Spotted here and there along the walls, luminescent fungi were growing!


    Heinrich sighed: ¡°Well, at least we don¡¯t have to fight in complete darkness.¡±


    George whispered from Adam¡¯s side: ¡°How much further do you think this cave goes?¡±


    Heinrich shrugged: ¡°If the entrance was any indicator, a Spiritualist that could control Earth Essence went through here. If they decided to dig this cave out deeper than it originally was¡­ we could be here for hours yet.¡±


    Jenn shuddered: ¡°I hope not. If the roars really are coming from somewhere in this cave, it will be far worse hearing it roar in here than it was out there.¡±


    With that dreadful thought hanging in the air, they continued forward as quiet as they could. The further they got into the cave, the more glowing fungi grew on the cavern walls. After what felt like an eternity of walking, the cave opened up into a large cavern!


    The cavern was rather large and spacious. Strewn across the floor, stalagmites rose up and sometimes met stalactites hanging from the ceiling. However, it was clear that none of these were naturally formed! They were grouped together into artistic patterns and there was even sand on the ground as though someone was making a rock garden out of them! In the center of the cavern, a pool of water stood. Faintly the sound of dripping water could be heard echoing across the cavern.


    Heinrich stopped short of entering the cavern and whispered to Adam: ¡°Do you see anything?¡±


    Adam was awed by the cavern. Everything was touched by Earth Essence in a way he hadn¡¯t ever seen before! Surprisingly, even the pool of water was rich with Earth Essence! There was also a thrum in the air that only Adam could hear. He tried to describe all of this to Heinrich.


    Frowning, he responded: ¡°I¡¯m not sure what to think of it, but I can also feel something here. As I said before, a Spiritualist was definitely here at some point. Whether they caused this or this was the reason they came... Let¡¯s proceed further in. We¡¯ll move around the stalagmites. Adam, tell me the moment you discover anything else!¡±


    As they moved, Adam continued investigating the cavern with his Spirit Sight. He found his sight was constantly dragged to the center of the cavern where the pool was! It was like there was something there begging for his attention. After spending some more time looking at it, Adam began to notice a shape lying at the bottom of the pool. A part of it stretched up and onto the shoreline and rested there.


    Adam froze as he began to recognize the shape! With a pale face, Adam whispered: ¡°Boss!¡±


    The other three stopped with Adam. He shakily pointed a finger at what looked like a large rock by the pool. However, that was no rock. Adam forced one more word out of his mouth: ¡°Dragon!¡±


    Unfortunately, it came out louder than he intended! The word echoed across the cavern and the Dragon twitched! Heinrich frantically whispered: ¡°Hide!¡±


    They dove behind a stalagmite that would block the Dragon¡¯s view of them. Heinrich wasn¡¯t sure it would work, but it was better than standing out in the open!


    The droning thrum in the air grew louder as the hulking form of the dragon began to stir. Adam watched in awe and terror as the earth essence within the cavern began to¡­ pulse! It was as though the Dragon¡¯s heart had begun to beat and the Earth Essence resonated with it!


    A crash of water could be heard as the Dragon rose up from the pool. A low grumble could be heard emanating from its throat. The ground itself seemed to tremble before it! Earth Essence began surging through the dragon¡¯s body in larger and larger amounts. As this happened, the rocky looking scales that covered its body began to take on a deeper golden color! Even as the Dragon became densely cloaked in Earth Essence, Adam noticed an oddity with the Dragon¡¯s soul; it was in chaos!


    It seemed that the Dragon¡¯s soul was fighting against the Earth Essence in its body! The dragon shook its head as though to clear its mind. Its gaping maw then opened wide as it gave a furious roar!


    The four of them clutched their heads as the roar passed over them. Not only was there a great force pressing down on their souls from the Dragon¡¯s roar, but the concussive blast of it was enormous! Adam quickly fell to his knees while George and Jenn fell to the ground!


    Despite the pain assailing him, Adam did notice one thing. The dragon¡¯s roar wasn¡¯t actually one of fury. Nor was it somehow malicious. No, the dragon was roaring in pain!


    Among them, Heinrich was the least affected. Doubting whether the other three could even live if they had to endure this roar for a minute or more, Heinrich took halting steps out from behind the stalagmite!Stolen story; please report.


    Suddenly having something besides the pain to focus on, the Dragon¡¯s roar died out as it looked at this human that had found himself within its lair. Without the roar to press down his soul, Adam was able to stumble up. George and Jenn remained on the ground, groaning in pain.


    Free from the pressure himself, Heinrich pulled the giant ax from his back. The dragon responded with an aggressive rumble from its throat while lowering itself on its haunches. It also tried to spread out its wings, but the cavern was too small and the various stalagmites and stalactites wouldn¡¯t allow it to comfortably spread them. Heinrich yelled out: ¡°Adam, escape the moment you see an opportunity!¡±


    Without waiting for a response, Heinrich launched himself at the dragon with a war cry! Adam was momentarily shocked: ¡®Is he really going to attack a dragon!?¡¯


    Heinrich didn¡¯t so much as attack, but harass the dragon. In a straight up strength contest, Heinrich was sure to lose! His only chance was to strike fast and distract it. His first move was to slash at the dragon¡¯s side while rushing past it! Sparks flared and left only a scratch on the scute scales protecting the Dragon¡¯s side!


    Giving Heinrich and evil glare, the dragon lashed out with its tail like a whip! Heinrich barely moved in time to avoid the strike! The Dragon followed up by smashing at him with a clawed hand! Heinrich once again dodged while moving behind a stalagmite. A wise move, as the ground erupted in an explosion of Earth Essence caused by the dragon! The stalagmite protected Heinrich from the exploding debris.


    Adam was stunned by the spectacle. He could see the Earth Essence surge each time Heinrich and the dragon moved or attacked. He also realized one thing: he was too slow to make it to the exit! They moved so fast during their exchanges, Adam wasn¡¯t even sure he could safely make it to the next stalagmite, let alone George and Jenn who were still recovering from the roar!


    Adam frowned: ¡®Even if I were to escape, what about Heinrich? I doubt the dragon would let him get away so easily¡­ we need some kind of distraction¡­¡¯


    Really, there was only one thing Adam could do. He didn¡¯t know if it would actually make a distraction or not. Still, it was the only other option. Adam pulled his flute out and thought: ¡®What should I perform to distract it?¡¯


    Adam looked at the dragon¡¯s soul that no longer seemed to be in chaos. Now that it had something it could focus on, its soul no longer fought against its body. Adam noted that the Dragon''s soul was similar to a human¡¯s. While it was primarily formed of Earth Essence, there were still other types mixed in. These were likely the cause of the chaos in its soul.


    ¡®If I can cause it to fall into chaos again¡­¡¯


    Adam listened to the cavern, looking for inspiration. Beyond the sounds of battle, he could hear the water essence in the pool. The light essence emitted by the mushrooms. A draft of wind coming from somewhere within the cave. Thinking back to what he learned in SIH, there were ways he could use these types of Spirit Essence against Earth.


    Water Essence can erode Earth. Wind Essence seeks to move through all things and it would love nothing more than to whistle through any crevasse Earth formed. Light Essence sought to illuminate the darkness the Earth hides.


    Now with an idea of how to turn these types of Essence against Earth, Adam put the flute to his lips and began to perform! At first, his notes were drowned out by the sounds of fighting. Slowly, though, Spirit Essence began to infuse and enhance the song Adam was crafting! Both the dragon and Heinrich began to hear the song! It was a song of strife and turmoil. It was a song where the entire world rose up to spite one thing: Earth Essence! While the other types of Essence easily danced to his tune, the Earth Essence tried to resist. But, it had no choice¡­ the song was just too irresistible to not dance along with it!


    Having heard the song, Heinrich inwardly cursed. It was now apparent that Adam hadn¡¯t escaped. As for the dragon, its attacks began to slow down giving Heinrich some breathing room! As the song progressed, the dragon began shaking its head, as though it were losing focus. Adam could see the Spirit Essence in the dragon¡¯s soul roiling at the sound of his song!


    At this point, Heinrich began to notice the Earth Essence in his body began to act sluggishly too! However, it didn¡¯t seem to affect him as much as the Dragon.


    Looking at the result, Adam felt a swell of excitement in his chest: ¡®It¡¯s actually working!¡¯


    As the pain of the Dragon¡¯s soul lashing out against its body increased, it became easier and easier for Heinrich to dodge its attacks. Now having time to make a proper attack, Heinrich would occasionally stop at the Dragon¡¯s side so that his feet were firmly planted to make a strong strike! Unlike his fast glancing attacks, the strong ones bit into the scale! Before long, the Dragon had multiple bleeding lines across its body.


    Adam marveled at the blood. It was like liquid Earth Essence flowing from the Dragon¡¯s body! If he could actually see, Adam would¡¯ve also noted its color. While the blood still was red, it seemed to have an inner glow of golden brown!


    Unfortunately, these cuts were shallow. Most of the Dragon¡¯s scales were thick and hard. Only at its joints, where it needed more flexibility, were the scales thinner. But that would put Heinrich directly next to one of its claws or right under its head! No matter how slow the Dragon was becoming, there was no way Heinrich could dodge its attack if he got that close.


    Finally, the Dragon couldn¡¯t take it anymore. The pain of its soul lashing out against its body and the pain of all the cuts along its body became too much. It lifted its head up high and breathed in deep. It was going to bellow out a roar!


    With a final war cry, Heinrich appeared in front of the Dragon! With a mighty swing of his ax, he chopped at the spot where the Dragon¡¯s neck met its body. In this spot, was not the thick and hard scute scales that covered most of its body. No, here there were interlocking scales that were thinner and more flexible. Heinrich¡¯s ax cut deep through the scales and into the Dragon¡¯s neck!


    The Dragon suddenly choked! Heinrich pulled his ax out and quickly retreated as a torrent of blood fled the Dragon¡¯s body! The Dragon toppled back and fell into the pool of water with a splash!


    Adam watched as the Dragon weakened. He stopped playing his flute and relaxed. They had won! Adam noticed something, though. The Dragon¡¯s soul¡­ was calm! It was being released from the burden of its body which allowed it to finally achieve peace.


    Heinrich, however, didn¡¯t relax! He ran back while shouting: ¡°ADAM!¡±


    It was then that Adam finally remembered the final terror of dragons. They were difficult to fight, especially when could fly. But when they died, all the Essence in their bodies¡­ exploded!


    Even as Adam watched, he saw Death overtake the Dragon¡¯s body. The Dragon¡¯s hold on the Earth Essence within its body quickly deteriorated and it all came rushing out! Heinrich quickly covered Adam as the water within the pool surged out! The Earth Essence was so thick in the air, even Heinrich could see it as it exploded outward! The Dragon¡¯s Earth Essence rammed against Heinrich¡¯s body but he was furiously cycling his own through his body. He prevented any of the exploding Essence from touching Adam, George, or Jenn.


    The cavern rumbled as the Earth Essence passed through the rock to rush up toward the surface. Then, it was gone. Adam stood breathless, but it wasn¡¯t over yet. While the explosion was terrible in its own way, that was not the reason it was referred to as the final terror of a dragon. Heinrich picked up George and Jenn, who still couldn¡¯t get on their feet. Slinging each over one of his shoulders, Heinrich spoke: ¡°We need to move fast. There¡¯s no telling how many Ghuls all that Earth Essence will create!¡±

 Chapter 29 Geisttier

    Geisttier


    Adam and Heinrich ran as fast as they could to cave¡¯s exit. Towards the end, they saw torches ahead with a pair of Silver Saviors carefully making their way towards them. They looked relieved when Adam and Heinrich came into view: ¡°Boss, what happened? We saw an odd torrent of golden light rush out from the ground!¡±


    ¡°That was a Dragon¡¯s death! Help Adam get George and Jenn back to camp. I need to get back to camp and organize hunting parties.¡±


    ¡°A Dragon!? And¡­ Hunting parties, sir?¡±


    Heinrich gave a grim nod: ¡°That golden light you saw can make Ghuls!¡±


    The man paled: ¡°A clump swept through Terry! He began to feel ill when we left the others back at the entrance!¡±


    Heinrich placed George and Jenn down before taking one of the men¡¯s torch and ran out of the cave faster than any of them could follow! The two men numbly stared after Heinrich as Adam made to help Jenn.


    ¡°Come on, we don¡¯t have time to stand around!¡±


    By the time they exited the cave, Heinrich had already passed by. What he left behind, were two headless corpses and a depressed group of trackers.


    ¡°Terry! And¡­ was that Lewis?¡±


    One of the trackers nodded; ¡°Lewis was watching over Terry when he¡­ turned. We were too late to prevent Terry from infecting Lewis.¡±


    Carefully, Adam and the others placed George and Jenn down. They were finally starting to move, but their minds were still groggy.


    ¡°We need to prepare a fire to burn their bodies. We can¡¯t risk further Ghul corruption by moving them¡­¡±


    Adam looked at the dead bodies filled with a torrent of frenzied Earth Essence. He looked around and asked: ¡°Should some of us head back? Boss said we would need to send hunting parties out. It¡¯ll be hard for them to track anything with most of us here¡­¡±


    Someone agreed: ¡°I agree, some of us should head back.¡±


    Adam formed a small group that would head back to camp while the rest stayed to finish Terry and Lewis¡¯s cremation.


    The camp was a buzz of activity when Adam and the others got there. Squads were forming up and heading out. At the edge of the camp, there were Silver Saviors with their weapons drawn and pressed against the throats of unconscious men and dogs!


    Adam noticed that each of them had raging Earth Essence in their bodies! Among the three men and seven dogs, Adam spotted Silber!


    Adam ran over in a panic: Silber!¡±


    The Silver Saviors guarding these bodies stopped Adam: ¡°Stay back! They could turn at any moment! We¡¯ve already had three Ghuls in camp!¡±


    Adam could only stare at Silber¡¯s unmoving figure, whispering: ¡°I can¡¯t believe this¡­¡±


    Adam quickly ran through everything he learned about Ghuls in SIH. There was no cure for the condition, so it had to be stopped before they turned! Wounds infected with Ghul blood would eventually cause people to become Ghuls themselves. Purifying salt could be easily used to cleanse the wounds.


    ¡®But Silber isn¡¯t wounded! He¡¯s infected by a massive amount of Earth Essence, not Ghul¡¯s blood!¡±


    There was only one more thing that came to mind. There were Spirit Reserves throughout the world. Places where Spirit Essence pooled. Similar to the cave where the Dragon resided. Animals and even people who stay too long in such a place become infected with Spirit Essence. Most of these animals will either be warped by the Spirit Essence raging in their body and turn into Ghuls! An extreme few, however, adapt and take control of the Spirit Essence raging in their bodies to become something more! They become what is called a Geisttier or Spirit Animal in the tongue of the First Era.


    Ghuls are rampaging creatures that seek to kill anything not themselves, whereas Geisttier are protectors. They protect their Spirit Reserve and any of their kind that they find. They are peaceful animals until you threaten their ward. Then you will find their strength is greater than any single Ghul¡¯s!Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    Adam looked at the raging Earth Essence in Silber¡¯s body and his soul, which was being attacked. It was so very similar to the Dragon!


    ¡®Maybe¡­¡¯


    Adam brought his flute out. Instead of creating chaos, as he had done with the Dragon, Adam was going to try and organize the Earth Essence to work with Silber¡¯s soul!


    Adam already knew a song to subvert Earth Essence, but he needed more than that. He needed to make it work with Silber¡¯s soul, instead of attacking it. After that... Adam wasn¡¯t sure but it was all he had to work with!


    Adam began playing a tune to the quizzical looks of those around him. The moment Heinrich heard the music, he walked over. Deciding not to disturb Adam, he only spoke the Silver Saviors pressing their blades to the unconscious bodies: ¡°Don¡¯t disturb Adam. He might be able to help them.¡±


    The moment Adam began playing the tune, he noticed an immediate reaction in Silber and the others! But each had a different reaction! It was then that Adam finally thought of the others. Silber wasn¡¯t the only one suffering¡­ but he could only help one! Each of them had differing amount of Spirit Essence in their bodies and none of their souls were alike! Adam could adapt his song, but only to one of them.


    But¡­ who should he be helping first? He knew Silber, he had cared for him for two years! But the three Silver Saviors were human and had actual lives... Shouldn¡¯t he be helping them first?


    Adam faltered as he looked at each of them in turn. The raging Earth Essence in their bodies wasn¡¯t stopping and he had to make a decision fast! But there was a tangible difference between them; Adam wasn¡¯t familiar with the Silver Savior¡¯s souls! He could barely see them through the raging Earth Essence. He knew Silber and could more easily see Silber¡¯s soul. The decision had been made for him.


    A part of Adam was relieved, though he still felt bad. Silber was the one he had the best chance of helping¡­ Hopefully, there would be enough time to help the others.


    Adam continued playing his tune. Doing his best to prevent the Earth Essence in Silber¡¯s body from attacking his soul. Adam continued playing, trying to find a way forward for Silber. The minutes slowly passed by until a full hour had disappeared! During this time, the Silver Saviors and the dogs lying unconscious had begun to turn! one by one, they each became a Ghul and were run through by the Silver Saviors watching over them until only Silber was left.


    Adam was growing tired. The deaths of the others. his desperation in trying to save Silber. the effort required to control the Earth Essence. Each wore on Adam but he had to keep playing while hoping for a miracle. Hoping that Silber would pull through.


    Another hour passed and then another. The Silver Saviors watched as Adam continued trying to save Silber. They were disappointed Adam didn¡¯t save the three Silver Saviors, but they were considered lost before Adam had walked into camp. They had simply hoped Adam could give them a miracle that would never happen. There has never been a documented report where a human became a Geisttier. For whatever reason, humans can only become Ghuls!


    Eventually, Adam had to stop. He was too tired to continue playing. If he did, he was likely to make mistakes which would only make Silber¡¯s situation worse!


    Isley was next to Adam with a flask of water and some food: ¡°Here, you should eat and drink¡­ how¡¯s Silber?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°I don¡¯t know. I¡¯ve delayed it but¡­ I don¡¯t know if I¡¯ve actually done anything to help him¡­¡±


    ¡°... Well, you¡¯ve helped him live longer. That¡¯s better than what he could have had. He¡¯d have turned long ago like the others.¡±


    ¡°Have the search parties found any Ghuls?¡±


    Isley nodded: ¡°A few. Richard¡¯s group found a Ghul Squirrel of all things! Luckily, most the wildlife fled the area a few days ago. There are only a few creatures left here that can be turned into Ghuls. Otherwise, we might be knee deep in corpses!¡±


    Adam shook his head and cast his gaze back on Silber. The Earth Essence in his body was no longer raging in Silber¡¯s body, but it was still there. Silber¡¯s soul was no longer being attacked. In fact, as Adam watched, Silber¡¯s soul was reaching out to the Earth Essence!


    Adam breathed out a sigh: ¡°Of course, Silber is the one that needs to control the Earth Essence. I haven¡¯t let him do that at all!¡±


    Isley was surprised by this outburst: ¡°Does that mean-¡±


    Adam enthusiastically nodded: ¡°I think he¡¯s pulling through!¡±


    Adam stayed by Silber¡¯s side, watching over him. Whenever Silber¡¯s soul started to tire, Adam began to play his flute again to prevent the Earth Essence from raging and cutting loose what little control Silber had gained over it. When he looked stronger, Adam would stop playing to let Silber continue on his own.


    Adam kept this up well on into the night until¡­ he fell asleep. He couldn¡¯t help it, he was just so tired.


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam awoke with a start as something warm liked his face! Adam laughed at the familiar feeling: ¡°Silber, stop!¡±


    And then he realized what that meant! Adam¡¯s arms quickly found themselves around the wolf.


    ¡°Silber!¡±


    Silber responded with a happy bark. Adam then looked at him. Silber was¡­ glowing! The Earth Essence in Silber¡¯s body was no longer raging and was instead flowing through his body almost like blood! What Adam couldn¡¯t see was Silber¡¯s actual physical form. Silber¡¯s fur shined like liquid silver and radiated a faint bronze light!


    ¡°You did it! Oh buddy, I¡¯m so happy you made it!¡±

 Chapter 30 Hand In Hand

    Hand In Hand


    Adam could tell Silber was as relieved as he was. Though, it was more than just something Adam saw in Silber¡¯s posture or the way he acted, somehow Adam just¡­ felt it from Silber.


    The Silver Saviors around Adam had already noticed Silber¡¯s transformation. The men who were guarding Silber and the others sheathed their weapons.


    ¡°I can¡¯t believe you actually succeeded!¡±


    Murmurs of agreement spread. Adam could scarcely believe it himself! It didn¡¯t take long for Heinrich to hear and make his way over.


    With a boisterous grin, Heinrich spoke: ¡°I knew you¡¯d be able to do it!¡±


    Adam gave a weak smile in reply. He was still tired, despite the sleep he had managed to get. Heinrich continued: ¡°Why don¡¯t you get something to eat. Then let¡¯s see how Silber does, helping us track down some Ghuls!¡±


    Adam nodded. Despite how tired he felt, there was still a job to do. And an important one at that!


    Adam sat with Silber and ate some of the food that had been cooked earlier that morning. He couldn¡¯t help petting Silber after every other bite. He had been so close to losing him¡­ Silber also showed a rather large appetite, eating twice as much as he normally did!


    After they finished, Adam stood up and walked to Heinrich. Silber trotted along by his side. At the same time, Adam felt an odd sensation from Silber again. It was another feeling. Adam gave Silber an odd look, as he tried to understand it¡­ Silber was waiting¡­ following¡­ leader? It was odd how these feelings translated and Adam wasn¡¯t even sure if he was just imagining it.


    Adam shook his head: ¡°C¡¯mon, let¡¯s see what Boss has for us!¡±


    Heinrich waved Adam over when he saw him: ¡°I¡¯m giving you over to Isley and his group. It¡¯ll be one of the last patrols we send out.¡±


    Adam curiously asked: ¡°The last patrol? You think we¡¯ve already found all the Ghuls?¡±


    Heinrich shook his head: ¡°We¡¯ve been catching things as they turn and Ghuls that have yet to understand just what they can do. With this much time passing by¡­ it''s far too dangerous to send out random patrols! We will have to wait and check for signs of Ghul infestations. I can only hope the Earth Essence the Dragon sent out didn¡¯t go very far¡­ Regardless, I¡¯m hoping with Silber being a Geisttier that he might catch something we¡¯ve overlooked. It¡¯s worth a shot anyway.¡±


    Adam looked at Silber, who just cocked his head to the side while wagging his tail. Adam smiled and shook his head: ¡°I¡¯m not sure Silber knows exactly how he¡¯s changed. I¡¯ll grab my gear and then head out with Isley.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam kept a close eye on Silber during the patrol. Silber didn¡¯t do anything special that would suggest he was a Geisttier, besides his fur glowing. He seemed to be his exact same self if a little more energetic. Adam did notice, however, that everyone in the patrol group kept on glancing over at Silber. He was a marvelous sight to behold and they couldn¡¯t help admiring him.


    Most of the patrol was rather uneventful. There were no signs of Ghuls or most kinds of wildlife for that matter! Rather, that was until Silber¡¯s fur turned on end as he hunched low to the ground!


    Everyone stood still as they noticed this. Adam quietly asked: ¡°Silber, have you found¡­¡±


    Despite leaving half his question unasked, Adam felt a confirmation from Silber. Isley spoke: ¡°If Silber¡¯s found something, let him loose. We¡¯ll follow behind and we can see just what Silber is capable of!¡±


    Adam nodded ¡°You heard him, boy. Lead us on!¡±


    Silber took off¡­ faster than they could follow! Silber stood beyond the edge of the group, he had traveled almost ten meters in what seemed to be an instant! Silber gave a glance back and Adam felt a sense of indignation. Adam could almost hear Silber¡¯s thought: ¡®Why aren¡¯t you moving yet!?¡¯ Despite the gravity of the situation, Adam couldn¡¯t help a small chuckle. Silber was annoyed that they were so slow!


    Adam and the others quickly ran after Silber, who had to constantly stop in annoyance to let them catch up. A few minutes later, they finally caught up with Silber who had slowed to a crawl.


    As they silently stalked after Silber, he suddenly pounced on a burrow hole! Instead of slowly digging the burrow out, Silber was ripping the ground up in gigantic pieces! Everyone once again froze in surprise! Adam used his elemental sight to gaze through the ground and saw Silber¡¯s target!


    At that moment, a scree! Pierced the air, causing everyone to clutch their ears. A rabbit then fled from the burrow Silber was digging up! The rabbit that appeared before them was covered in gore from killing the other rabbits in its warren! Patches of fur were missing from the rabbit, revealing pale skin with blood veins pulsing with a sickly yellow color. It looked between each of them, deciding who to attack first!


    Before anyone could even shout the word ¡®Ghul!¡¯ Silber had pounced upon the rabbit and viciously bit down on its neck, shaking it left and right! The rabbit was clearly surprised that there was another creature in the world that could match its newfound strength and speed. It briefly kicked and screamed before becoming limp.


    Silber happily trotted over to Adam and placed the dead Ghul Rabbit at Adam¡¯s feet. He felt a sense of satisfaction and pride from Silber, who was wagging his tail while expectantly looking up at Adam. Adam smiled: ¡°Good boy!¡±


    Isley shook his head: ¡°Guess we now know what Silber is capable of¡­¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    The next day, Heinrich started marching the Silver Saviors back home. There was little more they could do without more men and supplies. They would have to alert the kingdom and they would hopefully send out a detachment of the army to patrol the area. At least they would be interested in recovering the Dragon¡¯s body. Just about every part of it could be sold at high prices! A few of the Silver Saviors had asked about keeping parts of it, but Heinrich stopped them. There was no doubt that the kingdom wouldn¡¯t let them keep any part of a dragon found in their territory, regardless of the fact that they were the ones to kill it.This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    At the few villages and towns they stopped at along the way, Silber drew everyone¡¯s attention. His luxurious fur was easily spotted in any crowd and he seemed rather pleased by the attention. Adam felt smug satisfaction from Silber whenever someone commented his fur.


    This was even more noticeable when they finally arrived at Hessler. The bustling streets of Hessler that would stop for nothing paused when the Silver Saviors arrived! Silber had run to the head of the marching Silver Saviors and proudly strutted in front of them, showing off for all to see.


    Adam shook his head at Silber¡¯s antics. He turned to Heinrich: ¡°If you don¡¯t mind, I¡¯ll take Silber and head home.¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°That is fine.¡±


    Adam ran up to Silber and spoke with a smile: ¡°Let¡¯s go surprise Helen and the others.¡±


    Silber seemed to like the Idea and quickly joined Adam as he started towards Madame¡¯s. Stares followed them along the road and more than one person asked to pet Silber. None of them realized just what Silber was as a Geisttier. If they did, they might have been more nervous than excited. Silber was stronger than a regular Human was. If he decided he wanted to knock you down and lick your face, there was no stopping him! Adam had found that out at his own expense on the way back to Hessler.


    Entering Madame¡¯s courtyard, Adam saw Alfred. He waved and called out: ¡°Alred!¡±


    Alfred quickly turned around: ¡°Adam! Your bac-¡±


    Alfred stopped speaking the moment he saw Silber. After a moment of silence he said: ¡°What¡­ what happened to Silber?¡±


    Adam sighed: ¡°It¡¯s a bit of a story. Is anyone else on break? I¡¯m sure everyone wants will want to hear it and I don¡¯t want to tell it ten times!¡±


    Alfred laughed: ¡°Sure. Helen just got off her shift. Bruno and Clyde are somewhere around too.¡±


    It didn¡¯t take that long for Adam to gather most of his friends up and tell them the startling story of how he faced a dragon! Helen intently listened to it while fawning over Silber¡¯s fur, to his delight.


    After Adam finished the story, Helen shook her head: ¡°That was too dangerous Adam. You need to be more careful! Also, you should probably prepare yourself when your mom hears about this. She¡¯s probably going to freak!¡±


    Adam inwardly groaned: ¡°Your right, but who would have ever expected a dragon!?¡±


    Throughout the rest of the day, Adam had to retell his story five times! It was fun the first one or two times, but saying the same things over and over got¡­ boring. To Helen¡¯s credit, Vivienne did ¡®freak¡¯ when she heard the story.


    After she calmed down, she gave Adam a fierce hug: ¡°I know you can¡¯t control everything about your missions, but please be careful Adam. I wouldn¡¯t be able to bear losing you¡­¡±


    Adam nodded as he hugged her back: ¡°Don¡¯t worry mom, I¡¯m not planning on hunting another dragon down any time soon. Or ever, really. That was scary!¡±


    When evening came, Adam found himself where he always went when he wanted to think or calm down; The Hill Garden. Helen was there and Silber was too. He sat back against a tree while Helen petted Silber in the grass.


    Adam still remembered the kiss on the cheek Helen had given him before they left. Looking at her now, butterflies floated in his stomach. That was until Silber rolled over for Helen to pet his belly. Adam shook his head with slight annoyance. Adam always knew Silber rather liked Helen, but the feeling he was getting¡­ Silber revered her more than him!


    ¡®I¡¯m his owner, aren¡¯t I!? Though, I suppose he actually lives with Julianne¡­ No, that doesn¡¯t matter! Shouldn¡¯t he like me more?¡¯


    Silber noticed Adam¡¯s anguish over the question, so he got up and trotted over and started licking his face. ¡°Oh, now you¡¯re going to try and butter me up? Don¡¯t think I didn¡¯t notice, you like her more than me!¡±


    Helen chuckled: ¡°Don¡¯t get jealous, Adam.¡±


    Adam didn¡¯t know how to reply to that. ¡®Did she mean not to get jealous that she was paying more attention to Silber, or that Silber was paying more attention to her? Gah- so complicated!¡¯


    Adam decided to simply pout and ask Silber: ¡°Why do you like her more than me?¡±


    He didn¡¯t really expect a proper response, but he still got one! Silber looked at Helen and Adam got a sense from him¡­ something higher. Then he looked at Adam as something a little lower.


    Adam shook his head. ¡°That doesn¡¯t tell me anything! It¡¯s just the same as you saying you like here more!¡±


    Helen sat between Adam and Silber to separate them; ¡°Don¡¯t fight, Adam.¡±


    Adam gave a sigh and then frowned when he sensed smugness coming from Silber. It was almost as if he was saying: ¡®See.¡¯ Then Adam put it all together and was horrified! It was terrible to have Helen angry at him so he always listened to her! If they were in a wolf pack, Helen was the alpha wolf! Adam saged against the tree in defeat.


    Moving past the reason why Silber like Helen more than him, Adam suddenly realized how close Helen was sitting next to him! He tensed up a little while thoughts raged in his mind: ¡®How do I find out what that kiss meant? Do I ask? Can I touch her hand? What do I do!?¡¯


    Helen solved some of his problems by leaning over onto his shoulder! She spoke softly: ¡°Adam?¡±


    ¡°Y-yes?¡±


    ¡°I¡­ don¡¯t like it when you go off on these missions. You always come back cut, bruised, or with a scary story like that dragon! I¡¯m afraid you won¡¯t come back one day¡­¡±


    Adam relaxed his muscles as he contemplated her words. ¡°Sometimes it does get rather dangerous, but¡­ I just feel like there is so much I could do out there! I helped calm that village¡¯s fire. I¡¯ve prevented bandits from preying on travelers. And that dragon¡­ Heinrich might not have made it out alive if I hadn¡¯t been there! Isn¡¯t it worth that chance if I can really make a difference out there for someone?¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s also a lot you could do here¡­ with me.¡±


    Adam¡¯s heart caught in his throat. A selfish decision started forming in his mind. He turned to Helen and she looked up. Adam gently leaned in and kissed her. A small voice in his mind screamed that she was going to push him away or slap him! But¡­ she didn¡¯t.


    Adam pulled back from his sloppy kiss, a little red in the face. He looked at her gorgeous rosy aura and said: ¡°I¡¯ll give it all up if you want me to.¡±


    Helen shook her head: ¡°I¡¯d like that, but¡­ I know you can handle yourself out there and you really do like doing those things. Maybe find a better way? Maybe I¡¯m just being selfish.¡±


    Adam gave her a smile: ¡°It¡¯s fine to be selfish. You¡¯re right, too! Anyone can fight a bandit, but few can¡­ control a fire like I can. It¡¯s my abilities as a Spiritualist that have always helped the most. Maybe, I should be putting more effort there. I¡¯ll speak to Heinrich tomorrow about this.¡±


    Helen smiled back and gave him a soft peck on the cheek before settling back down on his shoulder. Adam felt a sense of rightness. He couldn¡¯t help a broad grin from spreading further across his face.


    The two stayed like that for a while longer before finally heading back to Madame¡¯s, hand in hand.

 Chapter 31 Morning Gossip

    Morning Gossip


    Adam awoke the next morning. A little groggy at first, then excitement bubbled over as remembered the previous night. As he got ready for the morning, Adam¡¯s thoughts were jumbled.


    ¡®Now that Helen and I are¡­ a couple? I¡¯m sure that¡¯s right, though we never directly talked about it. Do we act any different from normal?¡¯


    Adam wouldn¡¯t mind holding Helen¡¯s hand whenever he could, but it would get a little embarrassing if everyone stared at them because of it. Or make jokes. Which they definitely would!


    ¡®Do we hide it then? No, that wouldn¡¯t be good. Also¡­ how should I talk to Alfred?¡¯


    Adam began brainstorming ideas about his little problem as he left his room. He was so concentrated on it, that he failed to notice who was waiting outside his room. Susan bounced on over to Adam.


    ¡°Heya Adam!¡±


    Adam was surprised by her sudden presence: ¡°O-oh, hey Susan.¡±


    ¡°I saw the most interesting thing last night!¡±


    Adam waited for Susan to elaborate, but she just expectantly looked at Adam. Adam inwardly groaned: ¡®Where is she going with this?¡¯


    ¡°What did you see?¡±


    ¡°I saw a boy and girl returning late at night, holding hands! Imagine the gossip!¡±


    Adam groaned, she was talking about him and Helen! He muttered: ¡°I should¡¯ve known.¡±


    Susan gave a delightful chuckle: ¡°Oh, I just wanted to tease you a little! But, I couldn¡¯t help but spill it to everyone I saw this morning, sorry!¡±


    Adam¡¯s head sunk: ¡®Well, maybe I won¡¯t have to figure out how to talk to Alfred about me and Helen.¡¯


    ¡°Well, you seem troubled by something so I¡¯ll leave you to it. Later!¡±


    Susan just about skipped away, oblivious to the ire rising in Adam. He muttered: ¡°How come she gets to be carefree!?¡±


    The rest of the morning was a mess. Adam didn¡¯t see Alfred anywhere around and wherever he went, people congratulated him with wide smiles. They weren¡¯t specific about what, but Adam was sure it wasn¡¯t about his last mission with the Silver Saviors.


    The only one to directly talk about the subject was Kadara. He was in the cafeteria eating breakfast with the others, except for Helen who had a morning shift at Madame¡¯s.


    She spoke emphatically: ¡°It¡¯s about time Helen finally chose a side!¡±


    Adam harumphed: ¡°Why does everyone have to be so concerned about this!? It¡¯s not their problem.¡±


    Kadara laughed: ¡°This ongoing thing between you, Alfred, and Helen has been a point of gossip for the last two years! It¡¯s big news for Madame¡¯s, now that Helen finally chose one of you. Of course everyone is going to talk about it! Not sure how Alfred¡¯s taking it, though.¡±


    Adam sighed. It was definitely going to be awkward talking to Alfred the next time they met. After he finished eating, he stood up saying: ¡°I¡¯ll be headed out for a bit.¡±


    Franklin asked: ¡°Where are you going?¡±


    ¡°I need to talk to Boss about something.¡±


    Bruno immediately became suspicious: ¡°You¡¯re not leaving the Silver Saviors now that you have a girlfriend, are you?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°No, but I don¡¯t want to go on dangerous missions like this last one again. I might take fewer missions, too! If facing that dragon proved anything, its that I need to work more on my abilities as a Spiritualist rather than my skill as a mercenary.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam knocked on the door to Heinrich¡¯s office: ¡°Hey Boss, it¡¯s Adam.¡±


    Adam heard Heinrich¡¯s voice from within: ¡°Adam! Come on in, I was thinking of talking to you!¡±


    Adam entered. The office was fairly well kept and Heinrich had a good view of the street from his window. Adam asked: ¡°You also wanted to talk?¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°Hessler is sending out a force to confirm the Dragon¡¯s corpse. I will be heading out with them tomorrow to show them the place. They¡¯ve promised a rather hefty reward if it proves true! I¡¯ll be splitting that among everyone who went, including you!¡±


    Adam was surprised. He hadn¡¯t been expecting a bonus! ¡°How much are they giving?¡±


    Heinrich laughed: ¡°Enough that everyone will get at least a gold coin!¡±


    ¡°A gold coin!?¡±


    A gold coin was worth enough that a family could comfortably live off it for ten years! Or, you could by a rather decent house within the city limits! And he was going to get one of these coins!


    Heinrich gave Adam a wide grin: ¡°I know, amazing. Especially since you¡¯ll be getting a larger portion.¡±


    Adam was flabberghasted: ¡°What?¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°I definitely wouldn¡¯t have been able to kill that dragon without your help. Since you contributed so much, of course you¡¯ll receive a larger portion than the others.¡±


    Adam stared blankly for a moment: ¡°Isn¡¯t that a little much?¡±Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.


    Heinrich waved his hand: ¡°Hardly. There are too many uses for a dragon¡¯s scales, blood, and bones. It is easily worth hundreds, if not a few thousand gold coins! Throwing a handful of that fortune our way for killing the dragon for them is the least they could do and I wouldn¡¯t dream of hoarding it all for myself. I wanted to advise you to think hard about how to spend that money. It¡¯d be easy enough to just buy a ton of gear or splurge it on something, but you should really find a way to spend it that will better your future! That aside, you also wanted to speak with me?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°Ah, yes. Well, I was going to talk to you about cutting back on missions. More specifically, dangerous ones like large bandit subjugations or¡­ Ghul hunting.¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°You are free to do so. I¡¯m making George and Jenn go on vacation as well. They still haven¡¯t fully recovered from Dragon. Heck, if you invest that coin right, you might not have to ever go on a mission again! Though, I¡¯m not that great with investments. I could be wrong on that.¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°The Silver Saviors help people. I still want to be part of that, just...¡±


    Heinrich chuckled: ¡°It¡¯s fine Adam, just do what¡¯s right for you. I¡¯ll admit, I¡¯m going be a little disappointed that we won¡¯t be able to use Silber but we¡¯ve made do without him until now. Having a Geisttier on hand would have really boosted our fame!¡±


    After that, Heinrich gave Adam a few more bits of advice before he left. On his way out, Adam saw Alfred coming into the compound and was heading to the training yards. His Aura appeared to be troubled. It was easy for Adam to guess why. He made his way over to Alfred.


    ¡°H-hey there Alfred. I didn¡¯t see you this morning.¡±


    Alfred paused and turned to Adam. Adam saw a flux of emotion pass through his Aura. Alfred merely responded with: ¡°Y-yeah.¡±


    After that, the two just looked at each other for a minute. Neither was certain of what to say to the other. In a word, it was awkward. Adam decided to speak first: ¡°I imagine you heard the latest bit of gossip at Madame¡¯s this morning?¡±


    Alfred¡¯s jaw clenched in a flash of anger: ¡°Is that all you have to say about it!¡±


    Adam helplessly shrugged: ¡°I don¡¯t know what to say! You¡¯re my friend and for all we¡¯ve been fighting over Helen¡¯s affection, she¡¯s never favored one of us over the other¡­ until now.¡±


    Alfred sighed, both in frustration and resignation; ¡°You¡¯re right. She¡¯s never chosen until now. I threw a ridiculous tantrum when she gave you that kiss before you left. Despite that, I thought I had more time to win her over. But what do I find when you finally get back? She¡¯s completely yours! You¡¯re my friend, but I can¡¯t help feeling angry at how, how¡­ unfair this is!¡±


    After shouting the last few words, Alfred breathed heavily for a few seconds. When he finally caught his breath, he was calmer. He then gave Adam a critical look: ¡°I can¡¯t do much now that she¡¯s chosen, but you¡¯d better watch it! If you disappoint her in any way¡­ I¡¯ll just have to swoop in and snatch her from you!¡±


    Despite the severity of Alfred¡¯s words, Adam couldn¡¯t help smiling: ¡°Same as always then?¡±


    Alfred gave Adam a blank look until he realized what Adam was saying. This was always how they had fought over Helen. If one gave ground, the other would take it. The stakes were just a little higher now.


    Alfred returned Adam¡¯s smile while saying: ¡°Same as always.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    There was one more stop Adam had to make in the afternoon. It had been a while since he had spent some serious time at SIH and he had plenty of reasons to talk to Cathrine. Not least of which was trotting by his side; Silber.


    Adam had never taken Silber to SIH before. He rather doubted they would appreciate him bringing a wolf into their library. However, Silber was now different. He was a Geisttier and Adam needed to know more about what this meant. As they walked through the entrance, everyone stared at Silber with awe and fascination. He stared in equal fascination at the luxurious construction of SIH.


    Adam smiled as Silber exuded a strong sense of wanting to sniff everything in sight! Silber was well-disciplined though and reigned his desire in. Mostly. Adam directed his Spirit Sight upwards and was able to tell that Catherine was in the middle of talking with someone in her office.


    Adam spoke to Silber: ¡°It looks like Magister Catherine is busy. Do you want to explore for a bit?¡±


    Silber¡¯s tail wildly wagged at the thought as Adam led him forward: ¡°Just don¡¯t knock anything over or¡­ try to mark anything.¡±


    Adam felt a disgruntled emotion from Silber. It was as though he was saying: ¡®As if I would do that!¡¯


    Silber enjoyed sniffing new things as well as receiving pets from just about everybody he passed by! Adam noticed a few attendants were staring rather nervously at Silber. Likely they knew exactly what he was and were sincerely hoping that Silber wouldn¡¯t suddenly decide that an expensive piece of art would be his new chew toy. They would have no way of stopping him!


    It wasn¡¯t long before Adam found Catherine walking down the stairs and straight to him! She smiled as she said: ¡°Looks like you¡¯ve found a Geisttier to bond yourself to Adam, congratulations. I only ask that you stop scaring our attendants.¡±


    Catherine held out a hand for Silber to sniff before scratching his ears. Adam spoke: ¡°That¡¯s mostly why I¡¯ve come today. I need to know just what these changes mean for Silber.¡±


    Catherine thought on his words for a moment before starting: ¡°Silber!? You mean this is that pup you saved from the Ghul Bear a few years back?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°I¡¯ve got quite the story to tell you.¡±


    After they went up to Catherine¡¯s office, Adam told her of his recent mission full of Ghuls, a Dragon, and Silber turning into a Geisttier. Cathrine was simply astounded. It sounded like a fairy tale, but she knew better.


    Shaking her head, she said: ¡°I almost can¡¯t believe you faced a Dragon like that! We still don¡¯t know enough about them. All I can guess is that the Dragon was somehow weakened allowing for it to be filled with that chaos you exploited. Even still¡­ I don¡¯t think any other Spiritualist in the kingdom would have picked up that! And you managed to help Silber become a Geisttier instead of a Ghul! I¡¯ve never heard of someone doing that before! Then again, I¡¯ve also never heard of someone with your abilities either.¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°That¡¯s all part of why I¡¯m here. I need help understanding the changes Silber is going through and¡­ It¡¯s time I really got serious at improving my abilities as a Spiritualist. So far, everything I¡¯ve done has simply been me getting lucky!¡±


    Cathrine once again shook her head: ¡°Perhaps, but that¡¯s already more than I ever could have figured out myself. I can still help where I can¡­ but unless you¡¯re prepared to move somewhere that has more resources for Spiritualists, your the best one to help yourself. As for Silber¡­¡±


    Catherine gave Adam a few main points beyond the obvious of Silber being a Geisttier. Among them was that Silber needed more sustenance as a Geisttier. Typically a Geisttier would get this extra sustenance from the Spirit Reserve that made it. Since Silber did not stay at the cave where the dragon was, it would manifest itself in him needing to eat more than normal which Adam already noticed. In addition, being away from the Spirit Reserve would mean Silber wouldn¡¯t have as much of an increased lifespan as would normally be associated with a Geisttier. He would still live longer than any regular wolf would though.


    The last thing they talked about was the one Adam was most curious of: ¡°These emotions or feelings that you are getting from Silber are actually normal. While it is rare for it to actually occur, Spiritualists can actually bond with a Geisttier and make it their familiar! I¡¯ve never experienced it myself, nor do I know someone who has, but it has been described as knowing the intention of the Geisttier without the need for words. I can only imagine that is what this is.¡±


    ¡°Bonded with him¡­ did I do something special for this? Or is it just an emotional bond like I had with him before?¡±


    Catherine shook her head: ¡°Spiritualists share a part of their soul with their familiar. I can only imagine that a part of your soul sunk within Silber during your attempts to save him.¡±


    It made about as much sense as anything. Adam was trying whole heartedly to save Silber and wasn¡¯t really paying attention to what his soul was doing, only what Silber¡¯s was. He had also passed out for a time and anything could have happened then. Adam glanced at Silber before giving him a few pets, who then proceeded to wag his tail.


    Adam and Catherine continued talking for a little while longer, making some vague plans on how Adam could further his studies. After that, Adam left with positive thoughts for the future. He was almost assured a windfall of money in the near future. He and Helen were more or less an item. And he was finally getting an actual measure for his abilities as a Spiritualist. Everything seemed to be heading in a good direction for him and he intended to keep it that way!

 Chapter 32 A Dance

    A Dance


    A week passed and things stayed good for Adam. He and Helen didn¡¯t really do anything special, just the same things they had always done before. Except, they sat closer to each other as they ate their meals or when they talked. It was a small thing but¡­ it was nice.


    As the end of the week arrived, so did the ceremony for Alfred¡¯s sixteenth birthday! It was the day when he would be considered an adult and Madame¡¯s would no longer look after him as an orphaned child.


    As was the tradition at Madame¡¯s, there was a group celebration at the end of the month for everyone that had a birthday that month. It was also the time for going away parties for those that became adults.


    Despite the festivities being for everyone, Alfred stole the limelight among Adam¡¯s group of friends.


    Alfred exuberantly spoke: ¡°Ha, I finally get to escape! No more menial work for me. I hope you have just as much fun lifting heavy things in the kitchen without me, as you did with me. And¡­ whatever it is you do, Kadara.¡±


    Kadara gave Alfred a rude gesture as everyone laughed. Alfred became more dramatic as he spoke to Helen: ¡°Ah, parting with you will be such sweet sorrow.¡±


    Derek interrupted: ¡°Dude, you¡¯re not going very far. You¡¯re just going to be bunking with the Silver Saviors. We can see each other any old time. You¡¯re not even leaving until tomorrow morning.¡±


    Alfred gave a disgruntled look: ¡°Stop ruining the mood, Derek.¡±


    The party continued on full of laughter and cheer until they had finally tired themselves out in the evening. The next morning, they all gathered to see Alfred off to the Silver Saviors. He first collected a healthy stipend from Madame Janette for working at Madame¡¯s up to that point, then he slung a pack over his shoulder full of all the possessions he had. As they walked over to the Silver Saviors¡¯ compound, Alfred started bragging: ¡°I already staked out a good bunk. It¡¯s got some space around it and is even near a window!¡±


    As they entered the compound, Alfred¡¯s excitement at finally striking out on his own was dampened by the mood. Everyone seemed to have a concerned look and were talking in hushed voices about something. Isley saw their group and quickly made his way over.


    He asked: ¡°Have you guys heard the news yet?¡±


    Alfred shook his head: ¡°What news?¡±


    ¡°Boss just got back from showing the army the Dragon¡¯s corpse, but there¡¯s trouble.¡±


    A worrying thought edged into Adam¡¯s mind: ¡°Was it not there?¡±


    Isley shook his head: ¡°No they found it, but they also found something else! They found the remains of a Spiritualist on the site. Among the personal effects that remained, there was coin from Luxom! The officials that came back with Heinrich are dead set on the idea that Luxom woke up the Dragon to cause havoc in the kingdom! This could be the spark for another war!¡±


    Adam¡¯s heart plummeted at the words! He instantly recalled that fateful night back at Fort Erich where he had been blinded. That war had gone on and then ended with him barely noticing while stumbling through the void he had found himself surrounded by. Now, a new war seemed imminent on the horizon. As he thought about Luxom stirring the Dragon and what they had done to him, he felt a welt of anger boil in his stomach!


    Franklin was the first to speak: ¡°A-are you serious!?¡±


    Isley nodded. ¡°I¡¯m not sure such an accusation will hold, though. Boss is putting his foot down to get word out; there were multiple types of coins from various kingdoms found in the coin purse. It just held a lot of Luxom currency in it. If that Spiritualist was traveling far and wide and just happened to come across the Dragon¡¯s lair¡­¡±


    Isley then shook his head: ¡°Enough about that. Let¡¯s get you settled, Alfred.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    By luck or travesty, depending on who you talked to, a war did not break out between Heider and Luxom. Tensions rose but that was all. It was strange as the two kingdoms had gone to war over less. Still, something was holding them back.This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it


    Speculation was rife over the reasons. It ranged from neither side having recovered from full strength from the last war to each side covertly sending Spiritualists over the borders to make strategic strikes before launching the war in earnest.


    As Adam played his flute at Madame¡¯s, that seemed to be the topic on everyone¡¯s lips. Adam¡¯s heart clenched at the thought of Luxom doing what they did at Fort Erich to any other town or fort. He felt that nobody should suffer an attack by Ghuls like that.


    To get his mind off those thoughts, Adam concentrated more on his playing and paying attention to the dancers on stage. Moreso on one in particular; Helen. It was odd, the feelings that rushed through him. There was a reassuring calm to have her near in addition to the butterflies that flitted through his stomach as he thought of her.


    Adam played the song for her. Occasionally pushing the song on to lead her dance to the next step, other times being pulled along by the grace she had learned to carry herself with. It almost became a dance in and of itself.


    As he had often caught himself doing, Adam thought of how he could apply his songs to his abilities as a Spiritualist. As he thought about this interaction between him and Helen, he came to a realization. For as much as he had accommodated for Spirit Essence and played around their strengths, he had never entered a dance with them like he was with Helen.


    A while later, both Adam and Helen ended their shifts at Madame¡¯s. Adam met up with her saying: ¡°I just had this great idea!¡±


    As Adam explained, Helen was both embarrassed and happy. She hadn¡¯t realized Adam had been basically staring at her the entire time she was dancing. She was glad she could help him, though. Even if it wasn¡¯t consciously done.


    She gave Adam a wide smile: ¡°Let¡¯s head to the Hill Garden, then. I could use a moment of relaxation and you can work on your idea. But, let¡¯s change out of our work clothes first.¡±


    After getting ready, they made their way to their favorite spot at the Hill Garden. Along the way, they stopped by Julianne¡¯s house to pick up Silber. He was happy to get out of the house. Since becoming a Geisttier, he had become restless. He didn¡¯t like being cooped up in a house all day.


    When they got to their spot, Helen began to play with Silber while Adam concentrated on his experiments with Spirit Essence. Adam began with high hopes of something changing¡­ but nothing did. No matter what type of Essence, he just couldn¡¯t get them to dance with him in the way he felt he had with Helen.


    Helen quickly picked up on his dejected mood. She asked: ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡±


    Adam gave a defeated sigh: ¡°Nothing¡¯s changing! The Spirit Essence dances to my music just fine, but I don¡¯t feel any interaction like I did when you were dancing.¡±


    Helen thought for a moment before asking: ¡°Adam, have you ever danced before?¡±


    Adam was surprised by the question. As he thought back, he had only really danced way back at the Dancery when some of the girls forced him to dance with them for fun. But that was just him clumsily following their dance routines along.


    ¡°... Not really.¡±


    Helen gave one of her bright smiles as she offered him a hand: ¡°Then why don¡¯t we dance? Maybe you just need some perspective on what dancing is really like.¡±


    Adam took her hand, but she frowned.


    ¡°I just realized, we won¡¯t have music to dance to. That will make this harder.¡±


    ¡°I can hum.¡±


    Helen told Adam what song to hum and she began showing him a dance. It wasn¡¯t one of the dances they used at Madame¡¯s. Those were more choreographed and occasionally provocative. No, it was a rather simple dancer closer to what they had back at the Dancery.


    Adam began stepping in time and following Helen¡¯s lead while Silber pranced around them. Helen¡¯s gaze followed Silber as she let out a chuckle. During that moment, she wasn¡¯t leading Adam. He fumbled slightly before catching himself and pushing on.


    Helen merely smiled as she took the lead again. Going back and forth, Helen started letting Adam take the lead in the dance before she took a turn. Neither followed a particular cadence beyond what fit within the song Adam was humming. Adam even adjusted the song on the fly as he crescendoed to their dance moves.


    For a while, Adam forgot everything else and just enjoyed the innocent dance with Helen. He didn¡¯t even notice as the air stirred around them and moved in time with their dance. It was just the two of them enjoying a moment together.


    After a length of time, Adam ended the dance with a final flourish that left Helen leaning back in his arms. On an impulse, Adam followed it up with a deep kiss. When the two finally pulled apart, both their faces were flush with color as they smiled at one another.


    It was only then that Adam noticed the Spirit Essence that was settling down around them. New ideas started popping into Adam¡¯s head. Even as these ideas came, Adam helplessly shook his head. All these possibilities were all thanks to Helen, there was no way he could have come across them on his own.


    Only one cheesy line came across his mind that he could use to tell her just how much he appreciated her: ¡°I love you so much.¡±

 Chapter 33 Domus

    Domus


    Adam sat in a lavish room packed with others, all of which were Silver Saviors. Each of them had been part of the mission that involved the Dragon Adam helped Heinrich kill. They were in a waiting room of Heider Kingdom¡¯s Bank, Hessler branch. They were here to the dismay of many of the Silver Saviors for one reason; to collect their reward for killing the Dragon!


    The reason for the dismay was simple, Heider was not actually going to give them any gold! Instead, it was issuing credit at the bank! Bank accounts always came with hefty service fees and the Silver Saviors had begun to doubt that would actually get any money from the job at all!


    Adam decided not to dwell on it. He hadn¡¯t ever interacted with the bank before, same as the others. Maybe things would work out better than they feared. Or maybe not. He could only wait and see what happened.


    Instead, Adam began investigating the bank. He quickly came to the conclusion that the bank was sturdily built. It was all made of some kind of stone and there were plenty of architectural features throughout the bank. From things as simple as carved columns to intricately worked statues¡­ or at least Adam assumed they were. He couldn¡¯t discern any fine features on them. What he first took as rugs hung from the wall he surmised were lavish tapestries.


    Among their little crowd, a few were also appreciating the lavish works around them. Isley was sitting next to Adam and was observing the intricate relief of a tree carved onto a slab of marble that was sitting on a low table in front of them.


    Silber had come with Adam too, as he had been too restless being cooped up in Julianne¡¯s house. Adam could tell Silber¡¯s displeasure at still having to be stuck indoors despite leaving the house. Even scratching behind Silber¡¯s ears while he laid his head in Adam¡¯s lap only marginally helped his mood.


    Isley gestured toward the table on the table while saying: ¡°It¡¯s beautiful, isn¡¯t it? I¡¯ve never seen something so lifelike carved in stone!¡±


    While continuing to scratch Silber, Adam curiously tilted his head and said: ¡°I figured there had to be something more to it. I can only see a slab of rock.¡±


    Isley was briefly taken aback before he started laughing. He then said: ¡°Despite you wearing a blindfold all the time, I forget that you¡¯re actually blind! There¡¯s this tree that¡¯s carved into the slab¡­¡±


    Isley continued on to describe not only the intricately carved slab but vibrantly colored tapestries and even talked about gold gilding that lined the ceiling. After Isley had gone over nearly everything within the waiting room, Heinrich finally came through the door.


    ¡°I¡¯ve finally got everything set up. I¡¯ll be taking you each one at a time to finalize everything. Adam, you¡¯re first up. Come with me.¡±


    Adam got up and followed Heinrich to an office not far from the waiting room. Silber naturally followed Adam. As they walked in, a man stood up from behind the desk he was waiting at. He hesitated slightly when he noticed Adam¡¯s blindfold and then became aghast at the sight of Silber! A dog inside the bank could only spell disaster if it decided to chew on the furniture or mark some territory. However, Silber was clearly well behaved if a little antsy. His shining fur also proved him to be more than a simple dog.


    The man tried to recover and moved on to greet him; ¡°H-hello, my name is Gerald. You are?¡±


    Adam sat down in a chair across from Gerald as he answered: ¡°I¡¯m Adam.¡±


    Gerald watched as Silber laid down next to Adam: ¡°L-let¡¯s go over the particulars of what¡¯s going on.¡±


    Gerald became more comfortable as he talked with Adam. As it turned out, Heinrich was helping everyone to bypass the expenses of opening individual accounts by giving them each limited access to a single large fund that held the reward money from killing the Dragon. To set up his access, Adam gave his name as a primary and his mother as a secondary to access his portion of the funds.


    After getting all the personal information together Gerald turned to Heinrich and asked: ¡°What is to be the limit of Adam¡¯s fund access?¡±


    Without hesitation, Heinrich responded: ¡°Five Gold Coins.¡±


    Adam became slack-jawed as Gerald nodded and began adding more lines onto the document he had been filling out for Adam.


    Five Gold Coins were more than enough to purchase a house in one of the middle-income districts of Hesseler! Madame¡¯s would normally give a stipend of two Gold to the orphans that finally grew to become adults. It was enough for a small house in one of the low-income districts or they could even move to a town further away. Alfred managed to get three Gold due to the contracts he had fulfilled for the Silver Saviors, but he was planning on spending most of it on better weapons and armor. Adam scarcely knew what to do with five whole Gold Coins!


    The amount rattled through Adam¡¯s head one more time; ¡®Five Gold Coins¡­¡¯


    Silber really didn¡¯t know what these ¡®accounts¡¯ or ¡®gold¡¯ they were talking about were, but he could feel Adam¡¯s shocked emotions. It wasn¡¯t a bad shocked either, but¡­ a good one? Silber tilted his head at the thought but was pleased that whatever was going on was apparently good.


    After finishing his writing, Gerald tapped the papers together and said: ¡°That should be everything. It will take about ten days for this to go under review and then be approved. You will also need to notify the bank ten days in advance before you attempt to make a purchase out of the account¡­¡±


    Adam barely paid attention to what Gerald was saying. Before he knew it, he was back in the waiting room with the others and Heinrich pulled someone else to set them up. Isley mobbed Adam as he numbly sat on the couch; ¡°You look like you¡¯re in shock, Adam. Was it that bad?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°No it was good.¡±


    ¡°C¡¯mon, give me the details!¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    On the journey back to Madame¡¯s, Adam found himself constantly gazing at houses along the way. It had always been a small dream of both himself and his mother to get a house. They had been completely dependant on Madame¡¯s since that terrible night that forced them from their previous home. Finally getting their own place would make them independent and put that event further behind them.


    Vivienne had a fair bit of coin saved from working at Madame¡¯s, but it would only be enough for a shoddy house at the edge of the city at best. However, with the coin sitting in the bank for Adam they could buy a truly decent house. A great one even! The possibilities made Adam giddy the whole way back.


    Adam also began rambling on to Silber: ¡°Just think¡­ a whole house of our own! We could finally live together!¡±


    Silber happily wagged his tail. Who knew these ¡®accounts¡¯ could lead Adam to get a house he could live in! Silber silently wondered for a moment why Adam hadn¡¯t done this sooner before getting absorbed by Adam¡¯s excitement. But if Adam was to get a house, one thing was essential


    Silber gave a happy bark as he sent his thought to Adam. Adam quickly caught on and chuckled. He responded: ¡°Yes, we¡¯ll have to get a big yard for you.¡±


    Unable to contain himself, Adam went straight to his mother as soon as he got back to tell her the news. She too was shocked by the amount that had been given to Adam. She then tempered Adam¡¯s excitement by saying: ¡°Don¡¯t be too fast in buying a house. There is much to think about first.¡±Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    Adam was taken aback that Vivienne wasn¡¯t as excited as he thought she would be. He responded: ¡°Well, yeah.¡±


    Vivienne chuckled: ¡°You¡¯re quickly becoming a young man, Adam. In a handful of years, you may be thinking of starting your own family. Are you certain you want your mother living with you if you want to get some alone time with Helen?¡±


    Adam¡¯s face went red in embarrassment. He then said: ¡°We¡¯d figure something out. I don¡¯t think I could just leave you behind, mom.¡±


    Vivienne gave Adam a tender smile before encasing him in a hug: ¡°Well, we still need to get a good feel for the house prices anyway. Just because you have five gold to spend, doesn¡¯t mean we should squander it away all at once.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam and Vivienne began looking at houses whenever they had the time. Vivienne had some experience from when she and Alaric bought their house and the Dancery back at Fort Erich. However, she quickly found out she was out of her depth when it came to Hessler.


    Houses were sold from the Magistrate Office and most of the listings only stated the location of the house, the lot size, and the price. There was no description of the house, so Adam and Vivienne had to walk over to check them out. Too many of the houses they visited were in bad locations, had shoddy construction, or were actually already sold and had yet to be taken off the Magistrate''s list!


    Vivienne tried complaining to one of the clerks in the office: ¡°Why is this all so disorganized!? When I was shopping for a residence in another city, they never had this issue!¡±


    The clerk sighed: ¡°Upkeeping the housing list is a long and involved process that we don¡¯t have time for. Not sure where you lived before, but I can guarantee Hessler is a larger city than wherever you lived before. There are way too many legal proceedings to count that have a higher priority than keeping that list up-to-date.¡±


    Vivienne heaved a sigh of frustration before stalking off with Adam hot on her heels. He asked: ¡°If this is getting too much mom, why don¡¯t we just go with one of the houses we saw near the Silver Saviors? It¡¯s a bit far from Madame¡¯s, but the houses were better than most we¡¯ve seen.¡±


    Vivienne shook her head: ¡°No, this isn¡¯t something that you should compromise on. When you¡¯ve finally found a place that you love, all the frustration will be worth it. Trust me.¡±


    Adam could only nod in response while he silently wondered how long it would take to find such a house.


    -----------------------------------------


    As it turned out, it would be a year before Adam found the perfect house! During that year, while nothing truly significant happened, Adam felt he had changed. It wasn¡¯t that he felt so close to being able to actually utilize a Spirit Formation he had been working on for the past year. Neither was it something to do with the few fights he had had with Helen and their subsequent make-ups that made them feel closer.


    No, instead he felt a sense of confidence within him that had been growing for years. He was fifteen and was slowly approaching his sixteenth birthday! Soon he would be an adult, and he was starting to feel it.


    He could also see a change in his mother. She too was getting older, but not too noticeably so. There were a few wrinkles at the edge of her face that were caused by more than just worry.


    Part of Adam¡¯s confidence stemmed from his time looking for houses. There were days where he would go out on his own so that Vivienne didn¡¯t have to limp around with him. The two of them had also taken the time to study some of the laws and procedures around buying a house. One of the things they found out from this was that older house listings would have discounted prices! The trick was in figuring out why the house had been on the listing for so long. Most likely, there was a problem with the house or the lot but Adam felt sure there was a hidden gem somewhere there.


    Vivienne was in the middle of perusing the listings when her eyes snapped to one line and said: ¡°Huh.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯d you find?¡± Adam asked.


    ¡°There¡¯s this old listing for a lot at the Hill Garden for ten gold.¡±


    Adam perked up at that: ¡°Really!? If it¡¯s real, maybe we can get the price knocked down.¡±


    Vivienne nodded: ¡°It¡¯s really old though. It¡¯s from about fifty years ago when they still had a spot for owner comments on the lots. It says something about construction being too noisy.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, I wonder if the construction ruined the lot?¡± Adam mused.


    It was the only thing he could think of for a lot next to the Hill Garden to stay on the listings¡­ well possibly. The house could have been sold and just not taken off the listings, but Adam had his hopes.


    ¡°Let¡¯s check it out!¡±


    Dawson, the clerk that had been helping Adam and Vivienne the past year inquired: ¡°Did you find another promising one?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°An old listing by the Hill Garden.¡±


    ¡°Oh, that one.¡±


    Adam¡¯s heart sunk as soon as he heard the words: ¡°You know it?¡±


    Dawson nodded back: ¡°That¡¯s an old phantom. Nobody can actually find the lot, but the city engineers insist it exists. Based on the note from the owner, I assume it got absorbed by the construction.¡±


    ¡°Haven¡¯t they gone out to confirm its location? They have plans for the city, don¡¯t they?¡±


    Dawson shrugged: ¡°Probably not their department.¡±


    ¡°Then whose is it?¡±


    ¡°Honestly, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s part of anyone¡¯s department. But hey, you have that special sight of yours. Maybe you¡¯ll find something the rest of us can¡¯t.¡±


    Adam sighed: ¡°Wanna check it out, mom? It might just be a ghost chase.¡±


    ¡°There are some other listings to check on the way there. Why not?¡±


    The two departed to check out the houses they had found in the listings. None of them really spoke to either Adam or Vivienne. It wasn¡¯t too long before they found themselves by the Hill Garden looking for that elusive lot.


    As they finally arrived there was¡­ nothing. There were houses on one side of the street and a five-foot-tall wall along the other side. The wall helped to separate the Hill Garden from the street, though there were a few entrances into the park at various points along the wall.


    Adam frowned while he looked at two of the houses. They were sitting right next to each other. One was lot thirty-seven, the other was lot thirty-nine. There was no trace of lot thirty-eight between them.


    Adam sighed and looked back toward the Hill Garden. They were on the opposite side of where Helen¡¯s special spot was, but it would have been nice to have had a house here.


    That was when Adam saw a corner of something at the edge of his vision! He instantly concentrated and pushed out further. The wall in front of lots thirty-seven and thirty-nine wasn¡¯t separating the Hill Garden from the road, it was separating a house lot from the street! Thick trees and bushes lined the sides of the lot, camouflaging it perfectly with the park!


    The house itself was large and the lot was huge! It was run down, though. All kinds of plants were overgrowing everywhere and much of the wood in the house was rotting. Luckily it was mostly made of stone so there wasn¡¯t much damage to the house¡¯s structure. If the house and lot had been pristine, it would probably be worth more than ten gold! As it was¡­


    Adam wondered if he could push the price down far enough and have enough gold left to fix the place. It would be a pain to put in all the work needed to get the place back together, but¡­ there was just something Adam liked about the house. Putting his worries aside, Adam smiled.


    ¡°I think we¡¯ve found our home, mom!¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Dawson was astounded by their find as Adam described the house to him. He then began studiously nodding his head while pouring through Adam¡¯s details.


    ¡°The house is what is known as a Domus. It¡¯s an old style of home from some kingdom far south and east of us. It grew popular for a time. The entrance is an atrium built around a water feature that is dedicated to receiving and entertaining guests, with a few adjoining rooms to accommodate them. Moving past the atrium the house opens up into the pars-rustica, more or less your daily living area arranged around a courtyard with an open roof.¡±


    Adam slowly nodded as he viewed the image of the house in his mind. Then he spoke: ¡°Still, I wonder why the lot was blocked off?¡±


    Dawson shrugged: ¡°I think that was around the time the Hill Garden was being made. If the trees around the lot are as thick as you say, when the workers were constructing the wall around the Hill Garden, they probably thought the lot was part of it? It¡¯s hard to know for sure, but worse things have happened to adjoining lots next to large construction projects.


    That was as good of an answer as Adam was going to get, so he moved to the next topic: ¡°Now, let¡¯s talk pricing!¡±

 Chapter 34 Proposition

    Proposition


    It took a month to finish the purchase of the Domus House. Part of it was in how much time it took for the bank to forward payment. The rest was waiting for a variety of bureaucratic procedures to fall through.


    Despite how long it took to finally own the house, Adam was extremely happy. He had managed to haggle the price for the Domus down to three and a half Gold! He leveraged the age of the listing, the condition of the lot and house, and the fact that he would have to pay to make an entrance to the house from the road as methods to lower the price.


    Adam doubted the one Gold and a half he had left in the bank would be able to get the Domus back to its former glory, but that was fine. He had some savings from working with the Silver Saviors that he would get from Madame¡¯s when he was sixteen as well as the stipend they would give. Vivienne also had some coin she could contribute. It might take a while, but they would definitely be able to get the Domus back into shape.


    Nobody at Madame¡¯s yet knew Adam had purchased a house. They definitely knew they were looking and Jannette was even pushing them to finally choose. Despite being friends with Vivienne, the two of them now had a means with which to live on their own. To be fair, she had to try and push them to make room for more orphans who needed the space more.


    It was finally time, though. Adam had a plan for the reveal and he was determined to enact it!


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam arrived at the Tavern part of Madame¡¯s, looking to pick up Helen as her shift ended. He quickly found her with his Spirit Sight. He also found that she was dealing with a rather stubborn rich client in one of the private booths on the second floor.


    The man was portly and his Aura seemed¡­ greasy to Adam. Adam inwardly groaned. The man¡¯s name was Big Poe and he was a little infamous at Madames. Adam walked swiftly up to the second floor while the two talked.


    Big Poe spoke with a sly smile and a hint of lust in his eyes: ¡°Helen, I¡¯d heard that you are going to be turning sixteen next month. I¡¯d pay quite handsomely if you¡¯d give me your first night.¡±


    Helen¡¯s face scrunched slightly, but she maintained a modicum of decorum as she spoke: ¡°Sorry sir, but no.¡±


    Big Poe continued, unabated by her refusal: ¡°It¡¯s fine to be reluctant. I hear you have a boyfriend. Maybe you¡¯re saving yourself for him or the two of you have already done the deed and I will have missed your first night. Still, I¡¯m more than willing to show you how a real man can perform.¡±


    Helen was quickly losing her composer. ¡°The answer is still no, sir. Now, if you¡¯ll excuse me, your time is up and my shift is over.¡±


    As Helen made to leave, Big Poe grabbed her arm. He spoke with more insistence: ¡°Come now, we haven¡¯t even spoken of how much I could pay you!¡±


    Adam took this moment to step in. He spoke: ¡°She¡¯s already said no multiple times, sir. Unless you¡¯d like to speak with one of our bouncers, I¡¯d recommend you remove your hand from Helen¡¯s arm.¡±


    Big Poe gave Adam a brief dour look as he slowly removed his hand. He returned his attention to Helen and continued to press: ¡°The blind musician coming to rescue his girl, ha! Trust me, girl, I could give you a pleasurable time uncomparable to him. While he would be failing around in the dark looking for the right hole, I would be sensuous.¡±


    Adam¡¯s disgust for the man was plainly evident on his face as Helen quickly backed up behind him. Adam spoke: ¡°Would you just shut up? Nobody wants to listen to that!¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t even know who you¡¯re talking to, do you, boy? You think you¡¯re some kind of knight in shining armor for Helen? I could put you down any day of the week! Now out of my way, I was talking to Helen.¡±


    It was Adam¡¯s turn for a dour look to come across his face. Adam reached out with a sour song in his mind and touched the Spirit Essence swirling around Madame¡¯s. In a moment, a pervasive presence seemed to weigh down on the souls of those around Adam! Big Poe¡¯s face went pale as he finally started paying some attention to Adam, like the fact Adam was directly looking at him even though he was blind!


    Adam spoke coldly: ¡°You think you could put down a Spiritualist like me any day? Not even a dragon was able to kill me, or hadn¡¯t you heard about how I helped the Silver Saviors with that?¡±


    Adam then let up the pressure he was applying. Helen took a deep breath behind him when he did. She, unfortunately, felt the same thing Big Poe had. Adam still had to work on discerning targets whenever he used that particular trick.


    Adam gave the cowering Big Poe one last look before turning away with Helen. Hansen and another bouncer appeared as they turned. Hansen asked: ¡°Trouble?¡±


    Adam shook his head: ¡°Just Big Poe being insistent again. It got on my nerves, sorry.¡±


    Hansen gave Adam a nod before stepping into the booth: ¡°If you''re done, get out! Others are waiting for a booth!¡±


    Big Poe quickly sped out of the booth with tears in his eyes. As he went past Helen and Adam, they heard him say: ¡°All I wanted was a good time!¡±


    Adam heaved a sigh. It was hard to stay truly angry at Big Poe. For all that he was a grown man, he was just a spoiled child of a rich family that still lived with his parents. No one really liked him, except maybe Susan and the other ¡®Ladies¡¯ that formed Madame¡¯s Brothel. Still, nobody truly hated him either.Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.


    Helen spoke beside Adam while rubbing her temples: ¡°Did you have to do that pressure thing?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, it was they only he would listen besides punching him. But, that would have led to an incident.¡±


    Helen could only shake her head while muttering: ¡°I almost wish you had.¡±


    She cast a brief glance towards where Big Poe had run before giving a heavy sigh of her own.


    Adam spoke: ¡°Come on. It¡¯s date night and you definitely need an unwind after that!¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    The rest of the evening was pleasant for the two. Like usual, they ended up in the Hill Garden by the end. Unlike normal, however, Adam was guiding Helen away from their special spot and over to the opposite side of the park.


    Helen jokingly asked: ¡°Did you get lost, Adam?¡±


    Adam gave a sly smile in response: ¡°No, I wanted to show you something.¡±


    ¡°Ooo, what?¡±


    ¡°You¡¯ll just have to wait and see.¡±


    Holding hands the two walked through areas of the park the rarely went. It was a nice change of pace. There were a few flower beds along the path that held flowers they hadn¡¯t seen before. Mostly though, one part of the park looked much the same as the next. Helen¡¯s anticipation began to grow as she came up with imaginative ideas on just what Adam was up to. Some of those thoughts left her beet red in the face.


    As they got closer and closer to his target, Adam¡¯s heart began to beat faster and faster. He mentally fought as his mind began to lock up.


    ¡®Come on Adam, you¡¯ve gone through this in your head a hundred times! You can do this, deep breathes.¡¯


    Along the park path, the two came to bench. Here, Adam took a turn off the path into a denser part of the Hill Garden. He turned back to Helen and barely managed to say in a level tone: ¡°Just a little farther.¡±


    Broken from her own revery Helen beamed him a shy smile as her anticipation built further. Leading Helen deeper into the thicket, they came to spot that had been recently cut. Adam held a few stray branches that still remained on the bushes to help Helen past.


    Arriving on the other side, Helen drew a gasp!


    ¡°What is this Adam?¡±


    They had come up the backside of the Domus lot. Adam had been through here earlier with a few workers to show them which parts of the wall to the front of the house should be removed to make an entrance.


    Adam was pleased to see Helen¡¯s shock. Now came the part that he was having surprising trouble with.


    ¡°This¡­ This is my house! I uh, just finished with purchasing it. It doesn¡¯t look like much right now, it still needs a little fixing and uh¡­ you know how you¡¯re turning sixteen next month and I won¡¯t be too far either¡­ I just thought maybe this could be your house too, you know if you wanted.¡±


    Adam inwardly cringed: ¡®You just screwed it up! This wasn¡¯t how you planned it!¡±


    It was then that a beautiful peal of heartfelt laughter assaulted Adam¡¯s ears! His heart stopped for a moment at the sight of Helen¡¯s blooming Aura. With a wild grin, she stepped in and gave Adam a hug as she spoke: ¡°You big goof, of course I¡¯ll marry you!¡±


    Adam couldn¡¯t help laughing as he gave her a fierce hug back before spinning her around. He pulled back a little and asked: ¡°Was it bad?¡±


    Helen nodded with a mock serious look: ¡°Terrible.¡±


    Adam gave a dramatic sigh: ¡°Can we tell everyone I said it perfectly?¡±


    ¡°Said what?¡±


    ¡°...Will you marry me?¡±


    Helen gave Adam a kiss: ¡°Sure, but I¡¯ll use it as blackmail if I need to.¡±


    Adam grinned in response: ¡°Let me show you around. Careful, though, the house hasn¡¯t been cleaned out yet.¡±


    Holding hands, the two dreamily went through the house as Adam pointed things out. Adam first showed Helen where the entrance was going to be placed, which was currently overgrown by bushes and a tree. The original stone cobble path leading to the house was covered by thick weeds. A few were damaged, but many appeared to be salvageable.


    Adam then showed off the Atrium. As soon as they walked in, Helen exclaimed: ¡°Is that a pond!?¡±


    Adam chuckled: ¡°This part of the house is built around this water feature. See those holes up above it in the ceiling? They are actually drains that siphon rainwater down!¡±


    The ¡®pond¡¯, as Helen put it, was a recessed square in the stone floor. It held sand at its bottom to filter any water collects into the pond before it begins to collect into a cistern that could be drawn from for use in the house! The rest of the Atrium was also crafted from stone with wood moldings as accents. Unfortunately, the wood was actually molding! Helen gave Adam a mock slap when he used that pun on her.


    There were two doorways to either side of the Atrium. They were double-door sized, but the doors were missing. One led to a room where guests could be entertained, while the other was a large guest bedroom that could fit several beds and held an adjoining bathroom. There were fireplaces in both the rooms to warm them up during winter and the Atrium had four stone braziers in each of its corners. It would be a bit costly to heat, but Adam planned on getting some rugs down so the floor wasn¡¯t so cold and reduce the need to heat.


    Even wider and taller than the doorways, an opening at the back of the Atrium marked the entrance to the Pars-Rustica. It was built around an open courtyard the size of a small yard, replete with a tree and a pond at its center with plenty of room around them.


    As the center of the courtyard turned from lawn back into stone, rooms were arranged around it. Down one side of the Pars-Rustica were a series of bedrooms. There was one big master room with an attached bathroom and four regular bedrooms that shared a separate bathroom. Down another length was the large kitchen and a huge dining room. Finally, the back held series of segmented living rooms that opened onto a porch off the back side of the Domus.


    Helen could scarcely believe it all. Adam had somehow come to own such a grand home, even if it was run down, inside the Hill Garden! Her mind raced for what was to come. Not just to see this house become grand once again, but that future she had just promised with Adam.


    As they were looking at the rooms, Adam said: ¡°There¡¯s plenty of room for us, my mom¡­ and kids.¡±


    The two held each other closer. The more they explored the house, the more the two felt sure of what was to come. It wouldn¡¯t be tomorrow. It wouldn¡¯t even be a few months from now. It might take a couple of years before it truly happened, but they would start a family together in this house.

 Chapter 35 Only Potentially Dangerous...

    Only Potentially Dangerous...


    Adam began to stir. It was early morning and time for him to begin his morning exercise. As he came to, he couldn¡¯t help a big grin from splashing itself across his face. He was waking up in the Domus house! Adma, Helen, and Vivienne had finally moved in just a few days ago! It was just in time, too. Helen had turned sixteen just the day before, so it was time for her to leave Madame¡¯s.


    Adam took a moment casting his Spirit Sight around. The house wasn¡¯t finished, but all the doors were in place and the windows were paned and shuttered. He felt he could look at the house for hours without being bored. Every nook and cranny held potential yet to be realized and it was all his! There was also the figure lying in bed next to him. Helen slept peacefully next to him as he silently marveled at their home. If Adam¡¯s grin could have spread even wider across his face, it would. Having Helen here made things feel¡­ complete. As though everything was as it was meant to be!


    After having his fill of gazing at the house, Adam quietly rose from the bed and dressed. He noted that Silber had already left the room. While he missed Julianne a little, Silber adored the Domus house. Not only did it have a large yard he could frolic in, but there was also an entrance to the Hill Garden in the back of the yard! Rumors had already started to spread of the Silver Wolf that had suddenly inhabited the garden. Luckily it seemed Silber was well received as an exotic sight by the park goers and not feared as a ghost.


    After dressing himself, Adam headed out into the courtyard to do his morning exercises. He did his exercises close to the little pond and tree in the center of the courtyard. A little while after he started, Helen began to stir.


    Groggily getting up, Helen draped a blanket around herself to keep warm. She trudged out toward the courtyard to watch Adam train. Warmth suffused her as she watched him. She wasn¡¯t entirely sure whether she was still dreaming or not. Adam was incredibly lucky to this wonderful home and she felt lucky to have him.


    After a couple minutes, Helen left Adam to his training for a quick bath before preparing breakfast. It wasn¡¯t long before Vivienne joined Helen in the kitchen with a smile on her face. She¡¯d been rather chipper since she and Adam had moved into the Domus. They had finally become independent! Though, that meant both Helen and Vivienne were out of jobs, now that they were no longer with Madame¡¯s. Good musicians were always in need, though, so Adam still had a gig at Madame¡¯s plus his work with the Silver Saviors.


    As the smells of breakfast wafted over to him, Adam breathed in deep. Contentment welled within him as he thought with a smile: ¡®I hope this feeling never goes away!¡¯


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam dropped by the Silver Saviors to see if there were any small contracts he could sign into. As soon as he got there, Bruno and Clyde flagged him down: ¡°Hey Adam!¡±


    Waving back to them, Adam responded: ¡°Hey guys. Just loitering around?¡±


    ¡°Yeah, nothing really good is available. When are you throwing a house party, we could use the distraction.¡±


    ¡°You could always just visit, but I¡¯m not planning for that until Alfred, Franklin, and Kadara get back from their contract.¡±


    Bruno sighed: ¡°It¡¯s so hard for us all to get together at the same time recently.¡±


    As they continued talking, Adam noticed someone rushing into headquarters. Her soul seemed frantic. Adam gave a slight frown and said: ¡°I think someone is dropping off a contract. It might be¡­ interesting.¡±


    Bruno and Clyde both perked up: ¡°What are we waiting for, let¡¯s go see!¡±


    As they stepped in, the woman was quickly led to Heinrich¡¯s office. Whatever was going on was obviously big. If it was something this big, Adam wasn¡¯t sure if he wanted in on it. Still, he was interested in what was going on.


    Clyde spoke: ¡°Adam, can you do your thing and listen in on them?¡±


    Adam sighed: ¡°I guess, but if whatever they¡¯re saying is confidential, I¡¯ll stop.¡±


    Even as he said it, Adam began pushing past the walls around him to look into Heinrich¡¯s office. He was just in time to see the woman enter Heinrich¡¯s office. Finally taking the time to inspect her more, Adam noticed she was wearing some light armor.


    With a calmness that contrasted the frantic nature of her soul, the woman saluted Heinrich and said: ¡°Sergeant Callison reporting; I have a contract from the army.¡±


    Heinrich nodded and gestured toward a chair in front of his desk: ¡°Please sit.¡±


    As Sergeant Claison took a seat, she pulled hot an envelope that had been hidden in her armor. she said: ¡°This should have all the information you need.¡±


    Heinrich took the enveloped and opened it up to look at the contents. Adam took this moment to tell Bruno and Clyde what was going on. As he was reading, Heinrich spoke: ¡°I imagine this isn¡¯t just being sent to us?¡±


    Sergeant Calison responded: ¡°They are asking the Siler Saviors first. You''ve already proved yourselves with the Dragon. A rampaging Geisttier shouldn¡¯t prove a problem. If you don¡¯t want this, we will send it out to the other mercenaries. This needs to be done fast, the town has little protection and people are already hurt.¡±


    Adam stiffened at what he heard, while Heinrich asked: ¡°I imagine the army isn¡¯t gathering a small group of Spiritualists and Martial Artist to deal with this for a reason?¡±Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings.


    Sergant Callison gave a helpless shrug: ¡°I don¡¯t know. I was just ordered to deliver this as fast as humanly possible.¡±


    Heinrich gave a grunt before saying: ¡°Fine, we¡¯ll take the contract. It¡¯ll take at least a day to get the proper people together before we head out.¡±


    Sergeant Claison gave a nod back as she stood up: ¡°I¡¯ll report back and let them know.¡±


    As she left, Adam turned to Bruno and Clyde: ¡°Well, it¡¯s definitely big. Something about a rampaging Geisttier.¡±


    Bruno and Clyde paused: ¡°A What?¡±


    Adam sighed. Everyone knew about Ghuls, but people rarely talked about Geisttier. Adam explained it simply: ¡°Something like Silber going out of control. It could be bad.¡±


    After another moment of parsing what Adam told them, the two sighed. Bruno dejectedly said: ¡°I¡¯m sure they¡¯re going to handpicking personnel for this one. I doubt they¡¯re going to ask us, that¡¯s another good contract out of our reach!¡±


    Adam shrugged before moving to a board that held descriptions of open contracts on it. Just as Adam found something promising, he heard heavy footfalls behind him.


    Heinrich boisterously called: ¡°Adam! I was going to send someone for you, but it looks like you¡¯re already here. I have something I need to ask you.¡±


    Adam turned around; ¡°Boss, are you talking about that Geisttier contract you just got?¡±


    Heinrich was surprised for a moment before he laughed: ¡°You listened in on that?¡±


    Adam gave a noncommittal shrug: ¡°Bruno and Clyde wanted to know if it was an interesting contract they could grab.¡±


    Heinrich shook his head: ¡°Well, that aside, I was hoping you could help me on this.¡±


    Adam gave a frown; ¡°Going up against a rampaging Geisttier sounds more than a little dangerous. You know I don¡¯t do that anymore.¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°I don¡¯t intend for you to fight it. I could take down a Geisttier easily enough, with support from the other Silver Saviors. Rather, I was hoping you could help me figure out why it is rampaging. Such an event isn¡¯t normal and something had to make it act like this.¡±


    Adam thought about it. It was unusual for a Geisttier to get unduly aggressive. To further his cause, Heinrich added: ¡°Besides, you¡¯ll have Silber with you. Between me and him, there¡¯s no way harm will get to you.¡±


    Adam gave a defeated sigh: ¡°Well, you¡¯ve got me interested. These other contracts have been rather¡­ boring. I still gotta talk to Helen first, though.¡±


    Heinrich gave a boisterous grin: ¡°Certainly, can¡¯t have you going off without the Missus¡¯ permission. One way or the other, we¡¯ll be leaving tomorrow at noon. I¡¯ll be waiting and hoping for good news from you!¡±


    Adam quickly stalked off, a tinge of embarrassment evident on his face. He had never gotten over how embarrassing it was to talk about his relationship with Helen with other people. He and Helen had yet to get officially married, but Heinrich was already considering them as such.


    Adam left pondering how he would talk to Helen about this. By the time he finally got back home, evening had already descended. He joined Helen and Vivienne in the kitchen, wehere they were preparing dinner.


    ¡°I¡¯m back.¡±


    Vivienne scolded him: ¡°What took you so long?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, I was mulling over a contract.¡±


    ¡°Speaking of jobs,¡± Helen interrupted, ¡°I talked to Floating Spirits, the dance troupe that owns a place in the upper district. They said they would consider adding me as an extra!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s wonderful! Just make sure they don¡¯t try anything shady.¡±


    Helen gave him a playful push: ¡°It¡¯ll be fine. They don¡¯t make their dancers wear skimpy clothes. They dress properly to put on a performance show told through dance. I really like the idea. I just hope I can actually get a part, even if it''s minor!¡±


    As they finished preparing dinner and sat down to eat, Vivienne asked: ¡°So, what is this contract you were mulling over?¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s one that has the potential of danger.¡±


    Helen perked up at that: ¡°I thought you weren¡¯t going to do this again.¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°They don¡¯t want me for the fight. A Geisttier is rampaging. If we knew why it was acting like this, we shouldn¡¯t have to fight at all. They want my help with that.¡±


    Helen chewed her food thoughtfully while Vivienne asked: ¡°Didn¡¯t they say the same thing about that dragon?¡±


    Adam nodded: ¡°This is a little different. No one saw the dragon before we found it, we just all assumed it was a Ghul. People have actually seen this Geisttier. Heinrich will be there and so will Silber. Everything should be covered.¡±


    Speaking of the devil, Silber took this time to prance into the room after a day full of playing in the Hill Garden. Adam cast him a critical eye: ¡°Coming in just in time to grab some dinner, huh?¡±


    Silber ignored Adam to sit right next to Helen and give her big puppy dog eyes. Helen beamed him a smile as she grabbed some food and put it on a spare plate she had already prepared. Silber gave her a happy bark of gratitude as she put the plate on the ground and he began digging in.


    Adam shook his head at this as he thought: ¡®So much for being a mysterious and powerful Geisttier.¡¯


    Helen turned her attention back to Adam: ¡°How dangerous do you really think this mission is?¡±


    Adam gave a shrug: ¡°Just the investigation part won¡¯t be that bad. Even if the Geisttier is fast, Silber is just as fast and I can react pretty quickly. If it tries to ambush us, I have my Spirit Sight which can easily spot it. If I get into a fight, I would quickly retreat to let Bossfinish it off. It would be more dangerous than the contracts I¡¯m currently taking, but it would be nowhere near the danger of dealing with a dragon. In fact, it¡¯ll probably be even less dangerous than a bandit subjugation contract.¡±


    Helen gave a defeated sigh: ¡°Will you be getting good pay for it?¡±


    Adam paused, he had forgotten to ask about that! Helen shook her head at him: ¡°We¡¯re no longer living at Madame¡¯s, Adam. We have to be conscious of our budget! Not only do we now have living expenses, but the house still has a lot of work left. You¡¯d better work your but off and get a hefty cut from this contract!¡±


    Adam smiled at her: ¡°I¡¯m sure I can work something out with Boss.

 Chapter 36 Bellach

    Bellach


    Adam prepared a small travel kit after dinner. As he rose the next morning, a bit of tension knotted itself in his chest. He looked at the gently stirring form of Helen next to him. He was just starting to get comfortable with living here and he had to go away for a few weeks!


    Adam took a slow breath and eased the tension some. No matter what, going out and helping others was worth it.


    ¡®Besides,¡¯ Adam thought; ¡®Helen wouldn¡¯t let me back out now. She¡¯s expecting that coin to help repair the house!¡¯


    Quietly chuckling at the thought, Adam got up. Once again, he did his morning exercises, followed by a breakfast prepared by Helen and Vivienne. After that, it was time for Adam to leave.


    Vivienne gave him a fierce hug, as she always did before he left. She spoke: ¡°Be careful, okay?¡±


    Adam chuckled: ¡°As much as I can be. See you when I get back, Mom.¡±


    Helen decided to go with Adam and Silber down to the Silver Saviors. The two walked hand-in-hand, savoring the moment before they would part. All too soon, though, they found themselves at their destination.


    Helen first bent down and gave Silber a good scratch behind his ears: ¡°Take care of Adam, okay? He likes to take risks.¡±


    ¡°Hey!¡±


    Adam felt even more discontent as Silber agreed with Helen. However, it was dampened as Helen gave Adam a radiant smile. She stood up and gave him a quick kiss before turning around and started walking away.


    She called back to him: ¡°Don¡¯t take too long or I¡¯ll move out!¡±


    Adam shook his head with a wry smile. He thought: ¡®She really knows how to push me.¡¯


    He then spoke to Silber: ¡°Come on, boy. Let¡¯s finish this contract quick!¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Adam and the twenty-odd other Silver Saviors Heinrich hand-picked for the contract approached the town of Bellach. They had made rather good time. The normal fourteen days it would take to get there, they had done in ten! They were a little weary from the march, but not exhausted.


    As they got closer, the tense atmosphere over Bellach quickly became apparent. Hasty wood palisade walls had been erected around the town. They had taken down all the trees around the town to form the walls, making the area look barren. At various points along the wall, a stick-thin watchtower stood. The men atop them held no bows, as such weapons would be next to useless against a Geisttier that could move faster than any normal man.


    As they entered the town through a shoddy gate in the palisade wall, they were approached by a group of militiamen. One of them spoke with hope in his voice: ¡°Are you mercenaries here to help us?¡±


    Heinrich stood at the front of their group and greeted the militiamen: ¡°Yes. I would like to get more specific details about this crazed Geisttier¡­¡±


    While Heinrich spoke with the men, Adam glanced around. Many of the buildings just behind the palisade wall were broken or even collapsed! There was even evidence of the palisade wall having previously been broken in places. Obviously, their defensive wall didn¡¯t do much to actually protect them. While Adam was examining the area, Silber began sniffing and investigating the area with interest.


    Heinrich walked up beside Adam and spoke: ¡°Come, Adam. We¡¯re off of to speak with the mayor. Hopefully, he knows something about why this all started.¡±


    Adam nodded, then asked: ¡°Are you coming, Silber?¡±


    A quick bark told Adam that Silber was more interested in digging through the rubble than following along. He responded: ¡°Suit yourself. I¡¯ll be back soon.¡±


    Adam and Heinrich were led by the militiamen to a three-story tall building, the largest building that could be found in Bellach. It was the city hall where the mayor ruled from. It was quiet, as they entered the building. There wasn¡¯t much work to be done here, as most services had stopped due to the series of attacks Bellach had suffered.


    Adam shook his head. The rest of Bellach was similar to the city hall; hardly anyone was walking about and most work had been stopped. He thought aloud: ¡°How could they live like this for weeks?¡±


    Heinrich gave a helpless sigh: ¡°They¡¯re desperate and afraid. I¡¯m not sure if you were able to notice, but the militiamen looked malnourished. Bellach is probably on the last dregs of its food stores. Soon, the whole town will be faced with a decision; leave their home, or starve to death! We need to solve this as fast as possible!¡±Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit.


    Adam responded with a firm nod as an older man walked briskly down the stairs to them with hope in his eyes. He asked: ¡°You¡¯re here to help us?¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°I¡¯m a martial artist. With the help of my group, we should be able to take care of the Geisttier one way or another. We wanted to get some more information on it before we head out, though.¡±


    ¡°Of course. Come, follow me to my office. Would you like some tea? It is the only luxury I have to offer during this¡­ trying time.¡±


    Bradley, as the mayor introduced himself, led the two of them to his office while his only assistant went to gather all of the reports made since the first attack. Pouring over the documents, Heinrich wasn¡¯t able to glean much. They were all general reports of what happened after the fact without much eye witness accounts, besides a few mentions.


    The Geisttier was a stag, which was already included in the information Heinrich had been given from the contract he took. Beyond that, nothing. The Geisttier just started attacking one day out of the blue!


    Heinrich couldn¡¯t help but ask: ¡°You¡¯re sure nothing was done to set it off?¡±


    Bradley gave an exasperated sigh: ¡°We don¡¯t know! It¡¯s ranged through the area for decades and it¡¯s never done anything like this! We hunt from its herds, obviously, but it has never minded unless the hunters culled too much from a herd. One or two hunters have died from its retaliation in these cases, but it has never attacked Bellach before!¡±


    After his outburst, Bradley took a few deep breaths before sipping his tea; ¡°Sorry, this whole thing has everyone on edge. Let me think about it, I¡¯m sure we didn¡¯t leave much out of the reports.¡±


    Bradley¡¯s assistant spoke: ¡°What about Gunter¡¯s report?¡±


    ¡°Gunter¡¯s? Ah, well I suppose it wouldn¡¯t hurt to say it.¡±


    ¡°What?¡± Heinrich asked.


    ¡°Well, despite it attacking us multiple times, hardly anyone has actually seen the Gesttier! It is so fast, we can only catch a glimpse of it before it is somewhere else. Gunter has- had the best eyes of anyone in Bellach. He was hit during the second attack by some debris and died shortly after. Before he died, though, he was mumbling something about matted fur and blood. It could mean he saw an injury on the stag, or it was just some mindless ramblings before he passed. No one has been able to confirm one or the other, as anyone who gets close to that thing dies, so¡­¡±


    Heinrich nodded: ¡°We¡¯ll keep it in mind. If there¡¯s nothing else, we¡¯ll head out and start tracking it.¡±


    As the two left the Bradley, Adam asked Heinrich: ¡°You think the Geisttier is attacking Bellach because it¡¯s injured?¡±


    Heinrich gave a quiet grunt while he was deep in his thoughts: ¡°Possibly, but I think the more important question is why it was injured.¡±


    ¡°... you think somebody did this intentionally?¡±


    Adam watched as Heinrich¡¯s soul became mired in dark thoughts. Heinrich then said: ¡°I think it likely, but it could still be something else. Let¡¯s get going and find out.¡±


    -----------------------------------------


    Picking up the Geisttier¡¯s trail would have been extremely difficult without Silber. The stag could leap in giant bounds, so any footprints it left in the area around Bellach were far and few between. It also moved so fast, its scent was too thin in the air for the regular dogs the Silver Saviors had brought along to catch. On the other hand, Silber was a Geisttier himself. His nose, along with many of his other senses, was vastly improved compared to the dogs. He had already picked up the Geisttier¡¯s scent from picking through the rubble of the buildings it had run down.


    Heinrich was extremely happy, as Adam told him that Silber had already picked up the scent: ¡°Hah! This is why I wanted the two of you along! Let Silber lead the way, but let¡¯s go slowly. It won¡¯t due to frighten the Geisttier into a fight if we appear too aggressive.¡±


    They followed Silber as he led them deep into the forest. The further they got, though, the more things started to become¡­ disturbing.


    Adam called for a halt as Silber stalled. With his Spirit Sight, he could see what Silber was pointing out. He called out to Heinrich: ¡°Another one.¡±


    Heinrich countenance was rather grim. This was already the fifth deer corpse they had found! Each was riddled with arrows and left for dead. This wasn¡¯t something hunters would do.


    Heinrich motioned for everyone to gather around him. He spoke in a grim tone: ¡°At this point, it should be pretty obvious; someone is aggravating the Geisttier! Keep an eye out for patrols or human tracks, I¡¯m not convinced that whoever¡¯s done this has left. Adam, do you think Silber will be able to communicate with the Geisttier? If we could at least tell it Bellach isn¡¯t responsible¡­¡±


    Adam looked at Silber: ¡°What do you think, can you do it?¡±


    Silber responded with a quiet, but confident bark. Adam in tuned gave a nod to Heinrich; ¡°We¡¯ll do our best to make it understand.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s get back to tracking it, then.¡±


    Continuing further into the forest, they found yet more dead deer. The deeper they went, the fresher the kills seemed to be. A few of the trackers even caught a few signs of human tracks about! The tension the group felt quickly began to rise.


    Adam could see it in each of them, plain as day. Their souls became taught and brittle, while their bodies were tiring. Despite how tired he was and the strain it would put on his mind, Adam began to quietly hum. He imbued his little tune with a bit of Spirit Essence. Sneaking up on them, a cool breeze began to gently float among the Silver Saviors. It was a small comfort, but it worked to ease the tension the others had. With their minds not as taught, they were able to focus better on keeping an eye out for anyone nearby. It was a small comfort, but it worked to ease the tension from their minds. A little more relaxed, they could focus better on the task at hand.


    Two hours later, Heinrich called for a stop. Adam¡¯s cool breeze couldn¡¯t do much for their exhaustion and more than a few of them were weary. Adam heaved a relieved sigh as he gently sat himself down on the ground. Just as Silber was about to join him, he perked up with alertness and turned. It was then that Adam saw it suddenly appear in his Spirit Sight!


    Although they had been trying to find the stag Geistier, it had found them instead!